OFFICE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (ELECT-PROJ.) CIDCO OF … · 2017-11-22 · 1.1.1 Supplying Main LT Panel, APFC Panel, Main DB, LED Fixtures, Street Lighting, CCTV / Telecommunication

CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED. Sl.Pg.No. C.A.NO. 32/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18

0

CITY & INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION OF

MAHARASHTRA LIMITED

VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(ELECTRICAL WORKS) & DRAWINGS

Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire Fighting System at Sanpada Railway Station cum Commercial Complex on MBR Corridor, Navi Mumbai.

C.A. No. : 32/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18

Due On : 19/12/2017 17.01 hrs. to 20/12/2017 17.00 hrs. on website cidco.maharashtra.etenders.in

Price : Rs. 12,600/- (Rupees Twelve Thousand and Six Hundred only)

(Including 5% GST) (Non-Refundable)

VOLUME – I : Contract Conditions & Bill of Quantities (BOQ)

VOLUME – II : Technical Specifications (Electrical Works) & Drawings

OFFICE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (ELECT-PROJ.)

CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED, 6th FLOOR, CIDCO BHAVAN, CBD-BELAPUR, NAVI MUMBAI.


1

Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire Fighting System at Sanpada Railway Station cum Commercial Complex on MBR Corridor, Navi Mumbai.

VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

& DRAWINGS

INDEX

SR.

NO. C O N T E N T S

Page Number

From To

I Index 1 2

II Scope of Work (Electrical) 3 7

III Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

1 Detailed Scope includes Supply, Installation, Testing

& Commissioning

8 14

2 General 15 16

3 Cable Work 17 29

4 Installation of Cables 30 49

5 Earthing 50 58

6 Lighting Arrestor System (ESE Type) 59 60

7 Safety Materials 61 63

8 415 V Switchgear Main Board (L.T. Panel) 64 76

9 Power Factor Improvement 77 79

10 MCB Distribution Boards (Sub Distribution Boards) 80 85

11 Conduiting and Wiring 86 117

12 Fixing Switch Boxes and Accessories 118 118

13 Testing of Installation for Wiring 119 122

14 Installation 123 126

15 Important Instruction for Point Wiring Electrical Works 127 130

16 Testing of Installation 131 134


2

SR.

NO. C O N T E N T S

Page Number

From To

17 Test Certificate 135 135

18 Technical Specification for Installation 136 143

19 Technical Specification for Testing & Commissioning 144 145

20 Technical Specification for Telephone Distribution

System

146 147

21 Diesel Generating Set 148 158

22 Cable Joints & End Termination Kits (LT/HT Cables) 159 160

23 HT Metering Cubicle 161 162

24 LED Street Light Fixtures 163 187

25 PVC / XLPE Cables (CB) 188 202

26 Fire Fighting 203 242

27 Fire Protection System 243 312

28 Plumbing 313 315

IV Codes and Standards 316 319

V List of Approved Makes of Material for

Electrical/ Mechanical items

320 330

VI List of Drawings 331 331

VII Drawings 332 333

Signature of Bidder Date :

Superintending Engineer (Elect-Proj.) Date :


3

SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL)

The Scope of the work includes all electrical works at Sanpada Railway

Station cum commercial Complex, Sanpada, Navi Mumbai.

Broadly the electrical works covers the following :

i) Providing internal electrification

ii) Installation of CCTV/telecommunication system.

iii) Fire fighting installation.

iv) Area/forecourt Street lighting

v) External electrification which includes Substation and allied works.

vi) Obtaining power supply to the Railway Complex.

vii) CCTV and telecommunication network.

ix) Co-ordination with CIDCO/NMMC /MSEDCL/ Railway/PWD/Fire Dept. /

Civil Design Dept.CIDCO & any other statutory Authority and

Architects/Consultants.

The Scope of work also includes Complete renovation & repairs of Railway

Station Complex, Platform area, Forecourt Areas Electrification works,

Telephonic Network, Fire Fighting System, including necessary co-ordination

with CIDCO/ Railway/MSEDCL/PWD / Fire Dept. / Civil Design Dept

CIDCO / Consultant authority. Further the successful agency has to co-

ordinate with civil agencies who are carrying out civil works at Railway

Stations.

GENERAL:

The Scope of work consists of :

1.0 Electrification work with providing LED Fittings of Railway &

Commercial Complex area, Forecourt area,

a) Laying of LT Cable network

b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set


4

c) Fire Fighting System

d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System

e) Providing Main LT Panels

f) Providing MCBDB

g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray

h) Earthing & Safety Systems

i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System

j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,

k) LED Light Fixtures

l) Street Light Poles

m) Allied Civil works

n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

installations

o) Definition of Indoor Substation:

11/0.4KV Indoor Substation means distribution transformers, 11 KV

panels and LT panels should be indoor, i.e inside the substation

building.

The Scope of work also includes obtaining power supply sanctions

from MSEDCL in the name of Railway Authority including necessary

co-ordination with Railway / MSEDCL/PWD authority. Further the

successful agency has to co-ordinate with civil agencies who are

carrying out civil works at both Railway Stations.

3.0 Providing & Commissioning of :

a) Laying of LT Cable network

b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set

c) Fire Fighting System

d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System


5

e) Providing Main LT Panels

f) Providing MCBDB

g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray

h) Earthing & Safety Systems

i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System

j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,

k) LED Light Fixtures

l) Street Light Poles

m) Allied Civil works

n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

installations

o) 11/0.4 KV substation equipments, indoor type with 11/0.4 KV

Transformer (Indoor type), L.T. XLPE armoured cable, Distribution

feeder pillars, etc.

p) L.T. Distribution network consisting of feeder pillars/minipillars

(outdoor type) complete with L.T. underground XLPE armoured cable

network upto consumer’s Electric meter room.

q) All related allied works like trenching, control wiring of panels,

earthing, safety equipments & obtaining statutory approvals.

1.0 The entire electrical works should be carried out in accordance

with the specifications without any extra cost. The work shall

conform to latest edition of Indian Standard Specifications &

Indian Electricity Rules.

2.0 The works shall be completed as per the requirement of

ISO:9002 & all required documents for the same shall be

made available.

3.0 The Technical specification of all the equipment and the

quantities required of various accessories & auxiliaries are

enclosed. The contractor shall also ascertain the quantities of


6

items such as cables, earthing material, trays, lighting fixtures,

supporting steel, etc. and procure the material as per

requirement. Excess material brought to site & not installed

shall not be accepted by CIDCO nor it will be paid for.

4.0 Inspection:

4.1 All equipment shall be offered for inspection.

4.2 The inspection shall be carried out by CIDCO, MSEDCL, Fire Dept. &

Consultant testing division representative at any stage of

manufacturing. The contractor shall give free access to the inspector

at a reasonable notice.

4.3 The equipment shall be offered for final inspection at least fifteen

days in advance to enable CIDCO to witness the acceptance tests.

4.4 No equipment shall be dispatched to site from the manufacturers

work unless dispatch clearance certificate is issued by the inspecting

authority of CIDCO/Consultant.

4.5 The contractor shall arrange for the inspection of the equipment by

CIDCO/Consultants representative & co-ordinate with them for timely

dispatches at no extra cost to CIDCO, including traveling & boarding

expenses.

5.0 Documentation:

5.1 The contractor on receipt of LOI shall submit five sets of relevant

descriptive & illustrative literature and general arrangement,

schematic drawings, foundation plans, and any other drawings and

the general technical particulars of all the equipment to be supplied.

5.2 On completion of the above works, and commissioning, the

contractor shall prepare a set of “as built drawings”, compile all the

vendor drawings, shop test reports, inspection reports, site test

reports, operation and maintenance literature of major equipments

for handing over to CIDCO. This shall be compiled in four sets duly


7

bound in a neat handy book. Separate comprehensive operation &

maintenance manual should be also be submitted in four sets.

6.0 Supervision of Erection:

The contractor shall arrange for a trained supervisor of respective

equipment manufacturer during installation, testing & commissioning

who will direct the sequence of erection, make necessary

adjustments/settings, make the equipment ready for testing, certify

the pre-commissioning checks and give permission for

commissioning. This shall be arranged by the contractor at no extra

cost to CIDCO.

7.0 The drawings given in the tender are indicative. The successful

agency will have to make his own assessment before execution of

work.




8

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK FOR PROPOSED PROJECT

1.1 THE DETAILED SCOPE INCLUDES SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING

& COMMISSIONING OF FOLLOWING:

The scope of work under this contract comprises Supply, installation,

Testing & Commissioning Internal & external Electrical work, for

Sanpada Railway Station & Commercial Complex, Sanpada, Navi

Mumbai. The work shall be carried out and completed under this

contract in every respect in conformity with the current rules and

regulations of the local electricity authority, the Indian Standard

Institution, Relevant IS as modified upto date. Where IS codes do not

exist, the British Standards shall be followed. IE Rules 1956 as amended

upto date, for Electrical Works (Part - I) Internal, (Part -II) External 2005

and (Part - IV) 2007, with correction slips upto the date of Tendering

and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the Architect/

Consultant/ Owner/PMC. The Contractor shall supply all labour and

supply and install all materials, appliances, equipment necessary for the

complete provision and testing of the whole Electrical Installation as

specified herein and shown on the drawings. This also includes any

material, appliances, equipment not specifically mentioned herein or

noted on the drawings as being furnished or installed but which are

necessary and customary to make complete installation with all outlets

for power, light, conduits and other electrical systems shown on the

schedule or described herein, properly connected and in working

condition.

The work shall include all incidental jobs connected with electrical

installation such as cutting/drilling and grouting for fixing of fixtures,

equipment etc.

The work as indicated in the scope of work attached herewith includes

any modification/addition/alteration required.


9

The brief description of the scope of internal and external electrification,

works under this contract shall include the design, engineering,

manufacture, assembly, testing, delivery, erection and commissioning of

electrical system including supply of all material, labour, Transport,

Wastage & Packing etc. for followings -

SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.1 Supplying Main LT Panel, APFC Panel, Main DB, LED Fixtures, Street

Lighting, CCTV / Telecommunication System, Fire Pumps, Supply

62.5kVA DG sets & its AMF control panel.

• Excavation of Soft Rock for laying of Earthing conductors etc in

soft soil.

• Excavation in Hard Rock for laying of Earthing conductors laying

etc.

• Excavation for Cable laying in SOFT ROCK shall include

readymade trenches/ Hume pipes/ HDPE pipes on cable trays

with end termination.

1.1.2 LT cabling work : LT - XLPE armoured cable / PVC armoured cable,

Various Switchboards, AC Equipments and Power and lighting

Distribution Boards, water pumps and Fire pumps etc.

1.1.3 Supply & Installation Miscellaneous Item like pipes, Cable Trays, steel

fabrication etc.

1.1.4 Mains and Sub mains between various panels, meter boards and

distribution boards.

1.1.5 SITC of Sub and branch distribution boards, MCB's and RCCB's etc.

1.1.6 SITC of Cable trays of various sizes for cable laying suitably fixed to

ceiling / wall inside the premises with necessary supports.

1.1.7 SITC of External Lighting fixtures : Supply & Fixing of Light fittings with

suitable fixing accessories for the common areas such as substation,

concourse forecourt, lobby common area, staircase areas etc,. External


10

Lighting arrangements for Parking area, Roads, Focus lighting including

cabling, lighting poles etc.

1.1.8 Wiring in conduit for various Light Fittings / Plug points / UPS plug

points etc.

1.1.9 Earthing/ Grounding with necessary copper / GI / earth pits. As per

BOQ

1.1.10 SITC Lightning Arrestors System

1.1.11 All Internal & External electrification work subject to complete the job up

to client satisfaction.

1.1.12 Point wiring with Conduits for all type of wiring including circuits, sub

mains, light, fans, power and AC etc.

1.1.13 Switches and socket outlets, conduiting for light, fans, plug, power, Tel,

TV, computer network, Industrial raw power socket etc with suitable

MS/GI boxes with accessories complete.

1.1.14 SITC Voice & Data networking.

1.1.15 Installation, Testing & commissioning of CCTV complete as per BOQ.

1.1.16 SITC of Fire alarm system as per BOQ.

1.1.17 Miscellaneous works required for system completion.

1.1.18 Preparation of as built drawings for all the systems.

1.1.19 Insurance for all the materials and complete work.

1.2 All the above work shall be complete in all respects up to the satisfaction

of architect, consultant, Client and Engineer as per the details

mentioned in BOQ and drawings supplied time to time. Unless and

otherwise mentioned in the tender documents the following scope of

works shall be done by the contractor, and therefore their cost shall be

deemed to be included in their tendered cost:

a. Furnishing of all labour , skilled and unskilled, supervisory and

administrative personnel, erection tools and tackles, testing

equipment, implements, supplies, consumables like welding rods

and gas, oil and grease, cleaning fluids, insulating tape, anti


11

corrosive paints, jute cotton waste etc., and hardware for timely

and efficient execution of the erection work.

b. Transport vehicles necessary for efficient transportation of

equipment from Owner's stores to site of erection and excess

materials back to owner's stores.

c. Complete assembly, erection and connection, testing and

commissioning, putting into successful and satisfactory

commercial operations of above equipment.

d. The items of work to be performed on all equipment and

materials shall include but not limited to the following:

i. Receiving, unloading and transportation at site. (To Owner

or Contractor's stores and from their upto actual place of

erection).

ii. Storing at site with suitable all weather protection.

iii. Assemblies, erection and complete Installation.

iv. Necessary coordination between work done by other

Contractors. Showing number and size of cables in cable

tray/trench, Fixing Details of Cable Trays.

d. Layout shall also show point wiring /telephone/TV outlets and

routing of conduits.

e. Any other drawing required for completion of the project if

required.

f. CCTV & FAS routing of conduits Drawings.

The above mentioned drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD

2006 shall be submitted in minimum A1 size on a scale as decided by

the Consultant.

1.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS (2 sets of soft copies on CD and six sets of hard

copies duly wound): As part of the handing over documents after

successful completion of the work, the Bidder shall submit to the

Owner/Architect/Consultant/PMC AS BUILT drawings drawn at


12

approved scale indicating the complete Electrical system "As installed".

These drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD 2006. These drawings

shall in particular, give the following information:

a. D. G. Set, L.T. Panels, Meter Boards, Earthing pits, etc.

b. Street Lighting Arrangement

b. Cables, dummy pipes, earthing and all other services covered

under this contract.

c. Complete Schematic Diagram of the installation of all services

with cable sizes etc.

d. Location of all Railway area, Commercial Area, Forecourt area,

lighting points, Power Points, Telephone points, Energy Meter with

complete scheme.

e. Routing of Conduits, Raceways, Sub main Conduiting, Cable

Trays, Cabling and Earthing strips/wires.

1.3.1 Other Drawings which are necessary to complete the Project.

1.3.1.1 No completion certificate will be issued until the completion drawings in

the above mentioned forms are submitted. The drawings will be

prepared and submitted by the contractor without any extra charge.

1.4 OTHER RELATED INFORMATION:

1. All Annexure of this specification duly filled in and signed by the

contractor.

2. Transportation/shipping dimensions and weights, space required for

handling parts for maintenance.

3. Type test certificates for all equipment on similar type of equipment.

4. Cable schedule & interconnection chart.

5. Foundation details and plan, loading details for all equipment.

6. Test certificates, Test Procedures at sites.

7. Test reports of all tests carried out at site.

8. Spare part lists


13

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1.5.1 As part of the handing over documents, the Bidder shall submit 6 draft

copies + soft copies in CD's detailed installation, operation and

maintenance manuals/schedule & log sheets for all systems and

equipment of manufacturers for all items of equipment included in this

contract, together with all relevant data sheet, spare parts catalogues,

repairs, assembly and adjustment procedure etc to the Engineer. The

manuals shall contain basis of design, detailed technical data and

drawings for each equipment as installed, the erection, testing,

operation and maintenance procedures, spare parts manual and

recommended spares for 3 year period of maintenance of each

equipment including tools & tackles.

1.5.2 The Contractor shall also submit the Preventive maintenance schedule

for the equipment supplied.

1.5.3 The Contractor shall submit four sets of the final Manuals (incorporating

comments, if any, of Engineer) complete in all respects.

1.6 IMPORT LICENSE

1.6.1 For importing any item if any import license/L.C. is required, the

Contractor shall make required arrangements. Any delay on this

account shall be to Contractors account.

1.7 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

1.7.1 The Bidder shall train Owner's Personnel to operate the equipment

installed, to carry out routine maintenance work including lubrication,

overhauling, adjustments, testing, minor repairs and replacement.

Nothing extra shall be payable.

1.7.2 Training shall be done before the expiry of the defects liability period.

The period of training shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and

Contractor.

1.7.3 Owner reserves the right to inspect any equipment/material to be

supplied by the Bidder as part of his scope of work, at manufacturer's

works. The Bidder shall provide and secure for the Owner's Authorized


14

Representative every reasonable access and facility at the manufacturer

works for inspection and testing.

1.8 MAKE OF MATERIALS /MATERIAL SAMPLE

1.8.1 The Bidder shall supply the material as per list of Approved make of

material enclosed in the contract. Alternative make shall be used with

the specific written approval of Consultant/ Owner. It shall also be the

responsibility of the Contractor to submit without any extra charge the

samples of the materials/equipment as and when asked by the

Architect/Consultant. Due to non‐availability of any material mentioned

in the specifications, substitute material shall be used only after detail of

material accompanied by all technical data, sizes, particulars of

material and manufacturers name along with the credit due to Owner, if

any, shall be submitted to Owner for obtaining written approval from

Owner / Consultant, for such material.


15

2.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 The entire electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with

Indian electricity code & relevant IS standards upto date. The work shall

also comply with all statutory regulations of supply agencies, state

inspection authorities & fire regulations so far as these become

applicable to the installation.

2.1.2 Electrical work in general shall be carried out as per following

specifications.

2.1.3 Wherever this specifications calls for a higher standard of material and

or workmanship than those required by any of the above mentions

regulations and specification then the specification here under shall take

precedence over the said regulations and standards.

2.1.4 The details of scope of work subhead wise are given in the subsequent

paras. The quantities worked out in schedule of quantities are based on

particular equipment considered at design stage. The contractor is

required to recheck the quantities based on equipment offered by him to

achieve required parameters.

2.1.5 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary statutory

approvals, clearances, sanctions, drawing approvals & getting actual

connections.

2.1.6 Definition of terms pertaining to all technical requirements as per IEE /

IS shall apply.

2.1.7 Contractor shall submit all necessary drawings for scrutiny & approval

by Engineer/Consultant prior to taking up of works. Contractor shall

immediately bring out the difficulties faced in execution of works to the

notice of Engineer / Owner / Consultant.

2.1.8 All material, equipment, fittings used in the installation shall be of

approved quality confirming to relevant IS specifications.

2.1.9 On completion of works contractor shall carry out all necessary test such

as insulation resistance test, continuity of conductor & earth resistance &

functional tests along with commissioning checks to the satisfaction of

Consultant / Engineer.

2.1.10 Contractor shall furnish necessary test certificates as required by

authorities & Consultant.

2.1.11 List of standards relevant to the works is enclosed.


16

2.1.12 Installation of equipment shall include all necessary works & fixing

accessories like hardware, clamps, round blocks, support boxes etc.

required for completing installing satisfactorily.

2.1.13 Complete room by room technical & functional checking will be done

for equipment & installation before handling over & a consolidated

acceptance test report shall be prepared by contractor based on formats

given along with test certificates of bought out items, certificates of tests

carried out at site. The acceptance test will be jointly done & signed by

all the parties noting remarks.

2.1.14 The labels shall be engraved / anodized aluminium with white

letters on black background or non‐ removable stickers. The nameplates

shall not be screwed on. In additions to component labels, each cubicle

door shall bear a large identification label and the board shall

include a large, prominent overall identification Label.

2.2 PAINTING

2.2.1 Care shall be taken in workmanship and selection of materials to

prevent the occurrence of any form of damage or corrosion due to

damp or humid conditions.

2.2.2 The Board shall be prepared, primed, filled and painted to the highest

standards.

2.2.3 All items shall be cleaned and deburred, after fabrication and welding is

completed. External surfaces shall be filled and rubbed down as

necessary to obtain a perfectly flat smooth surface, free from blemishes

and imperfections. Panel Colour shade RL7035 as per IS : 5.

2.2.4 Final paint colour shed shall be pre approved by the Consultant /

Owner.

2.3 CLEARANCE

2.3.1 Minimum insulator lengths and clearances in air shall be not less than

those specified for class A switchgear in IS: 3427.

2.4 TEMPERATURE RISE

2.4.1 The design ambient shall be 50 deg. C. The limits of temperature rise

determined in accordance with the relevant standard, shall be reduced

such that the final temperature obtained at site does not exceed the final

temperature computed by the addition of the design ambient

temperature.


17

3.0 CABLE WORK

3.1 SCOPE

This section covers supply, laying and jointing as required and testing

and energizing all cable work.

3.2 SPECIFICATION OF CABLE

3.2.1 11KV Grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed round armoured

Aluminum/Copper cable shall be 3 core earthed of sizes as specified in

BOQ . The cable shall conform to IS‐1554, Part II

3.2.2 11KV Grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed round armoured

Aluminum/Copper cable shall be 31/2/4 core of sizes as specified. The

cable shall conform to IS: 1554, Part-I.

3.2.3 All control wires shall be 650V grade copper conductor Halogen free

fire retardant or FRLS PVC insulated, conforming to IS: 1554 Part I. The

minimum size of the control wires shall be 1.5 sq.mm.

3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Cable shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on wall as

specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required.

The complete work shall be in accordance to specifications. As far as

possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but laid on cable

trays.

3.4 TESTING

3.4.1 Testing of the complete cable installation shall be as per IE rules

3.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

3.5.1 This technical specification covers complete design, engineering,

manufacture, inspection packing and forwarding and testing,

commissioning, energizing (a) power cables (b) GI perforated cable

trays complete in all respects along with their supporting/fixing

arrangements (c) laying & fixing of cable trays on supporting system,

earthing of cable trays and laying of various sizes of power & cables in

cable trays, fixing of cables on trays, termination, ferruling of cable


18

strands, marking of lugs & cable glands, complete erection, testing and

commissioning at site of FRLS power, control cables, cable trays and

cabling etc. as detailed hereinafter in the specification.

3.5.2 Complete laying jointing, preparation of end terminals, marking, fixing

of lugs & cable glands, its connection to the equipment and to overhead

line with cable boxes/suitable cable termination end, testing and

commissioning of HT Cables, L.T. power cables, D.C. cables and

control cables etc. at site. All cable work and cable trays as per

specifications schedule of quantities and drawings.

* LT XLPE Cables

Voltage Grade : 1100 V

Relevant Standards : IS 7098 ( Part - 1 ) 1988, IS

up to date amendments :

Max Conductor Temp in Operation : 90 C

Max Temp during Short Circuit : 250 C

Short Circuit Rating Duration : 1 Second

Type of Insulation : XLPE

Type of Conductor : Copper / Aluminium as per

Type of Armour : GI Round as per cable

Type of Outer Sheath : FRLS PVC

Selection Criteria : up to 16 sqmm CU and

Inclusive and above Al

* LT PVC Cables

Voltage Grade : 1100 V

Relevant Standards : IS 7098 ( Part – 1 ) 1988, IS 1554 part I

Max Conductor Temp in Operation : 70 C

Max Temp during Short Circuit : 160 C

Short Circuit Rating Duration : 1 Second


19

Type of Insulation : FRLS PVC

Type of Conductor : Copper / Aluminum as per cable schedule

Type of Armour : GI Round / Strip as per cable schedule

Type of Outer Sheath : FRLS PVC

Selection Criteria : Upto 16 sq.mm and Inclusive Cu & above

* CONTROL WIRES

All control wires shall be 650 V grade copper conductor Halogen free

Fire retardant or FRLS PVC insulate, confirming IS: 1554 part I, the

minimum size of control wire shall be 1.5 sq.mm.

3.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

3.6.1 The materials shall conform to the latest editions of the following

Indian/International Standards:

1. IS 7098 Part 2 : 1985 XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cables For

working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 33 kV

2. IS 5831 : 1984 PVC Insulation and Sheath of electric Cables

3. IS 8130:1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and

flexible cords.

4. IS 613:1984 Copper rods and bars for electrical purposes.

5. IS 3975:1988 Mild steel wires, formed and tapes for armouring

of cable.

6. IS 10810:1984 Method of tests for cables.

7. IEEE‐383:1974 Standard for type test of class IE electric cables,

field splices, and connections for nuclear power generating

stations.

8. ASTM‐D2843,1993 Standard test method for density of smoke

from burning or decomposition of plastics.

9. ASTM‐D2863, 1991 Standard test method for measuring

minimum oxygen concentration to support candle like

combustion of plastics (oxygen index).


20

10. NEMA‐WC5,1992 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and cable for

the transmission and distribution of Electrical Energy.

11. IEC:754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of electric

cables ‐

12. (Part‐1):1994 Determination of the amount of halogen acid gas

evolved during combustion of polymeric materials taken from

cables.

13. IEC:332 Test on electric cables under fire conditions

14. (Part I):1993 Test on a single vertical insulated wire or cable.

15. IS 3961 Recommended current rating for cables ‐

16. (Part II):1967 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed heavy duty

cables.

17. IS 10418:1982 Drums for electric cables.

Cables conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which

ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above,

would also be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material

conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference

between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be

clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards

with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the

offer. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS, (ii) IEC,

(iii) Other standards. In case of any difference between provisions of

these standards and provisions of this specification, the provisions

contained in this specification shall prevail.

3.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.7.1 All cables shall be suitable for high ambient, high humid tropical Indian

Climatic conditions. Cables shall be designed to withstand the

mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under the unforeseen steady

state and transient conditions and shall be suitable for proposed

method of installation.


21

3.8 CONDUCTOR

3.8.1 The conductor shall be Aluminum / Copper as specified in the Schedule

of Quantities. It shall be smooth, uniform in quality and free from scale

and other defects. The stranded conductor shall be clean and

reasonably uniform in size and shape. The conductor shall be compact

circular having resistance within limits as specified in Table‐2 of IS:

8130 /1984 and any amendment thereof.

3.9 CONDUCTOR SHIELD

3.9.1 Conductor shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the

insulation. The semi‐conductor polymer shall be cross linked.

3.10 INSULATION

3.10.1 Insulation shall be cross linked polyethylene and it shall preferably be

gas‐cured for XLPE cables.

3.10.2 The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for specified system voltage.

The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulation shall be free

from voids. The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal

stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions. The

extrusion method shall give very smooth interface between

semi‐conducting screen and insulation. The insulation of the cables

shall be of high standard quality and conform to Clause‐11 of IS: 7098

(Part‐II)/1985 or latest amendment thereof.

3.10.3 Insulation shall be PVC for PVC cable as specified in the Schedule of

quantities.

3.10.4 Cable shall be provided with copper metallic screen suitable for carrying

earth fault current. For single core armoured cables the armouring shall

constitute the metallic part of the screening.

3.11 SHEATH

3.11.1 Inner Sheath: In case of cables consisting of two or more cores inner

sheath suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired

temperature shall be provided on the individual core and then

surrounded by common covering applied either by extrusion or

wrapping of a filling material containing thermoplastic material. It shall

be of adequate thickness and applied by continuous process to produce


22

a sheath of consistent quality free from all defects. PVC sheath shall be

extruded. The circularity of the cable should be maintained.

3.11.2 Outer Sheath: This is extruded over the armour for armoured

cables and cover the inner sheath for unarmoured cables. It shall be

specially formulated heat resistant black PVC compound conforming to

the requirement of type ST2 of IS:5831‐1984, extruded to form the

outer sheath. The cable should also offer a specially formulated FRLS for

outer sheath. Suitable additives be added to prevent attack by rodents

and termites. All serving must be given anti‐termite treatment. The

thickness of the sheaths shall be as per relevant standards.

3.11.3 All armoured and multi‐core un‐armoured cables shall have distinct

extruded inner PVC sheath of black colour.

3.11.4 Armouring ‐ Material for armour for Single Core Cable shall be

Aluminum wire. For Multicore cable it shall be GS wire round.

Armouring shall be as per relevant IS and it shall have minimum 90%

coverage. The dimensions of round steel wire shall be as per IS: 7098

(Part‐II)/1985 and its latest amendment and wire shall conform to

latest provisions of IS: 3975 – 1988 and amendment thereof.

3.11.5 Breaking Load of the joints shall be minimum 95% of the normal

armour.

3.11.6 Outer Sheath – Extruded PVC outer sheath of type ST‐2 as per IS:

5831/1984 and its latest amendment shall be applied over armouring

with suitable additives to prevent attack by rodent and termite and its

thickness shall be in accordance with Clause –17.32 of IS:7098

(Part‐III)/1985 and latest amendment thereof

3.11.7 FRLS Properties ‐ All cable shall be Flame Retardant Low Smoke type.

3.12 OUTER SHEATH:

3.12.1 All cables specified in the Schedule of Quantities shall have Outer

sheath to reduce the Fire hazard.


23

3.13 ARMOUR

3.13.1 The armour may be of galvanized steel wires.

3.14 SERVING

3.14.1 The cable serving shall protect the cable sheath and armour from

electrolysis caused by stray currents, and from galvanic action. It shall

also protect the cable from mechanical damage and corrosion.

3.15 GENERAL

3.15.1 The cable shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stresses under

steady state and transient operating conditions.

3.16 OPERATION

3.16.1 Cable shall be suitable for lying in trenches / ducts and direct in ground.

3.16.2 Cables shall have heat and moisture resistant properties. These shall be

of type and design, with proven record of distribution network service.

3.17 LENGTHS

3.17.1 The cables shall be supplied in standard drum lengths i.e. 250

/500/1000 Meters. Non‐standard length is not acceptable.

3.18 TEMPERATURE RISE

3.18.1 The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 degree C

during continuous operation at full rated current. The temperature after

short circuit for 1.0 second shall not exceed 250 degree C with initial

conductor temperature of 90 degree C.

3.18.2 Bidder shall give the following information in the Bid for each conductor

cross section

a. Rated continuous current

b. Rated 1.0 second short circuit / short time current

3.18.3 Rating factor shall be given by the Bidder for the following:

a. Variation in ground temperature

b. Variation in soil thermal resistivity.


24

c. Variation of Ambient Temperature

d. For the cables laid side by side, at ID spacing and in Tier

formation.

3.18.4 The Bidder shall also indicate the percentage overload that the cable

can carry and its duration, when operating initially at a conductor

temperature of 90 degree C, with peak conductor temperature of 130

degree C.

3.19 SUBMITTALS

3.19.1 Cable schedules & Shop Floor Drawings for cable laying and routing.

3.19.2 Layout of various cables on cable tray / trench along with sections

showing no. of cables, distance between cables etc, size of cable trays

etc.

3.19.3 Cable tray layout, as per site condition, duly coordinated with other

services.

3.19.4 Weight of one meter of finished product of cable of various sizes and

ratings.

3.19.5 Weight of one meter of bare conductor used for cables of various sizes

and ratings.

3.20 TEST REPORTS

3.20.1 All tests as per relevant IS shall be conducted and shall be witnessed by

the Client.

3.20.2 Routine test certificates for each cable.

3.20.3 The following shall constitute routine tests:

a. Conductor resistance test

b. Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)

c. High voltage tests.

3.20.4 Optional tests Cold impact tests for outer sheath (IS:5831‐1984) shall

constitute the optional tests.

3.21 TYPE TESTS

3.21.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of type test certificates

conducted on similar cables along with the


25

a. Partial discharge test

b. Bending test followed by partial discharge c. Dielectric power

factor as function of

d. Dielectric power factor as function of temperature

e. Heating cycle test followed by dielectric power factor as a

function of voltage and partial discharge tests.

h. FRLS Properties Test.

3.21.2 Routine and Acceptance tests as laid down in IS: 7098 (Part‐II) 1985

with latest amendment thereof shall be carried out by the

client/consultant sample selected at random as per relevant ISS. In

addition to above, length check on one drum per inspection lot shall

also be carried out by the Client / consultant for which Supplier shall

make all necessary arrangements and provide all necessary facilities at

his own cost.

3.22 STORAGE AND HANDLING

3.22.1 All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked for any

damage during transit. Cable drums shall be stored on a well drained,

hard surface, preferably of concrete, so that the drums do not sink in the

ground causing rot and damage to the cable drums.

3.22.2 During storage periodical rolling of drums once in 3 months through

90o shall be done. Rolling shall be done in the direction of the arrow

marked on the drum.

3.22.3 It should be ensured that both ends of the cable are properly

sealed to prevent ingress/absorption of moisture by the insulation.

3.22.4 Protection from rain and sun shall be ensured. Sufficient ventilation

between cable drums, should be ensured during storage.

3.22.5 The drums shall always be rested on the flanges and not on the flat

sides.

3.22.6 A layer of water proof paper shall be applied to the surface of the

drums and over the outer most cable layer.


26

3.22.7 A clear space of at least 40mm shall be left between the cables and the

logging.

3.22.8 Damaged battens of drums etc. should be replaced, if necessary.

3.22.9 When cable drums have to be moved over short distances, they should

be rolled in the direction of the arrow, marked on the drum.

3.22.10 For transportation over long distances, the drum should be mounted on

cable drum wheels strong enough to carry the weight of the drum and

pulled by means of ropes. Alternatively, they may be mounted on a

trailer or on a suitable mechanical transport.

3.22.11 When unloading cable drums from vehicles, a crane shall preferably be

used. Otherwise the drum shall be rolled down carefully on a suitable

ramp or rails, where necessary.

3.22.12 While transferring cable from one drum to another, the barrel of the

new drum shall have a diameter not less than that of the original drum.

3.22.13 The cables shall not be bent sharp to a small radius. The minimum safe

bending radius for all types of XLPE cables shall be taken as 12 times

the overall diameter of the cable. Wherever practicable, larger radius

should be adopted. At joints and terminations, the bending radius of

individual cores of a multi core cable shall not be less than 15 times its

overall diameter.

3.22.14 Cable with kinks and straightened kinks or with similar apparent defects

like defective armouring etc. shall be rejected.

3.22.15 Cables from the stores shall be supplied by the contractor as per the site

requirement in pieces cut in the stores.

3.22.16 The length of the cable on each drum shall be as per IS:10418‐1972.

3.22.17 Cable shall be supplied in non‐returnable wooden drums of heavy

construction. The wood used for construction of the drum shall be

properly seasoned, sound and free from defects and wood preservative

shall be applied to the entire drum.

3.22.18 The successful bidder shall obtain owner’s approval for the drum

lengths, before packing the cables on drums.


27

3.22.19 Packing shall be sturdy to protect the cable from any injury during

transportation, handling and storage. The cut ends of the cable shall be

sealed by means of non hygroscopic sealing material.

3.22.20 The cable shall carry the following information either stenciled on the

drum or contained in a label attached to it:‐

i) Reference to this Indian standard

ii) Manufacturer’s name, brand or trade mark iii) Type of cable

and voltage grade

iv) No. of cores

v) Nominal cross‐sectional area of conductor

vi) Cable code

vii) Length of cable on drum

viii) No. of lengths on reel, drum or coil (if more than one)

ix) Gross weight

x) Country of manufacture

xi) Year of manufacture

xii) Direction of rotation of drum (an arrow)

3.23 IDENTIFICATION:

3.23.1 The conductor cores shall be identified with codes as per relevant Indian

Standards.

3.23.2 The cables shall carry the manufacturer's name or trade mark and the

word identified throughout its length. The manufacturer's data shall

include the name, the cable size, voltage rating together with any other

information which the manufacturer considers appropriate. This

identification endorsed or print shall be done only on the outer sheath

3.24 SPECIFICATION FOR PVC ARMOURED CABLE

3.24.1 All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise

the

3.24.2 Installation shall generally follow the Indian Standard codes of practice

or the


28

3.24.3 British Standard Codes of practice where Indian standards are not

available.

3.25 CABLES

3.25.1 All cables shall be 1100 Volt grade outer sheathed FRLS PVC

insulated, sheathed with or without steel armouring as specified and

with an outer PVC protective sheath. Cables shall have high

conductivity stranded aluminium or copper conductors and cores shall

be colour coded to the Indian Standards.

3.25.2 All cables shall be new without any kinds or visible damage. The

manufacturers name, insulating material, conductor size and voltage

class shall be marked on the surface of the cable at every 600 mm

centers.

3.26 CABLE PARTICULARS:

3.26.1 Full technical details and descriptive literature shall be furnished

indicating the construction details, standard applicable for the

components of the cable and current ratings of the cables in air and

ground. De‐ rating factors to be considered for the ambient

temperature, ground temperature and grounding of cable in air and

ground shall be furnished. The certificates for the type tests conducted

on cables similar to the cables covered herein shall be submitted along

with the tender.

3.27 CURRENT RATINGS:

3.27.1 The cables will have current ratings and de rating factors as per relevant

Indian Standards.

3.27.2 The one second short circuit current rating values shall be furnished

and shall be subjected to the purchaser’s approval.

3.27.3 The current rating shall be based on maximum conductor temperature

depending on the type of insulation for continuous at the rated current.

3.28 NORMAL SERVICE CONDITIONS:

3.28.1 The cables shall be used in the sub‐station having an ambient

temperature of –5 deg.C to 50 deg.C.


29

3.29 OPERATION:

3.29.1 Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under a power

supply system frequency variation of +3%, ‐5% voltage variation of

±10%.

3.29.2 Cables shall be suitable for laying in conduits, ducts, trenches,

channels, trays, racks or for direct buried in ground in both dry and wet

locations with chances of flooding by water.

3.29.3 Cables shall have heat and moisture resistance properties. These shall

be of type and design with proven record of underground Sub‐Station.

3.30 QUANTITY:

3.30.1 The various sizes and quantities of cables required are given in the

Schedule of Quantity. The quantity is approximate and can be changed

at the time of placing the order to the extent of ±15%.


30

4.0 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 Cable shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on walls as

specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required.

As far as possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but

laid on cable trays.

4.1.2 Cables shall be laid in the routes marked in the drawings. Where the

route is not marked, the contractor shall mark it out on the drawings

and also on the site and obtain the approval of the Consultants / Client

before laying the cable. Procurement of cables shall be on the basis of

actual site measurements and the quantities shown on the schedule of

work shall be regarded as a guide.

4.1.3 The cable installation including necessary joints shall be carried out

in accordance with the specifications given herein. For details not

covered in these specifications, I.S. 1255 shall be followed. No straight

through joint shall be permitted in the system. The cables shall be

supplied as per cable schedule submitted by the contractor & approved

by Engineer.

4.2 ROUTE

4.2.1 Before the cable laying work is undertaken, the route of the cable shall

be decided by the Engineer.

4.2.2 While shortest practicable route shall be preferred, cable runs shall

generally follow fixed developments such as roads, foot‐paths etc. with

proper offsets so that future maintenance, identification etc. are

rendered easy. Cross country run to shorten the route length is not

desirable as it would lead to route identification and maintenance

problems, besides posing difficulties during later development of

open areas etc.

4.2.3 While selecting cable routes, corrosive soils, ground surrounding

sewage and effluent etc. shall be avoided. Where this is not feasible,

special precautions as approved by the Engineer shall be taken.


31

4.2.4 As far as possible, the alignment of the cable route shall be decided

taking into consideration the present and future requirements of other

agencies and utility services affected by it, the existence of any cable in

the vicinity as may be indicated by cable markers or cable schedules or

drawing maintained for that area, possibilities of widening of

roads/lanes, storm water drains etc. Cable routes shall be planned

away from the drains and should be within the property.

4.2.5 Cables of different voltages and also power and control cables shall be

kept in different trenches with Adequate separation. Where available

space is restricted, MV cables shall be laid above HV cables. Where

cables cross one another the cable of higher voltage shall be laid at a

lower level than the cable of lower voltage.

4.3 WAY LEAVE

4.3.1 It may be necessary to obtain way leave for the cable route from the

appropriate authorities some of whom are listed below :

4.3.1.1 Drainage, Public Health and Water Works.

4.3.1.2 Telephones and Telegraphs.

4.3.1.3 Gas works.

4.3.1.4 Other Undertakings.

4.3.1.5 Owners of properties.

4.3.2 Where necessary, joint inspection with representatives of other

authorities may be arranged so that mutual interests are safe guarded.

In case of private property, Section 12/51 of the Indian Electricity Act

shall be complied with.

4.3.3 Proximity to Communication Cables

4.3.3.1 Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right

angles. Where power cables are laid in proximity to communication

cables the horizontal and vertical clearances shall not normally be less

than 60 cms.


32

4.4 LAYING DIRECT IN GROUND

4.4.1 GENERAL

4.4.1.1 This method shall be adopted where the cable route is through open

country along roads/lanes etc. and Where no frequent excavation are

encountered and where excavation is easily possible without affecting

other services.

4.5 WIDTH OF TRENCH

4.5.1 The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis:

4.5.1.1 The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be 35 cm.

4.5.1.2 Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in

horizontal formation, the width of trench shall be increased such that the

inter‐axial spacing between the cables, except where otherwise specified

shall be at least 20 cm.

4.5.1.3 There shall be a clearance of at least 15 cm between axis of the end

cables and the sides of the trench.

4.6 DEPTH OF TRENCH

4.6.1 The depth of trench shall be determined on the following basis:

4.6.1.1 Where cables are laid in single tier formation, the total depth of trench

shall not be less than 75 cm for cables upto 1.1 KV and 1.20 m for

cables above 1.1 KV.

4.6.1.2 When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical

formation of laying is adopted, depth of trench in a (i) above shall be

increased by 30 cm. for each additional tier to be formed.

4.7 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES

4.7.1 The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines.

Wherever there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be

provided complying with the requirements of Clause 6.6/k.

4.7.2 Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be

gradual.


33

4.7.3 Excavation shall be done by any suitable means‐manual or mechanical.

The excavated soil hall be stacked Firmly by the side of the trench such

that it may not fall back into the trench.

4.7.4 Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables,

pipes or other such installations in the proposed route during

excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or protective covers or bare cables are

encountered, further excavation shall not be carried without the

approval of the Engineer.

4.7.5 Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily

supported or propped adequately as directed by the Engineer. The

trenching in such cases shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes

laid for passing cables therein and the trench refilled in accordance with

clause.

4.7.6 If there is any danger of a trench collapsing and endangering adjacent

structures, the sides should be well shored up with timbering and/or

sheeting as the excavation proceeds. Where necessary, these may even

be left in places when back filling the trench.

4.7.7 Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the staff of

the department/Owner concerned.

4.7.8 The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick bats

etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand

cushion of not less than 8 cm. in depth.

4.8 LAYING OF CABLE IN TRENCH

4.8.1 At the time of issue of cable for laying, the cores shall be tested for

continuity and insulation resistance.

4.8.2 The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable

wheel, at a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are

strong enough to carry the weight of the drum without failure and that

the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so as to prevent the drum

creeping to one side while rotating.

4.8.3 The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and

uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire cable length shall as far


34

as possible be pulled off in one stretch. However, where this is not

possible the remainder of the cable may be removed by 'Flaking' i.e. by

making one long loop in the reverse direction.

4.8.4 After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the

rollers, the cable shall be lifted slightly over the rollers beginning from

one end by helpers standing about 10 m apart and drawn straight. The

cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers lifting the

cable and then laid in a reasonably straight line.

4.8.5 For short runs and sizes upto 50 Sq. mm of cables 1.1 KV grade, any

other suitable method of Direct handling and laying can be adopted

with the prior approval of the Engineer.

4.8.6 When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores shall be

tested for continuity and insulation resistance. In case of FRLS PVC

cables, suitable moisture seal tape shall be used for this purpose.

4.8.7 Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have covering of

clean, dry sand of not less than 17 cms above the base cushion of sand

before the protective cover is laid.

4.8.8 In the case of vertical multi‐tier formation after the first cable has been

laid, a sand cushion of 30 cms. shall be provided over the initial bed

before the second tier is laid. If additional tiers are formed, each of

the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of 30 cms. as stated

above. The top most cable shall have a final sand covering not less

than 17 cms. before the protective cover is laid.

4.8.9 At the time of original installation, approximately 3 m of surplus cable

shall be left on each end of the Cable and on each side of underground

joints (Straight through/Tee/Termination) and at entries and places as

may be decided by the Engineer. The surplus cable shall be left in the

form of a loop. Where there are long runs of cable length loose

cable may be left at suitable intervals as specified by the Engineer.

4.8.10 A final protection to cables shall be laid in accordance with Clause

to provide warning to future excavators of the presence of the cable


35

and also to protect the cable against accidental mechanical damage

by pick‐axe blows etc.

4.8.11 Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by second

class bricks of not less than 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) as

per CPWD Building Specification or protection covers placed on top of

the sand, (bricks to be laid breadth wise) for the full length of the cable

to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where more than one cable is to be

laid in the same trench, this protective covering shall cover all the cables

and project at least 5 cm. over the sides of the end cables.

4.9 BACK FILLING

4.9.1 The trenches shall be back‐filled with excavated earth free from stones

or other sharp edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if

necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 30 cm. Unless otherwise

specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm. in the centre and

tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for

subsidence. The crown of earth however should not exceed 10 cms. so

as not to be a hazard to vehicular traffic. The temporary re‐instatements

of roadways should be inspected at regular intervals, particularly during

the wet weather, and any settlement should be made good. Further

trenches cut through roadways or other paved areas shall be restored

to the same density and material as the surrounding area and

repaved in accordance with the relevant Specifications to the satisfaction

of the Engineer.

4.9.2 Where road berks or lawns have been cut or kerbed stones

displaced, the same shall be repaired and made good except turfing /

asphalting to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all surplus earth or

rock removed to places as specified.

4.10 ROUTE MARKERS

4.10.1 Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at

locations approved by the Engineer and generally at intervals not

exceeding 100 m. Markers shall also be provided to identify change in


36

the direction of the cable route and also for location of every

underground joint.

4.10.2 Route markers shall be made out of 100 mm x 100 mm x 5 mm

GI/Aluminum plate, welded or bolted on To 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm

angle iron 60 cm. long. Such plate markers shall be mounted parallel

to and 0.5 m or so away from the edge of the trench. Alternatively

cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone

aggregate of 20 mm nominal size) marker 60 cm x 60 cm 10 cm in size

shall be laid flat and centered over the cable. The concrete markers

unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer shall project over the

surrounding surface so as to make the cable route easily identifiable.

4.10.3 The work 'cable' and other details such as voltage grading, size etc. as

furnished by the Engineer shall be inscribed on the marker.

4.11 LAYING IN PIPES/CLOSED DUCTS:

4.11.1 In location such as road crossing, entry to building, on poles, in paved

areas etc. cables shall be laid in pipes or closed ducts.

4.11.2 GI or Hume Pipes (spun reinforced concrete pipes) shall be used for

such purposes. In the case of new construction, pipes as required shall

be laid along with the Civil works and jointed according to the

instructions of the Engineer as the case may be. The size of pipe

shall be as indicated in the electrical drawings. GI pipe shall be laid

directly in ground without any special bed. Hume pipe (Spun reinforced

concrete pipe) shall be laid over 10 cm. thick cement concrete 1:5:10

(1cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone aggregate of 40mm

nominal size) bed, after which it shall be completely embedded in

concrete. No sand cushioning or tiles need be used in such situations.

Unless otherwise specified, the top surface of pipes shall be at a

minimum depth of 1mtr. from the ground level when laid under roads,

pavement etc.

4.11.3 Where steel pipes are employed for protection of single core cables

feeding AC load, the pipe should be large enough to contain both


37

cables in the case of single phase system and all cables in the case of

poly phase system.

4.11.4 The pipes on road crossing shall preferably be on the skew to reduce

the angle of bends as the cable enters and leaves the crossings. This is

particularly important for high voltage cables.

4.11.5 Manholes of adequate size as decided by the Engineer shall be

provided to facilitate feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide

working space for persons. They shall be covered by suitable manhole

covers with frame of proper design. The construction of manholes and

providing the cover is not in the scope of this Contract and shall be got

executed and paid for by the Engineer through another agency.

4.11.6 Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or concrete before cable is

drawn. Sharp edges at ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury to

cable insulation or sheathing.

4.11.7 Pipes for cable entries to the building shall slope downwards from the

building and suitably sealed to prevent entry of water inside the

building. Further the mouth of the pipes at the building end shall be

suitably sealed to avoid entry of water. This seal in addition to being

waterproof shall also be fireproof.

4.11.8 All chases and passages necessary for laying of service cable

connections to buildings shall be cut as required and made good to the

original finish and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.11.9 Cable grips/draw wires and winches etc. may be employed for drawing

cables through pipes/closed ducts etc.

4.12 LAYING, FIXING & TERMINATION OF CABLES:

4.12.1 The power & control cables shall be laid on the cable racks. It will be

complete responsibility of the bidder for laying, fixing, straight jointing in

case of power cable if required and termination at both ends of the

power & D.C. cables as per the tentative schedule given in Bill of

quantity. Cable glands shall be provided at each end to support the

cable. Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type


38

and tinned copper lugs which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated

sleeves shall be provided at all the wires termination. Engraved core

identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with Cable No./Wire

No. shall be fitted at both ends of each cable, Ferrules shall fit tightly on

the wire and shall not fall off when the wire/cable is disconnected from

the terminal blocks. Number 6 & 9 shall have different markings for

ferrules purposes. Necessary cable no./wire no. shall be marked/tagged

(or the standard practice adopted) on the cable at the different locations

for easy identifications during maintenance. Power cables having more

number of cables per phase shall be laid in trefoil formation or shall be

laid as per standard practice adopted for laying. Cables laid in

horizontal cable trays as well as on vertical ladders shall be fixed at

adequate number of places to hold the cable firmly. Bidder should

submit a complete write up regarding laying, fixing and termination of

the cable for approval before starting of the work. Any mechanical

damage to the cables resulting in discarding of the cables shall be

replaced by the bidder free of cost.

4.12.2 TERMINATING KITS:

The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an

indoor switchgear or to a weatherproof transformer/ motor. For outdoor

terminals, weather shields/sealing ends and any other accessories

required shall also form part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be one

of the makes/types mentioned in the preferred makes.

4.12.3 JOINTING KITS:

The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation

on overhead trays, concrete lined trenches, ducts and for underground

burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water

and chemicals. These shall have protection against rodent and termite

attack.

4.12.4 The cables shall be tested and examined at the contractor’s works both

before and after manufacture. The contractor shall furnish all necessary

information concerning the supply to consultant/owner’s works for the


39

purpose of inspecting the process of manufacturer in all its stages and

Engineer will have the power to reject any material which appears

to him to be at unsuitable description or of unsatisfactory quality.

4.13 CABLE TAGS:

4.13.1 After pulling, cables shall be provided with identification tags consisting

of 1.5mm thick aluminium strips of size 30x60mm on which cable

numbers shall be die‐punched. The tags shall be tied to the cables with

non‐ corrosive wire. In case of single core cables, the said wire should

be non‐ferrous.

4.13.2 Cable tags shall be tied to cables at the following points:

a) Inside the cubicles at the point of glanding.

b) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters on either side of crossing of

any wall, floor, fire stop or other barrier in cable galleries/

trenches etc. One meter distance to be kept so that cable tags do

not get concealed during lost/disturbed fire sealing,

re‐plastering, etc.

c) At the field end termination before entry to the terminal

box/junction box/marshalling box.

d) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters of either side of acute

bends, tray jumping, and at every 30M interval in straight run.

e) In every span over 30 meters found without any tag despite

above.

4.14 QUANTITY MEASUREMENT AND RETURN OF SURPLUS QUANTITY

4.14.1 For payment purposes measurement shall be made on the execution

drawings/physical measurements, physical measurements shall be

made by the contractor in the presence of the representative of the

purchaser.

4.14.2 The measurements of cable laying shall be made on the basis of length

actually laid from the lug to lug including that of loops provided

and laid accordingly.


40

4.14.3 It shall be responsibility of successful bidder to work out the complete

cable schedule for the cables covered under this specification which

shall incorporate the details of termination markings and route etc. in

consultation with project authorities and various equipment suppliers

and submit the same for approval before starting the cable laying/fixing

work.

4.15 TESTING:

4.15.1 The contractor shall take full responsibility of testing pre‐ commissioning

and commissioning of cabling system being installed by him. It shall be

overall responsibility of the contractor to arrange and complete all

activities in complete co‐ordination with equipment commissioning

agency keeping in view the overall commissioning programme. The

contractor shall submit a check list for testing and commissioning and

the activities shall be carried out in accordance with the check list.

4.15.2 Testing and electric measurement of cable installations shall conform to

IS:1255.

4.15.3 Prior to installation, cables shall be

a) Continuity of conductors

b) Insulation resistance between conductor and earth

c) Insulation resistance between the conductors

4.15.4 After installation each cable shall be tested for

a) Insulation resistance between conductors

b) Insulation resistance between the conductors and earth

c) Absence of cross phasing

d) Firmness of terminations

4.15.5 The check and commissioning tests shall be carried out as part of the

installation work and the contractor shall not be paid any extra amount

for the same.

4.15.6 The contractor shall have to bring all testing equipment/instruments in

sufficient numbers. All instruments shall be calibrated to the satisfaction


41

of the purchaser before actual testing and tests to be conducted by

qualified experienced personnel.

4.15.7 All documents/records regarding test data and all other measured

values shall be submitted for approval and subsequent record and

reference. All cables shall be energised only after certification from

certification personnel that cable is ready for energizing. The results of

all tests shall conform to the specification requirement as well as

guaranteed data.

4.16 LAYING ON CABLE TRAYS

4.17 GI CABLE TRAYS

4.18 DESIGN

4.18.1 The GI perforated/ Ladder cable trays as specified and their fittings shall

conform to the Indian Standards or their latest amended editions or

equivalent International Standard. The bidder shall specify in the bid to

which standard the material supplied shall conform. The support should

be Arm struct type.

4.18.2 Standard perforation shall be provided in cable trays at both axis i.e.

horizontal & vertical. The cable tray system shall be designed in the

standardized modular system and comprise of basic modules of trays,

fittings and accessories. Each modular shall be fabricated from prime

quality mild steel sheet and then hot dip galvanized of 60 microns.

Modular of 90 degree elbows, T joints and double, T joints shall be used

for horizontal changes in the direction of cable runs while hinged

connectors shall be used for vertical branch off. The branch off joints

should be such as to allow for angle connection to be easily bolted

to them by means of button head screws. End plates shall be used to

closed off unevenly cut faces of the cable trays and protect the cables

from damage. Where required barriers shall be used to permit power

cables and cables and cables of all modules shall be subject to the

prior approval of the engineer before mass production is taken hand.

The following standard shall be used: as per consultant’s specifications

or customer’s requirements.


42

4.18.3 The GI perforated cable trays shall be manufactured from good

commercial, high grade strength sheet steel having minimum thickness

of 2mm and shall be hot dip galvanized according to BS‐729‐1971

or equivalent standard suitable for indoor/outdoor use having

moderate humidity and air pollution. The zinc coating thickness

shall works out by applying a 610 gm of zinc per square meter

surface with a approximate thickness of 80 micron. The zinc coating

shall be smooth, clean and uniform thickness and free from defects like

ash and dross inclusions, bare patches, black spots, pimples, lumpiness,

rust stains, blisters etc. The galvanizing shall not adversely affect the

mechanical properties of the coated material.

4.18.4 The joints of two trays shall be butt construction and shall be made with

the help of coupler plates by nuts and bolts. The coupler plate and nuts

and bolts shall also be properly hot dip galvanized, where the bends of

the trays are required at site the same shall be supplied by the bidder

without any extra cost. The spacing of rungs shall be max.

400mm centre to centre while adopting the modules at site if cutting of

any length is required the same shall be cut at site and joined by nuts

and bolts with the help of coupler plates.

4.18.5 Where perforated cables trays shall be routed in trenches, the necessary

angle iron side support should be provided by the bidder.

4.18.6 The provision for fixing of brackets support system of vertical side of

approach tunnel should be made by the bidder for fixing the supporting

system. However, bidder is requested to visit the site before preparation

of this bid.

4.18.7 Bidder is at its liberty to manufacture the cable supports arrangement at

site or at his own workshop. Bidder shall have to bring all the

tools/tackles, including welding machines etc. for the manufacturing of

these cable supports be established by tests as per IS‐2633 if required.

All manufacturing process including punching, cutting, bending and

welding of GI perforated cable trays shall be completed and burrs shall

be removed before the application of galvanization process is applied.


43

Zinc conforming to at least Grade Zn 98 as specified in IS‐209‐1966

shall be used for the purpose of galvanizing.

4.18.8 The trays shall be fabricated in a length of 2.5 m to 3m.

4.18.8 G.I. Perforated Type including horizontal and vertical bends,

reducers, tees, cross members and Other accessories as required and

duly suspended from the ceiling with Am‐strut (Fully adjustable &

reusable, with a complete line of channels, fittings & accessories for

Multipurpose applications) support system for suspension from ceiling

& fixing at walls/columns with Hot Dip Galvanised etc as specified

thickness in BOQ from GI material, Cable trays and accessories and

covers shall be painted as explained below :‐

4.19.1 Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold

water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.

4.19.2 Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation,

if any, followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of acidic solution.

4.19.3 Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.

4.19.4 Primer coating with two coats of a highly corrosion resistant primer,

applied wet on wet and stove dried under strictly controlled conditions of

temperature and time.

4.19.5 Cables, where indicated in approved shop drawings, shall be laid on

overhead cable trays which are suspended from ceiling or supported


44

from wall, by anchor fasteners as required. All cable tray supports must

GI/ or to be hot dip galvanized as specified in Bill of Quantity.

4.19.6 The Contractor shall provide for all accessories for the installation of the

cable trays, such as bends, tees, reducers coupler plates, and structural

steel members (comprising of channels, angles, flats, rods) for structural

supports for cable trays etc.

4.20 CABLE TRAY MOUNTING

4.20.1 Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all

cable tray mounting works to be carried out ensuring the following :

4.20.2 Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layout

drawing.

4.20.3 Assembly of tray mounting structure shall be supplied, fabricated,

erected & painted by the contractor.

4.20.4 Cable tray running along the wall should be supported at intervals not

exceeding 1.5 m. In case of branching, there should be a support on all

branches at a distance of 30 cms from the point of branching. Support

should be MS angle secured in an approved manner where runs are

along the walls. In case of ceiling suspended cable tray horizontal

supports made of MS angle iron shall be provided. The horizontal

interval between two such supports shall be 1.0 meter. These supports

shall be suspended from C.I. boxes or suitable approved suspension

devices such as dash fastener of suitable sizes in the ceiling by means of

10 mm diameter GI threaded rods. All above mounting accessories

form part of installation of cable trays. (All MS material shall be Hot dip

galvanized)

4.20.5 The free vertical distance between parallel GI perforated trays/racks

/ladder shall be at least 250mm and the perforated trays shall be

50mm away from the walls. The trays shall be fixed to the brackets with

proper nuts and bolts system.

4.20.6 The GI perforated trays shall be free from sharp edges and burns etc. so

that joint between two trays shall be without any clearance and matched

in proper shape.


45

4.20.7 At the bends the curvature in all axes of perforated trays/racks shall be

20R or maximum size of cable.

The supporting brackets/fixing bolts size shall be calculated as per

design load.

4.20.8 The supporting brackets/fixing bolts size shall be calculated as per

design load.

4.20.9 The perforated trays shall be installed in such a way that as far as

possible the cables can be laid directly in place rather than be pulled

through.

4.20.10 The current carrying cables shall be laid separately than the H.T. cables,

L.T. cables and D.C. cables shall be laid in different trays.

4.20.11 The cables shall be fixed in the perforated trays by means of plastic ties

or plastic coated wires etc.

4.20.12 The number of perforated tray shall be sufficient in order to

accommodate all the power D.C. cables indicated in the specification

for cables. However, the approximate quantity of different trays have

been given in bill of quantity.

4.21 CABLE TRAY CONSTRUCTION:

4.21.1 The interiors of all types of cable shall be smooth and free of any

projection that might injure cable sheaths and jackets (NEC 318‐4). All

slice plates should be installed on the outside surface of the supports.

Round head bolts, screws or other fasteners (head inside) are to be used

exclusively. The anchoring of cable trays through bottom sections with

bolts or screws upon which cables may rest is prohibited. Sheaths or

outer covers of cables are subject to damage where the cables are lying

on bolt or screw heads. Bolting is satisfactory where the heads of bolts

or screws are below the cable sporting surfaces.

4.21.2 Bends in cable trays shall be made with manufacturer’s fittings or

equivalent. Mitered vertical bends are permitted on ladder cable

supports only. The effective radius must be not less than that allowable

for the cables involved. Mitered cuts must be positioned midway

between rungs and shall permit not over a 22 ½ degree directional

change per miter or rung. Bends, ells tees and other fittings elbows are


46

available with several radii. The radii of fittings both vertical and

horizontal should be suitable to accommodate cables so that they will

never be bent, either during installation or in the final arrangement, to

lesser radii.

4.21.3 All the components of the supply, without exception, from one system

and during the erection all the components will match each other

without interference.

4.22 ACCESSORIES

4.22.1 All accessories for joining trays, bends, tees, reducers etc. shall be

compatible to tray specifications for correct interfacing and with

matching dimensions.

4.23 MATERIAL:

4.23.1 All material in the scope of supply shall be of prime quality mild steel

sheet and then hot dip galvanized of 86 microns after fabrication,

including all accessories.

4.23.2 It is manufacturer’s responsibility that the materials quoted are fully

resistant to the influence of the chemical product and environment

4.24 TESTING & INSPECTION:

4.24.1 Cable trays along with coupler plates and other Hardware material shall

be inspected at manufacturers works for :

1. Visual Inspection and Bill of material at cable tray manufacturers works

2. Test for Galvanizing material as per IS at galvanizer works.

4.24.2 The inspection & testing shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works

in accordance with the relevant sections of the specification and

witnessed by the purchaser prior to the shipment. Or a sample of the

required specimen should be submitted for the approvals prior to

manufacturing

4.25 EARTHING:

4.25.1 The GI perforated cable trays along with their supporting arrangements

shall be properly earthed by the bidder with nut and bolts from the

earthing risers provided by purchaser, generally in the vicinity of the tray

routing. The earthing shall be as per latest I.E. rules and IS/IEC


47

recommendation. The size of earth connection shall be such that its

conductance should be more than the conductance of 14 sq.mm.

copper conductor cross section.

4.26 FABRICATION OF TRAYS

4.26.1 All fabrication of trays shall be in accordance with IS:800 and as per the

approved drawings unless otherwise specified.

4.26.2 All material shall be straight and if necessary before being worked, shall

be straightened and/or flattened by pressure unless required to be of

curvilinear form and shall be free from twists.

4.26.3 Before cutting the steel, measurement should be done by appropriate

gauge and according to the drawing.

4.26.4 Shearing or flame cutting may be used provided the resulting edge shall be

reasonably clean and straight. Sheared members shall be free from

distortion at sheared edges, when gas cutting is adopted, the flame cut

edge shall be machined to a depth of 3 to 5mm.

4.26.5 The welding and the welded work shall generally conform to IS:816 &

IS:9595. Unless otherwise specified.

4.26.6 The welding surfaces shall be smooth, uniform & free from fins, tears,

notches or any other defect which may adversely affect welding

and shall be free of loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint moisture of any

other foreign material.

4.26.7 The welding procedure shall be so arranged that the distortion and

shrinkage stresses are reduced to a minimum and that the welds meet

the requirement of quality.

4.27 SUBMISSION ALONGWITH TENDER:

4.27.1 Based on the specification write up and specification drawings the

contractor shall submit the following drawings/documents and

information with the tender:‐

a. Drawings showing dimensional details and constructional

features of all components including the :‐

i) Cable trays and accessories


48

ii) Typical supporting arrangements in various locations

iii) Typical cable trays layout arrangement (showing typical

bends,, T‐offs, branching, reducers, coupler etc.)

iv) Typical dimensional details of glands and lugs for various

sizes/types

v) Typical drawings for control and 415V and 22

kV termination and jointing showing splicing, glanding,

lugs, screen/armour earthing etc.

b. Descriptive literature catalogues, giving design features and

manufacturing details.

4.28 TESTING & COMMISSIONING

4.29 INSPECTION

4.29.1 All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked by

the Engineer for any damage during transit.

4.30 TESTING

4.30.1 All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before laying shall be tested with a 500

V megger or with a 2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher

voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of cross

phasing, and insulation resistance to earth / sheath / armour insulation

resistance between conductors.

4.30.1.1 All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying,

before covering the cables by protective covers and back filling and

also before the jointing operations.

4.30.2 Completion plan and completion certificate

4.30.3 After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans

to a suitable scale and shall submit to the Engineer. The completion

plans shall, inter‐alia, give the following details:‐

4.30.1 All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before laying shall be tested with a 500

V megger or with a 2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher

voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of


49

cross phasing, and insulation resistance to earth / sheath / armour

insulation resistance between conductors.

4.30.1.1 All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying,

before covering the cables by protective covers and back filling and

also before the jointing operations.

4.30.2 Completion plan and completion certificate

4.30.3 After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans

to a suitable scale and shall submit to the Engineer. The

completion plans shall, inter‐alia, give the following details:‐

4.30.3.1 Layout of cable work

4.30.3.2 Length, size, type and grade of cables.

4.30.3.3 Method of laying i.e. direct in ground, in pipes etc.

4.30.3.4 Location of each joint with jointing method followed.

4.30.3.5 Route marker and joint maker with respect to permanent land marks

available at site.

4.30.3.6 Wherever the previously laid cable is cut and additional joints are

introduced etc., the cable records shall suitably be amended.

4.31 APPROVED MAKES

Note:- Makes specified in the approved schedule of CIDCO & As

approved by the Electrical Consultant and shall be IS marked wherever

not mentioned.

Note: Samples to be approved from the CIDCO/ Consultant before

execution.


50

5.0 EARTHING

5.1 GENERAL :

5.1.1 Scope of work consist of Supply, installation, testing and commissioning

of earthing system.

5.1.2 The non‐current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be

earthed properly. All metallic structure, enclosures, junction boxes, outlet

boxes, cabinets, machine frame, portable equipments, metal conduits,

truncking, cable armored, switchgear and all other parts made of metal

in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded together

and connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an

efficient earthing system. Every item of equipment served by the

electrical system shall be bonded to earthing system.

5.1.3 Separate Earthing will be provided for Electrical (Power) system and

computer system.

5.1.4 All non –Live metal parts of electrical system and equipment shall be

earthed with suitable size of earth conductors. 2 distinct earthing shall

be provided for all 3 –Phase equipment.

5.1.5 Earthing shall be in confirming with IS 3043 and Lightning protection

shall be with IS 2309. Earth Resistance of individual earth station shall

not exceed 5 ohm and overall resistance shall be less than 1 ohm at all

times. Earth resistance shall be taken with earth megger for all earth

points. All earth points shall be located 2.0 mtrs away from the building

and there will be a minimum distance of 3.0 meters between 2 earth

points. All earth stations shall be identified with number and using

painted board.

5.2 EARTH STATION

5.2.1 Pipe Electrode Earthing : 50mm dia class B GI pipe 3.0 mtrs long

tapered at bottom and 12 mm dia holes at 75 mm c/c on all sides for

bottom 2.0 mtrs with top watering arrangement shall form earth

electrode. The electrode has to be buried vertical in ground.


51

5.2.2 Plate Earthing : 600X 600 X 6 mm GI plate with 50 mm dia. GI

watering pipe with funnel at top. The construction shall be as per

details given in the latest edition of IS 3043.

5.2.3 Incase of rocky strata , Bore Earthing stations with 150 bore and 100

mm class B GI pipe shall be done . Depth of bore earting shall be 6.0

mtr minimum. Soil resistivity test shall be done for deciding depth if

necessary.

5.2.4 Bentonite or earth powder slurry shall be put along with pipe in the

bore.

5.3 MAINTENANCE FREE EARTHING :

5.3.1 Generally pipe in pipe technology shall be used with inner pipe and

outer pipe of different sizes and lengths as mentioned below. These pipe

electrode shall be hot dip galvanized to enhance life.

5.3.2 The annular space between these pipes & inner pipe shall be filled with

and outer pipe of different sizes and lengths as mentioned below. These

pipe electrodes shall be hot dip galvanized to enhance life.

5.3.3 The annular space between these pipes & inner pipe shall be filled

with adequate special crystalline compound material which shall resist

the corrosion of inner pipe electrode Are surrounding outer pipe shall be

filled with back fill compound mixed with the soil. Depth & size of pit

shall suit to the electrode length. Soil resistivity test shall be done if

necessary for deciding depth.

Pipe Electrode Details

Galvanizing Category

Inner

pipe

Outer

pipe Length

T39 40mm dia 80mm dia 3000mm

or as

80‐100

T19 25mm dia 50mm dia 3000mm

or as

80‐100


52

5.4 MASONRY CHAMBER

5.4.1 Brick masonry chamber of size 450 x 450 x 9( internal clear

dimensions) with cast iron cover and frame with top finished at ground

level shall be provided for watering and test link access.

5.5 ARTIFICIAL TREATMENT

5.5.1 In case of rocky soil, hard murum soil resistance is very high. For getting

proper earthing alternate layers of charcoal and salt are to be provided

for entire height of earth electrode with 300 mm over all cover. Back

cotton soil can be used for refilling the earth points in rocky strata.

5.6 EARTHING CONDUCTORS

5.6.1 Earthing conductors size shall be depend on the load and defined fault

conditions.

5.6.2 The earthing conductors shall be connected with either riveted or bolted

joints with at least 2 rivets/ bolts. The joints shall be painted with

bitumen paint.

5.6.3 Earthing strips for lighting protection shall be run on parapet walls of

outer periphery of building and outer periphery of highest structure for

horizontal runs and on unapproachable vertical walls upto

disconnecting box at 1.0 mtr height above ground level. Lightning

conductor shall be connected to earth station directly and separate 25 x

6 mm strip from earth station is to be connected to grid earthing.

The lightning conductors shall be fixed at appropriate highest location

on building / structure. Separate earth pit shall be provided for each

lightning conductor.

5.7 CODES AND STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATION

a) Indian Electricity Rules, 1956

b) IS : 3043:Earthing

5.8 SUBMITTALS

5.8.1 Drawing Data

5.8.2 Earthing pits layout along with earthing tape routing etc.


53

5.8.3 Block Diagram for earthing showing all earthing pits and their

connections.

5.8.4 Tests & Test Reports

5.8.5 Test results of all Earthing pit test carried out at site with multiple

electrode testing procedure.

5.9 STANDARDIZATION

5.9.1 To minimize spare parts inventory, standardized components of

rationalized sizes shall be supplied. Equipment and materials shall be

bought only from approved Vendors.

5.10 EARTH PITS AND MAIN GRID

1. Adequate number of earthing pits and electrodes shall be used in

conjunction with earthing grid.

2. Minimum spacing between two adjacent earth pits shall not be

less than 6 meters and shall be kept sufficiently away from

structures to clear footings.

3. Main grid loop for a building shall be installed outside boundary

of the building, buried in back fill. In shall be installed at a

minimum depth of 600mm outside the building wall.

4. The main earth loops (MEL’S) in plant areas shall be generally

routed along cables when equipments are located away from

MEL’S. Suitable sub loops may be into then for deriving

connections for individual equipment.

5.11 INDOOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING

1. Each floor of building shall have its own earth bus embedded in

concrete.

2. Earthing grid embedded in the floor slab shall have a minimum

concrete cover of 50mm.

3. Earth buses on different floor & main grid shall be connected by

at least two conductors of main grid conductor size.

4. Every alternate column (steel or RCC) of the building housing

electrical equipment shall be connected to main earthing grid.


54

5. Earthing conductors shall be welded at interval of 1000mm

along their run on steel structures & shall be at interval of

750mm along the wall.

5.12 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING

1. Each transformer neutral shall be provided with two separate

earth leads to two separate earth pits located near transformer.

2. Whenever earthing conductor crosses the trenches, tunnels,

railway track etc. it shall be run below the trench etc.

3. Equipment structures shall be earthed at two diametrically

opposite points.

5.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.

1. Entire earthing system shall be tested for continuity by ELV Tester

after installation.

2. For the earthing system the connections shall be thoroughly

checked.

3. The earth resistance shall be checked, recorded & resistance shall

be improved in case it is higher than acceptable limits.

4. The contractor shall carry out all rectifications, repairs or

adjustment work found necessary during testing &

commissioning.

5.14 EARTHING PROTECTION SYSTEM.

1. Sizes and number of earth leads for earthing various items and

other technical particulars shall be as specified.

2. Earthing conductors in the building, running parallel to walls/

columns shall not be less than 150 mm away from the wall

columns.

3. Suitable earth risers shall be provided if the equipment is not

available while carrying out earthing connections.

4. Whenever earthing conductor passes through walls, galvanized

iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of earthing

conductor. Water stop sleeves shall be provided. Water stops


55

shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the

building from outside.

5. Whenever the conductors are to be buried, contractor shall

co‐ordinate with other civil contractors to ensure that the

conductors are installed before concreting.

6. All connections shall be of low resistance. Contact resistance shall

be minimum.

7. Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanized. All

conductors shall be free from any defects.

5.15 SPECIFICATIONS

5.15.1 Earthing Conductors Copper or equivalent G.I. earthing system shall be

provided except for neutral earthing of transformers and DG sets for

which Cu earthing system shall be provided. All the bus ducts/cable

trays shall be provided with suitable size of 2 nos. G.I. strips in the full

length. All electrical equipment shall be earthed with 2 nos. Copper /

G.I. strips / wires.

5.15.2 The Resistance to Each Earthing System shall not exceed 1.0 OHM.

5.16 PLATE ELECTRODE EARTHING

5.16.1 Earthing electrode shall consist of a G.I. plate as called for in the Bill of

Quantity. The plate electrode shall be buried as far as practicable

below permanent moisture level but in any case not less than 3

meters below ground level. Wherever possible, earth electrode shall be

located as near the water tap, water drain or a down take pipe as

possible. Earth electrode shall be kept clear of the building foundations

and in no case shall it be nearer than 2 meters from the outer surface of

the wall.

5.17 CONNECTION OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS

5.17.1 Main earthing conductor shall be taken from the earth connections at

the main distribution panel to the main L.T. panel with which the

connection is to be made. For distribution boards, earthing conductors

shall run from main distribution boards. Circuit earthing conductor shall

run from the exposed metal of equipment and shall be connected to any


56

point on the main earthing conductor, or its distribution boards or to an

earth leakage circuit breaker. Metal conduits, cable sheathing and

armoring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent to switch boards at

which they originate, or otherwise at the commencement of the run

by an earthing conductor in effective electrical contact with cable

sheathing. Where equipment is connected by flexible cord, all exposed

metal parts of equipment shall be earthed with 2 no. Cu/ G.I.

strips/wires and noncurrent carrying metallic parts with, 1 no. Cu/ G.I.

strips/wires.

5.17.2 Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas,

water or inflammable liquid, structural steel work, metallic enclosures

cables and conductors, metallic conduits and lightning protection

system conductors shall not be used as a means of earthing an

installation or even as a link in earthing system. The Electrical resistance

of metallic enclosures for cables and conductors measured between

earth connections at the main switch boards and any other point on

the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage of

current necessary to operate circuit breakers and shall not exceed 1

OHM.

5.18 EARTH CONNECTIONS

5.18.1 All metal clad switches and other equipment carrying single phase

circuit, shall be connected to earth by a single connection. All metal clad

switches carrying 3 phase shall be connected with earth by two separate

and distinct connections. The earthing conductor inside the building

wherever exposed shall be properly protected from mechanical injury by

running the same in GI pipe of adequate size. The earthing conductor

shall be painted to protect it against corrosion. Earthing conductor

outside the building shall be laid 600 mm below finished ground level.

The over lapping in G.I. strips in joints shall be welded. Lugs of

adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of

conductor wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be

earthed after the metal is cleaned of paint and other oily substance and

properly tinned.


57

5.19 PROTECTION FROM CORROSION

5.19.1 Connection between copper and galvanized equipment shall be made

on vertical face and protected with paint and grease. Galvanized fixing

clamps shall not be used for fixing earth conductors. Only copper fixing

clamp shall be used for fixing earth conductors. When there is evidence

that the soil is aggressive to copper, buried earthing conductors shall be

protected by suitable serving and sheathing.

5.20 RESISTANCE TO EARTH

5.20.1 No earth electrode shall have a greater ohmic resistance than 3 ohms

as measured by an approved earth testing apparatus. In rocky soil the

resistance may be upto 5 ohms. The electrical resistance measured

between earth connection at the main switchboard and any other point

on the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage

of current necessary to operate circuit breakers, and shall not exceed 1

ohm.

5.21 INSTALLATION

5.21.1 The earth plate shall be set vertically and surrounded with 150 mm thick

layer of charcoal dust and salt mixture. A 20 mm dia GI pipe shall run

from the top edge of the plate to the ground level. The top of the pipe

shall be provided with a funnel and a mesh for watering the earth

through the pipe. The funnel over the GI pipe shall be housed in a

masonry chamber approximately 300 mm x 300 mm x 300 mm deep.

The masonry chamber shall be provided with a cast iron cover resting

over a CI frame. Test facility shall be provided with test links for the

earthing station.

5.22 TESTING & COMMISSIONING

5.22.1 Testing Of Earthing System.

5.22.2 Purchaser may ask to carry out earth resistance measurements and

other tests in presence of him which in his opinion is necessary to

improve that the system is in accordance with design, specifications,


58

Indian code of Practice and Indian Electricity Rules. Contractor shall

have to bear the cost of all such test.

1. The lightening protection vertical air terminations and / or

horizontal air termination conductors shall remain in their

installed position even during service weather condition.

2. All joints in the down conductors shall be of welded, brazed type.

All metallic structures in the vicinity of down conductors shall be

bonded to the down conductors.

3. The test joint for down conductors shall be directly connected to

the earthing systems.

5.22.3 Testing of Earth Continuity Path. The earth continuity conductor

including metal conduits and metallic envelopes of cable in all cases

shall be tested for electric continuity and the electrical resistance of

the same along with the earthing lead but excluding any added

resistance of earth leakage circuit breaker measured from the

connection with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity

conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.

5.22.4 Earth Resistivity Test : Earth resistivity test shall be carried out in

accordance with IS Code of Practice for earthing IS 3043.


59

6.0 LIGHTING ARRESTOR SYSTEM (ESE TYPE)

6.1 PART 1 – GENERAL ‐WORK DESCRIPTION

6.1.1 1. This standard does not cover the protection of electrical

equipments or system against voltage surges of atmospheric

origin which are transmitted by networks entering the structure.

2. Other standards describe lightning protection system using

simple rod lightning conductor, stretched wires and meshed

conductors.

6.1.2 The lightning protection system shall comprise:‐

6.1.2.1 Air Termination

6.1.2.2 Copper strip

6.1.2.3 Maintenance Free Earthing System based on back fill compound.

6.1.3 Lightning protection system employing steel structural and reinforcement

system as part of the down conductors shall be adopted as per drawing

specified.

6.1.6 Lightening arrestors shall be installed at topmost point of the building.

The quantity for the same shall be designed & specification in BOQ to

cover total building area. Early streamer emission type arrestor shall be

used with Cu pipe & Cu base plate. The arrestor / base plate shall be

connected to separate earth pit with Cu Strip.

6.2 STANDARDS

6.2.1 Complete supply and installation of the lightning protection system shall

be followed for engineering, construction and installation in accordance

of the following standards and with the latest revision with update

amendments.

6.2.2 The detail of the lightning protection system shall confirm to the

requirements of all relevant local codes, as applicable, together with

the additional requirements referred to in this specification and

drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the

engineer.


60

6.2.3 In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall

take the following precedence:

1. Engineer’s decision.

2. Local codes of practice

3. Drawings

4. Specification

5. International standards and requirements.

6.3 SUBMISSION

6.3.1 A prior survey may be conducted to determine the protection level to be

considered, the ESE lightning conductor location(s), the down‐conductor

path(s), the earth termination system location(s) and type(s). All technical

submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective

stages of construction.

6.3.2 Architectural constrains may be taken into account in the lightning

protection system design and the design shall be based in a manner so

that there is no reduction in the lightning protection system effectiveness.

6.3.3 As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:‐

6.3.3.1 Equipment submission with manufacturer’s data:

6.3.3.2 Sample submission;

6.3.3.3 Shop drawings showing the co‐ordinate routing of air terminations,

down conductors bonding to re‐bar and foundation earth terminations,

methods of fixing etc.

6.3.3.4 Builder’s works requirement.

6.3.3.5 Proposal on testing procedures and report format for testing of the

Lightning Protection System.

6.3.3.6 Details of the Contractor’s installation Professional Engineer who

supervise and endorse the installation for occupation permit application.


61

7.0 SAFTEY MATERIALS

7.1 SCOPE

7.1.1 This Section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the

sub‐station for compliance with safety and operational needs.

7.2 REQUIREMENTS

7.2.1 Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A)

and (C) of PWD General Specifications of electric works (Part I Internal)

2005. In particular following items shall be provided:


7.3.1 Insulation Mats

7.3.2 First Aid charts and First Aid Box

7.3.3 Danger Plate

7.3.4 Fire Extinguishers

7.3.5 Fire Buckets

7.3.6 Tool Box

7.3.7 Caution Board

7.3.8 Key Board

7.4 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

7.4.1 IS : 5424 Insulation mats

7.4.2 IS : 2878 Portable C02 Fire Extinguisher

7.4.3 IS : 2546 : Fire Buckets

7.4.4 ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

7.5 SUBMITTALS

7.5.1 Product Catalogues.

7.6 SPECIFICATIONS

7.7 INSULATION MATS

7.7.1 Insulation mats conforming to IS:15652-2006 shall be provided in front

of main switch boards and other control equipment as specified.


62

7.8 FIRST AID CHARTS AND FIRST AID BOX

7.8.1 Charts(one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional Language),

displaying methods of giving artificial respiration to a recipient of

electrical shock shall be prominently provided at appropriate places.

Standard First Aid Boxes containing materials as prescribed by St.

John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in

sub‐station.

7.9 DANGER PLATE

7.9.1 Danger plates shall be provided on HV and LV equipments. LV danger

notice plate shall be 200 mm x 200 mm made of mild steel at least 2

mm thick vitreous enameled white on both sides and with inscriptions in

signal red color on front side as required.

7.9.2 Size of the HV Danger Notice plate shall be 250 mm x 200 mm and

2mm thick.

7.10 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

7.10.1 Portable CO2 confirming to IS : 2878‐1976 dry chemical (confirming to

IS 2171‐1976) extinguishers shall be installed in the sub‐station at

suitable places (like HT/LT panel rooms) as specified.

7.10.2 Foam type fire extinguisher shall be installed in Transformer Room.

7.11 FIRE BUCKETS

7.11.1 Fire buckets confirming to IS: 2546‐1974 shall be installed with the

suitable stand for storage of water and sand.

7.12 TOOL BOX

7.12.1 Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and

maintenance shall be provided in sub‐station.

7.13 CAUTION BOARD

7.13.1 Necessary number of caution boards such as "Man on Line" "Don't

switch on" etc. shall be available in the sub‐station.

7.13.2 The Caution Board shall be of size 300 mm x 200mm made of mild

steel, 2mm thick, vitreous enameled white on both sides and with

inscriptions in original red color on front side as required.


63

7.14 KEY BOARD

7.14.1 A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place

containing castel keys, and all other keys of sub‐station and allied

areas.

7.14.2 The Key board shall be made of 12mm thick first class teak wood shall

be of size 400 mm x 300m and with adequate depth to hold the keys. It

shall be provided with a lockable type hinged glass door made of 12

mm. thick first class teakwood frame with 3 mm thick sheet glass fixed

with piano hinges. The key board shall enough number of hooks for

hanging the castle keys and all other keys of the sub‐station and allied

areas. It shall be painted with one coat of wood primer and two coats of

white enamel paint.

7.15 SCOPE

7.15.1 This Section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the

sub‐station for compliance with safety and operational needs.

7.16 REQUIREMENTS

7.16.1 Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A)

and (C) of PWD General Specifications of electric works (Part I Internal)

2005. In particular following items shall be provided:


64

8.0 415 V SWITCHGEAR MAIN BOARD (L.T. PANEL)


8.1.1 This specification covers performance, design, material, construction,

manufacture, inspection, testing, packing forwarding, delivery at site,

testing and commissioning of Low voltage panels for 415 Volts, 3

phase,50 HZ 4 wire system with all accessories complete in all

respects as described in this specification and single line diagrams &

schedule of quantities and as specified.

8.1.2 For each equipment, required IP rating and short circuit rating capacity

will be specified as per requirement.

8.1.3 All the equipments will be factory fabricated in an approved factory

having modern fabrication and testing process. It shall have seven tank

pretreatment process comprising of degreasing, rinsing, phosphating,

rinsing and passivation followed by powder coat painting having a paint

thickness of 60 microns or as specified. The powder paint will be

provided with suitable neoprene gasket to make it dust/ vermin proof.

8.1.4 Whether called for specifically or not, all accessories required for normal

operation of equipment are deemed to be considered as a part of the

contractor’s scope of supply. Hardware / fabricated supports required

for mounting and installation of the panels is within the scope of work. It

is not the intent to specify completely herein, all details of design and

construction of the equipment. However, the equipment shall conform

in all respects to high standard of Engineering, design and

workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous commercial

operation up to the Manufacturer’s guarantees in a manner acceptable

to the Engineer, who will interpret the meaning of the drawings and

specifications and shall be entitled to reject any work or material which

is not full accordance therewith.

8.1.5 The equipment to be offered under this specification shall be of proven

design further, the switchgear must have been type tested in the same

configuration that has been offered.


65

8.2 CODES & STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATION

8.2.1 In general the equipment shall conform to all relevant IS/IEC standards.

In case of any contradiction between the IS/IEC and this specification,

the more stringent of the two shall apply.

8.2.1 IS : 13947 (Part - I) Degree of protection for enclosures for LV

8.2.2 IS : 1248 Ammeter & Voltmeter (Part - III)

8.2.3 IS 2959 AC contactors up to 1000V

IS : 13947 AC Circuit Breakers

8.2.5 IS : 8623 Factory assembled switchboard

8.2.6 IS 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection

8.2.7 IS : 2705 (Part - I to Current Transformers

8.2.8 IS 3156 & 4146 Potential Transformers.

8.2.10 IS : 13947-2/IEC-157-I ACB

8.2.11 IS : 8828/IEC-898 MCB

8.2.12 IS : 2707 Current Transformers

8.2.13 IS : 2147 Degree of Protection

8.2.14 IS 375 Marking and arrangement for switchgear

bus bars, main connection and control aux.

wiring.

8.2.15 IS 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors.

8.2.16 IS 3618 Pre-treatment of MS sheets for

phosphatising.

8.3 SUBMITTALS

8.3.1 The supplier shall furnish specified number of copies of the instruction

manual which would contain detailed instructions for all operational &

maintenance requirement. The manual shall be furnished at the time of

dispatch of the equipment and shall include the following aspects:


66

8.3.2 Outline dimension drawings showing relevant cross‐sectional views,

earthing details and constructional features.

8.3.3 Rated voltages, current, duty‐cycle and all other technical information,

which may be necessary for correct operation of the switchgear.

8.3.4 Catalogue numbers of all components liable to be replaced during the

life of the switchgear.

8.3.5 General arrangement Drawing.

8.3.6 Single Line Diagram.

8.3.7 Bill of Materials indicating quantity, rating & make of all components,

along with typical catalogues.

8.3.8 Control wiring diagrams, along with electrical interlocking scheme in a

tabular form.

8.3.9 Bus Bar sizing calculations along with supporting documents from Bus

Bar manufacturers.

8.4 INSTRUCTION MANUALS

8.4.1 Unpacking.

8.4.2 Handling at site.

8.4.3 Erection.

8.4.4 Pre commissioning tests.

8.4.5 Operating procedures

8.4.6 Maintenance procedures.

8.4.7 Precautions to be taken during operation and maintenance work.

8.5 TESTS & TEST REPORTS

8.5.1 Typical type test certificates shall be submitted.

8.5.2 Routine test certificates of routine test carried out on the panels shall be

submitted.

8.5.3 The busbars shall be type tested at a reputable international test

laboratory (ASTA or CPRI) for short circuit withstand. The test shall be for

a minimum duration of 1 second. Tests shall be performed over a range

of current ratings, covering the different frame sizes of the manufacturer.

8.5.4 Degree of ingress protection (IP rating) shall also be tested at any

reputed independent laboratory. This test shall be for IP68 in the case of

cast resin busbars, and for IP42/ IP55/IP66 for sandwich busbars.


67

8.6 SPECIFICATIONS

8.6.1 General

8.6.1.1 The L.T. panel shall comprise the following type of switchgear as

specified. The panel hall be capable of fault withstand capacity as per

panel SLD for duration of one second.

8.6.1.2 The panel shall be floor mounted free standing, metal enclosed, indoor

type having sectionalization of incoming, and outgoing switchgears as

specified. The design shall be cubicle type as specified. The general

construction shall confirm to IS 8623/1993 for factory assembled switch

board. All PCC should be of FORM 3B TYPE 2 (as per IEC 60439‐1:

1999, Annex D)

8.6.2 The panel shall be floor mounted free standing totally enclosed and

extensible type. The panel shall be with lockable arrangement with

Degree of IP protection shall be IP‐ 42 for Indoor application and IP 54

for outdoors, unless otherwise specified. and shall be dust & vermin

proof suitable for the climate conditions as specified. The design shall

include all provisions for safety of operating and maintenance

personnel.

8.6.3 All the LT switchgear panels shall be provided with 15% spare

compartments / space for addition feeders in future.

8.7 CONSTRUCTION

8.7.1 It shall be fabricated out of CRCA not less than 2.0 mm thick for load

bearing members and 1.6 mm for doors of LT panels. The framework

may be Angle iron/Channel/Bolted type constructions. General

constructions shall employ the principle of compartmentalization and

segregation of each circuit. Unless otherwise approved, incomer and

bus section panels or sections shall be separate and independent and

shall not be mixed with sections required for feeders. Each section of the

rear accessible type board shall have hinged access doors at the rear.

Overall height of the board shall not exceed 2.40 meters. Operating

levers, handle etc. of highest unit shall not be at a height more than 1.8

m, and that of the lowest unit shall not be less than 300 mm above

finished floor level. Multi‐tier mounting of feeders is permissible. The

general arrangement for multi‐tier construction shall be such that the


68

horizontal tiers formed present a pleasing and aesthetic look. The

general arrangement shall got approved before fabrication. Cable

entries for various feeders shall be either rear or from the front through

cable alleys located in between two sections of minimum 300 mm width.

All cable entries shall be through gland plates. There shall be separate

gland plate for each cable entry so that there will not be dislocation of

already wired circuit when new feeders are added. Cable entry plates

shall therefore be sectionalized. The construction shall include necessary

cable supports for clamping the cable in the cable alley or in rear cable

chamber. The vermin proofing shall be such that the vermin cannot

enter from one compartment to another/bus bar chambers. Neoprene

gaskets shall be used for all doors, covers and openings.

8.7.2 All retaining catches, screws and bolts for doors and covers shall be

cadmium plated. Screws and bolts shall be captive. All covers, doors

and joints shall be gasketted.

8.7.2.1 Incomer/Outgoing Cable Termination:

8.7.2.2 Incomer termination shall be suitable for receiving bus trunking/

underground cables. Cable terminations shall invariably be through

terminal blocks (Polyamide or superior) or brought out solid terminals.

All of the incoming/outgoing feeders terminations shall be suitable for

receiving cables from top / Bottom as per shown in drawing schedule.

8.7.3 Instruments

8.7.3.1 All meters shall be Digital type flush mounted type conforming to class

1.5 for accuracy of IS : 1248 and of size of 144 mm2 for incoming

feeders and & 96 mm2 for outgoing feeders.

8.7.4 Indicating Lamps

8.7.4.1 On all incomers of panels, ON/OFF and phase indicator lamps shall be

provided suitable for operation on AC 230 Volts supply. Necessary filter

G/Y/R/A shall be provided depending upon the function. Phase

indicating LED lamps shall be associated with necessary ON/OFF toggle

Switch. All lamps shall be protected by proper control MCBs. All lamps

shall be LED type.


69

8.7.5 Small Wiring

8.7.5.1 All small wiring controls, indication etc. shall be with suitable stranded

copper conductor cables FRLS / FRLS copper conductor cable. Wiring

shall be suitably protected within the switchboard. Runs of wires shall be

neatly bunched and suitably supported and clamped. Means shall be

provided for easy identification of the wires. Where wires are drawn

through steel conduits,

8.7.5.2 Identification ferrules shall be used at both ends of the wires. All control

wiring meant for External connection are to be brought out on terminal

board. All wiring shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm. and for C.T. circuits it

shall be 2.5 sq. mm. Brass/Copper thimbles, insulation tape etc. shall

be provided at joints & terminations as required.

8.7.6 Bus Bar & Bus Bar Chambers

8.7.6.1 The bus bar shall be of high conductivity copper/Aluminum as

specified alloy of electrolytic and of adequate section. The bus bar

system shall comprise a system of totally enclosed main horizontal bus

bars run at the top and vertical bus bars serving all modules in vertical

section on either side in cable entries. In case of rear access, horizontal

bus system shall run suitably either at the top or bottom. All connections

to individual circuits from the bus bar shall be with solid connections. All

horizontal busbar, vertical bus brand connections shall be suitably

sleeved with PVC sleeves or suitably insulated in an approved manner.

8.7.6.2 The bus bar temperature should not exceed 85oC i.e. 40oC temperature

rise over 45oC ambient. The calculation for temperature rise and bus

bar sizing should be furnished along with shop drawing for approval.

8.7.6.3 Wherever copper bus bar and Aluminum bus bar are connected to each

other, bimetallic strip shall be used.

8.7.7 Bus Bar Supports and Attachments

8.7.7.1 Bus bar shall be firmly fixed on supports constructed from SMC (glass

fibre reinforced thermosetting plastic). The supports shall be sufficiently

robust to effectively withstand electro‐mechanical stresses produced

in the event of short circuit.


70

8.7.8 Connection to Bus Bars

8.7.8.1 Connections to bus bars shall be made with bolts and nuts. The bolts

and nuts used for connections to bus bars shall be of Aluminum alloy,

tinned forged brass or galvanized iron. Suitable precaution shall be

taken against heating due to bi‐metallic contact. Further for tapping off

connections from bus bars, PVC insulated wire may be used for current

capacities upto 100 amps and for higher current capacities solid

conductors/strips suitably insulated with PVC sleeves/tape shall be used.

8.7.9 Clearances

8.7.9.1 The minimum clearances to be maintained for open and closed indoor

air insulated bus bars / electrically non‐exposed and working at system

voltages upto 600 volts shall be as follows :

Between …………………………… Minimum

Phase to Earth …………………… 19 mm

Phase to Phase …………………… 25.4 mm

8.7.10 Bus Bar Markings

8.7.10.1 The colours and letters (or symbols) for bus bars :

8.7.10.2 Main bus bar connections and auxiliary wiring etc. shall conform to

relevant Indian Standard. A brief from I.S. 375 (revised) is given below:

8.7.11 For AC bus bars and Main connections

S. No.

Bus Bar & Main Connection

Colour Letter/Symbol

a. Three Phase Red, R

Yellow Y

Blue B

b Two Phase Red, Blue R, B

c Single Phase Red R

d Neutral Connection Black N

e Connection to earth Green E

f Phase variable (Such a

connection to a reversible

motors)

Grey Grey


71

8.7.12 Phase Sequence and Polarity

8.7.12.1 Bus bars and main connections, when marked shall be marked in

accordance with the following table to indicate the order in which the

voltages in phases reach their maximum values.

System As indicated by Colors or letters

Phase sequence as

indicated Vector ally

Three Phase Red, Yellow, Blue R, Y, B.

Two Phase Red, Blue R, B.

8.7.13 Arrangement of Bus bars & Main Connections :

8.7.13.1 Bus bars and main connections which are substantially in one plane

shall be arranged in order given as follows :

The order of phase connections shall be Red, Yellow and Blue.

When the run of the conductors is horizontal, the red shall be on the top

or farthest away from the centre line as viewed from the front.

When the run of the conductor is vertical, the red shall be on the

extreme left.

When the system has a neutral connection in the same plane as the

phase connections, the neutral shall occupy an outer position.

Unless the neutral connections can be readily distinguished from the

phase connections, the order shall be red, yellow, blue and black.

8.7.14 Terminations

8.7.14.1 Incoming terminals shall be suitable for receiving cables.

8.8 SWITCHGEAR

8.8.1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The circuit breakers shall be sheet metal enclosed flush front, draw out

type and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism

with mechanical "ON" ‐ "OFF" indications. Shunt trip and closing coil

suitable for 230 Volts A.C. shall be provided.


72

The Circuit breakers shall be for continuous rating, and shall be suitable

for as specified on SLD fault level for one second at 415 volts. The

moving parts of circuit breaker shall have operating mechanism,

primary and secondary isolating devices, auxiliary switches, mechanical

position indicators, all mounted on a rigid sturdy steel frame work.

Primary and secondary disconnecting devices shall be self aligning type

of fully isolating. Microprocessor based with Metering & communication

Relay should be provided.

8.8.1.1 Circuit breaker shall be designed to close and trip without opening the

circuit breaker compartment door. The operating handle and the

mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breaker panel

and integral with the breaker. The ACB's shall be withdrawal type. The

ACB operating spring shall be chargeable with charging motor as well

as manually for electrically operated breaker. Spring charging motor

will operate on 230V AC. Once the spring is charged it should be able

to close the breaker and also trip without requiring to be charged. Every

Trip‐Close‐Trip operation with one charge of spring shall be possible.

The ACB's shall be operable both from the cubicle as well as from

remote position. Anti pumping devices shall be used both for electrical

and mechanical to prevent the breaker from restriping. Spring charge /

discharge indication to be provided.

8.8.1.2 Local‐remote selector switch with key interlock and auxiliary contacts to

operate locally and remote position shall be provided.

The breaker shall be provided with remote control switch as well as local

control switch for operating breakers. Suitable contacts for "Auto‐Trip"

annunciation and indication shall be provided.

8.9 CRADLE

The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit the smooth

withdrawal and insertion of the breaker into it. The movement shall be

free from jerks, easy to operate and shall be on steel balls/rollers and

not on flat surfaces. The modules shall be totally inter chargeable, for

same rating.

There shall be 4 distinct and separate positions of the circuit breaker on

the cradle.


73

Service : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in service.

Test : Main isolating contacts separate and secondary isolating contacts

in service.

Isolated : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in isolated.

Maintenance : Circuit breaker fully outside the panel ready for

maintenance.

8.9.1 There shall be provision for locking the breaker in any or all of the first

three positions. The breaker shall be provided with interlock to prevent

the breaker from being withdrawn or replaced except in the fully

isolated position. Interlock shall also be provided to prevent the breaker

from closing without in service position.

8.9.2 Separate limit switches with minimum 4 'NO' + 4 'NC' potential free

contacts, each shall be provided for 'Test' & 'Service' position of the

breaker. 6 'NO' + 6 'NC' breaker auxiliary contacts shall be provided as

spare.

8.10 PROTECTIVE DEVICES

8.10.1 Protective devices shall be provided as specified in the schedule of

quantities.

8.10.2 There shall be not less than 4 N/O and 4 N/C auxiliary contacts rated 5

amps on each breaker. The auxiliary contacts blocks shall be so located

as to be accessible from the front. The auxiliary contacts in the trip

circuits shall close before the main contacts have closed. All other

contacts shall close simultaneously with the main contacts. The auxiliary

contacts in the trip circuits shall open after the main contacts open. All

current carrying parts shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts

with proper arc chutes shall be provided to protect the main contacts.

The heat generated in the contacts due to tripping under fault conditions

shall be very nominal.

8.11 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

8.11.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with the latest Indian

Standards and IEC standards. They shall have the voltage and current


74

ratings, rated duty, rated short circuit service breaking capacity and

rated short‐time withstand current as indicated.

8.11.2 Microprocessor based with Metering & communication Relay type.

8.11.3 MCCB's shall be of the independent manual closing air‐break type,

rated for an uninterrupted duty, unless otherwise indicated.

8.11.4 Each MCCB shall have a facility for padlocking in the "OFF"

position.

8.11.5 MCCB shall have front operating Extended door operating handle.

8.12 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

8.12.1 All phases shall be provided with current transformers of accuracy Class

I and suitable VA burden to operate associated metering.

8.12.2 Separate C.T.’s shall be used for protective devices.

8.13 EARTHING

8.13.1 All components, frame etc. shall be properly earthed. Al. earth bars of

50 mm x 6 mm shall be provided for the LT panel for the full length of

the panel and connected to the frame work. Provisions shall be made

for connection from this earth bar to the main earthing bar on both

sides of LT Panel.

8.14 PAINTING

8.14.1 All steel work used in the construction of the LT panels shall have

undergone a rigorous metal treatment process as follows :‐

8.14.2 Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold

water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.

8.14.3 Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust

formation, if any, followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of

acidic solution.

8.14.4 A recognized phosphate process to facilitate durable coating of the

paint on the metal surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in

the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This again,

shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate

solution.


75

8.14.5 Passivating in de‐oxalate solution to retain and augment the effects of

phosphating.

8.14.6 Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.

8.14.7 Primer coating with two coats of a highly corrosion resistant primer,

applied wet on wet and stove dried under strictly controlled conditions of

temperature and time.

8.14.8 Finishing treatment shall be by powder coating with 60 micron

minimum thickness.

8.14.9 Final paint colour shall be pre approved by the Consultant / Owner.

8.15 LABELS

8.15.1 Anodized Aluminum labels shall be provided on all incoming and

outgoing feeder switches. Circuit diagram showing the arrangement of

the circuit inside the LT panel shall be pasted on inside of the panel

door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet.

8.16 INSTALLATION

8.16.1 The installation work shall cover assembly of various sections of the

panels, lining up, grouting the units etc. After connecting up the bus

bars etc. all joints shall be protected with necessary insulated shrouding.

A common earth bar as per IS specifications shall be run at the back

of panel connecting all the sections for connection to frame earth

system. All protections and other small wirings for indication etc. shall

be completed before calibration and commissioning checks are

commenced. All relays, meters etc. shall be mounted and connected

with appropriate wiring.

8.17 TEST AT MANUFACTURERS WORK

8.17.1 All routine tests specified in IS : 8623: shall be carried out

8.17.2 Testing and Commissioning at Site

8.17.3 Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and

checking up of connections. Primary/Secondary injection tests for the

relay adjustment/setting shall be done before commissioning in addition

to routine meager test. Checks and tests shall include the following:


76

8.17.4 Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.

8.17.5 Interlock function checks.

8.17.6 Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.

8.17.7 Insulation test : when measured with 500 V megger the insulation

resistance shall not be less than 100 mega ohms.

8.17.8 Trip test and protection gear test.

8.17.9 Test witness

8.17.10 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The contractor

shall give at least fifteen days advance notice of the date when the tests

are proposed to be carried out.

8.18 APPROVED MAKES

As per the CIDCO approved IS make.


77

9.0 POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT

APFC Panel with Harmonic suppressor (APFC) Specification No (ESD-

ED/APFC)

9.1 SCOPE

9.1.1 Supplying, Installing Testing & commissioning manual / Auto power

load correction panel of required capacity in kVAR, 440 Volts, 3 phase

50 Hz, Thyristor switch consisting of minimum 4 steps suitably design to

take care of 5% of load variation at any time. Steps configuration shall

be by the Engineer in charge as per site conditions.

Material:

Capacitors: App Type IS: 13585 part-I 1994 any type gas filled 525

Volts.

Thyristor switches: Thyristor switches should be designed for zero

crossing with snubber circuit forced cooling & min 1600 PIV rating.

Series reactor: Copper wound dry type, iron core suitable as per

requirement.

Harmonic filter circuit: Circuit suitable to filter Harmonics up to 17th

Harmonics.

CRCA sheet: CRCA sheet 14/16 SWG with 7 tank process & powder

coating suitable to site condition of required colour shade.

MS angles & channels: Size as per site condition.

Bus bar: Electrolytic copper bus bar of suitable capacity.

Exhaust fan: Tube axial exhaust fan of adequate capacity.

Fabrication materials: MS Jali, Hinges, nut bolts washers, screws etc. of

suitable size.

Switchgear: SFU, MCB, MCCB, HRC Din type fuse base as specified in

chapter switchgear.

Power factor Controller Relay: Minimum four steps, microprocessor

based programmable intelligent relay / dynamic correction Intelligent

relay with switches time from selected 1sec.to 1200 sec. having display

of system v/s, current, frequency, target PF, THD, short fall KVAR, active

power KW, KVAR, Harmonic display up to 17th order. Accessories:

Digital ammeter, digital Voltmeter, Bar primary CTS Class 1, 15VA and


78

of require ratio, selector switch indicating pilot Lamps all Bakelite with

colour glass, push buttons.

9.2 Method of Construction:

APFC panel shall be designed to cater required KVAR capacity with 20%

expandable additional load requirement. Fabrication of panel shall be

in such away to accommodate additional extra capacitors. Panel shall

be delivered after testing in presence of the engineer in charge. The

entire equipment shall be installed at designated place, duly wired with

provided cable/leads and giving necessary testing.

9.2.1 The capacitor banks shall generally conform to IS: 1334‐ 1992, 13340‐ 199

9.2.2 The capacitor units shall be indoor type, air‐cooled with low viscous

viscosity impregnated paper dielectric hermetically sealed. The

impregnation used shall be non‐in flammable, non‐ oxidizing,

lower freezing point type synthetic compound. Each individual cell shall

be provided with pressure sensitive dis-connectors / devices.

9.2.3 Main connections from the active element shall be brought out through

porcelain bushing. Care shall be taken to solder the bushing to the

cover to ensure perfect hermetic sealing.

9.3.4 Capacitor units shall be provided with externally mounted discharge

resistors to reduce the residual voltage to less than 50 volts in one

minute of switching off.

9.2.5 Individual unit shall be provided with adequate capacity of

MCBs/MCCBs, contactors (capacitor duty) bus bars and terminal

chambers to make bank of required KVAR. Terminal chamber shall be

suitable for bottom/top cable entry. Two earth terminals shall be

provided to each capacitor bank.

9.2.5 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured according

to the sum of capacitor banks installed on kVAR basis. (i.e. per kVAR)

9.3 REQUIREMENTS

9.3.1 Capacities of the capacitor banks/RLC panels shall be indicated in the

format.


79

9.4 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORK

9.4.1 All routine and type tests as per IS: 2834 relevant to capacitor banks as amended upto date shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works and

test certificates shall be furnished to the department.

9.5 INSTALLATION

9.5.1 Capacitor banks shall be installed at least 30cm away from the walls on

suitable metal frame work of welded construction. The earth terminals

provided on the body of capacitor bank shall be bounded to the main

capacitor panel earth bus with 2Nos. 8SWG copper or 6 SWG GI earth wires.

9.6 TESTS AT SITE

9.6.1 Insulation resistance with 500V DC Megger shall be carried out and test results recorded

9.7 POWER CONDITIONER SAVERS

9.7.1 Recently RLC circuit operated power factor improvement panels (Power correction & saver system) are available in the market. These are

more suitable for installations with electrical equipments (computers,

servers, medical equipments electronic ballasts etc.). Capacitor banks

are prone to introduce additional harmonics at such installations and

therefore their use should be restricted at such installations.

9.7.2 The equipments are called power conditioner savers. These are

waveform correction and power factor improvement devices using Rapid

Instruction Semi conductor (RISC) micro controllers/capacitor duty

contactor switching.

9.7.3 These work on principle of using low loss continuously variable

reactance & adjustable phase wise capacitance to provide optimum

impedance to the circuit for transfer efficiently.

9.8 TECHNICAL FEATURES:

1. A micro controller & RISC processor.

2. Intelligent switching operation, fast response, high break relays (imported).

3. Polarity reversal indication.

4. Phase wise dynamically reactive compensation.

5. Operating power factor 0.6‐ 0.99 Lag.

These devices may save upto 30% energy &provide pure near true,

quality power.


80

10.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS)

10.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PREWIRED DBS

10.1.1 As a general practice only prewired MCB type DBs shall be used, on

account of their superior technical features, compared to conventional

DBs which don’t allow for proper wiring space and wiring termination.

Rewirable fuse type DBs shall not be used.

10.1.2 Prewired DBs shall have following feature:

Recess/ surface type with integral loose wire box.

Phase/neutral/earth terminal blocks for termination of incoming &

outgoing wires

Din Channel for mounting MCBs

Arrangement for mounting incomer MCB/RCCB/RCBO/MCCB as

required.

Copper Bus bar

Earthing terminals

Wiring from MCBs to phase terminal block

Interconnection between terminal block/incoming switch/bus bar/neutral

terminal block/earth terminal connector with specified size FRLS pre

insulated copper conductor cable duly fitted with copper lugs/ thimbles.

Terminal blocks should be suitable for termination of conductor/ cable

of required size but minimum rated cross section of the terminal blocks

should be 6 sq.mm.

Terminal blocks shall be made of flame retardant polymide material

Colored terminal blocks and FRLS wires for easy identification of RYB

Phase, Neutral, Earth.

Prewired DB shall be provided with a detachable cassette for safe

removal of MCBs, RCCBs. Terminal connectors from Db without

loosening the internal cable connection of Phase and neutral circuit.


81

The prewired DB shall have peel able poly layer on cover for protection

from cement, plaster, Paints etc. during construction period

Detachable plate with knock out holes shall be provided at the

top/bottom of board.

Complete board shall be factory fabricated and pre wired in factory

ready for installation at site. The box and cover shall be fabricated from

1.6mm sheet steel properly pre‐treated, phosphotized with powdered

coated finish.

It shall be of double door construction provided with hinged door.


10.2.1 This section covers specification of Distribution Boards (DBs)

suitable for operation on 415 V 3 Phase 4 Wire 50 Hz supply

feeding final lighting and power sub circuits.

10.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards and Applicable Publications

10.2.3 Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of

Practice will apply to the equipment and the work covered by the scope

of this contract. In addition the relevant clauses of the

10.2.4 Indian Electricity Act 1910,

10.2.5 Indian Electricity Rules 1956,

10.2.6 National Building Code 1997,

10.2.7 National Electric Code 1985,

10.2.8 Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Building (general):

10.2.9 General Principal and Fire Grading ‐ IS 1641 ‐ 1988 as amended up to

date shall also apply.

10.2.10 Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant

British and/or IEC Standards shall be applicable.

10.2.11 Miniature Air Circuit Breakers for AC circuits IS 8828 : 1996 and IEC

947

10.2.12 Residual current operated Circuit Breakers IS 12640 : 1988

10.2.13 Low voltage switchgear and control gear Part II IS 13947 : 1993


82

10.2.14 Degrees of Protection provided by enclosures for low IS 2147 : 1962

10.2.15 voltage switchgear

10.2.16 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of IS 10118 : 1982

10.2.17 Switchgear not exceeding 1000 volts

10.2.18 General requirements for switchgear and control gear IS 4237: 1982

10.2.19 For voltages not exceeding 1000 volts

10.3 SUBMITTALS

10.3.1 Drawings and Data

The following minimum information shall be furnished with the Shop

Drawings:‐

Overall dimensions showing front view, plan, elevation and cross

section.

Complete bill of material module wise.

Complete one line diagram.

Instruction Manuals

Contractor shall furnish 6 copies of instruction manual which

shall contain detailed instruction for installation, testing,

commissioning, operation and maintenance requirements.

10.4 SPECIFICATION

10.4.1 General

10.4.1.1 Distribution Boards shall be suitable for operation on 3 phase/single

Phase 415/230 Volts, 50 Hz neutral grounded at Transformer.

10.4.1.2 The Distribution Boards shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards

and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations.

10.4.2 Miniature Circuit Breakers

10.4.2.1 The MCB's shall be of the completely moulded design suitable for

operation at 240/415 Volts 50 Hz system. The MCB's shall have a

rupturing capacity of 10 KA Ics. The MCB's shall have inverse time

delayed thermal overload and instantaneous magnetic short circuit

protection. The MCB time current Characteristic shall coordinate with

PVC cable characteristic. Watt loss per pole of MCB shall confirm to


83

value specified in IS 8828 ‐ 1996. Type test certificates from

independent authorities shall be submitted with the tender.

10.4.3 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB)

10.4.3.1 RCCBs shall comply to IS 12640 ‐ 1988 and shall be of the current

operated type. The RCCB shall be designed to trip within 20 mili sec at

a current sensitivity of 30 mA. The RCCB shall be of 2 pole construction

for single phase and 4 pole construction for 3 phases. All RCCB shall be

complete with test buttons. RCCB shall have a minimum life expectancy

of 20,000 operations.

10.4.4 Distribution Boards

10.4.4.1 DBs shall be wall mounting, recessed/surfaced type, totally

enclosed, dust and vermin proof and Shall Comprise of miniature

circuit breakers, earth leakage circuit breakers, bus bars, neutral link

etc as required, of ratings detailed in the schedule of quantities.

10.4.4.2 DBs shall be double door type access to the wiring shall not be possible

with opening of the outer hinged cover. A cover shall be provided inside

the DB to protect all live parts. Only the operating handle/knobs shall

project outside the cover plate. The door shall be earthed with insulated

copper braded flexible wires.

10.4.4.3 Components forming a part of the DBs shall comply to the relevant

Standards and Codes of the Bureau of Indian Standards.

10.4.4.4 DBs shall be fabricated from minimum 16 gauge CRCA sheet steel and

shall have a hinged lockable spring loaded cover. All cutouts and covers

shall be provided with synthetic rubber gaskets. The entire construction

shall give a IP 54/55 degree of protection unless otherwise stated.

10.4.5 The bus‐bar shall be of electrical grade copper having a maximum

current density of 1.6 ampere per square mm and PVC FRLS

insulated throughout the length. The minimum spacing between phases

shall be 25 mm and between phase and earth 19 mm

10.4.6 Separate neutral link for each phase shall be provided.

10.4.7 All the internal connections shall be with either solid copper PVC

insulated or copper conductor FRLS PVC insulated wires of adequate

rating.


84

10.4.8 All the internal connections shall be concealed by providing a hinged

protective panel to avoid accidental contact with live points.

10.4.9 All outgoing equipment shall be connected direct to the bus bar on the

live side. The equipment shall be mounted on a frame work for easy

removal and maintenance.

10.4.10 The sheet steel work shall undergo a rigorous rust proofing process, two

coats of filler oxide primer and final powder coated paint finish.

10.4.11 All the circuits shall have an independent neutral insulated wire, one per

circuit, and shall be numbered and marked as required by the Project

Manager.

10.4.12 A sample of the completed board is to be got approved by the Project

Manager before commencement of supply and erection.

10.4.13 Before commissioning, the distribution boards shall be megger tested

for insulation and earth continuity.

10.4.14 The following color coding shall be used for identification of the bus

bars and wiring as per IS 5578:1984: Red phase‐ Red Yellow phase‐

Yellow Blue phase -Blue Neutral‐ Black Earthing ‐ Green Control wiring

‐ Grey

10.4.15 The incoming and outgoing terminals shall be suitable for the

termination of cables as required.

10.4.16 All terminals, busbars shall be insulated and shrouded to avoid

accidental contact.

10.4.17 All metal parts shall be adequately earthed. An earth bus of tinned

copper shall be provided of adequate section and length to

accommodate all circuits

10.4.18 Sheet Steel Treatment and Painting

10.4.19 Sheet steel used in the fabrication of DBs shall undergo a rigorous

cleaning and surface treatment seven tank process comprising of

alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognized

phosphating process after which a coat of primer paint compactively

with the final paint shall be applied over the treated surface. Final paint

coat of oven baked powder coating, of minimum 50 micron thickness,

of sheet approved by Project Manager shall then be provided.


85

10.4.20 All sheet steel shall after metal treatment be given powder

coated finish painted with two coats of shade 692 to IS 5 on the outside

and white on the inside. Each coat of paint shall be properly stoked and

the paint thickness shall not be less than 50 microns.

10.4.21 Name Plates and Labels

10.4.22 Suitable engraved white on black name plates and identification labels

of metal for all Switchboards and Circuits shall be provided. These shall

indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.

10.4.23 Type Test Type test certificates as per IS 8623 shall be submitted.


86

11.0 CONDUITING AND WIRING

11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 The system of wiring shall consist of single‐core/multi‐core PVC

insulated Copper conductor wires in PVC conduits concealed / exposed

or casing pipes as called for. All conduits exposed to air must be GI type

& all accessories required for conduit installation should be hot dip

galvanized or Pure brass type as specified in BOQ.

11.1.2 Standards and Codes

11.1.3 These specifications indicate the General requirements for internal

electrical work including wiring system, panel boards, cable laying,

earthing protection and other related works.

11.1.4 These specifications are drawn to indicate essential requirements

and precautions to be taken regarding internal electrical installation

for ensuring efficient, safe, economical and practicable use of

electrical materials and equipment, in conformity with statutory

regulations and easy maintainability of the installations.

11.1.5 Complete work shall be carried out conforming to the provisions of

Indian Electricity Act and relevant Indian standard Specifications (ISS).

Wherever these regulations are supplemented by the State Electricity

Dept., Electricity Undertakings/Boards, Factory inspector and the Safety

Engineering Dept., the installation shall also comply with these

requirements. Wherever the specifications given in this booklet differs

from those of the statutory regulations, these specifications shall be

followed.

11.1.6 On completion of works, wiring diagram for complete installation shall

be prepared by the contractor and 4 copies of the same shall be

supplied to client.

11.1.7 All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly in plan the main switch board,

distribution fuse board, the runs of various mains and sub mains and

the position of points with their classifications and controls.


87

11.1.8 All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in wiring diagram and all

points shall be given the same number as the circuit to switch they are

electrically connected. Distributions boards shall also be marked to

indicate the circuit number controlled by them.

11.1.9 The Contractor shall prepare fabrication and detailed working drawings

and obtain approval of Electrical Inspector, and other local authorities

before submitting them for approval of client. All works shall be carried

out only on approval of drawings. Approval of drawings, does not

relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to meet the intents of

specifications. Wherever service connections are to be obtained from the

local supply company, the contractor shall process the application and

obtain the power supply directed by EIC.

11.1.10 Location of panel boards, distribution boards, switch boards, light

fittings, cable routes, conduit/ CTS wiring routes, earth pits etc. shall

be marked at site and approval of Engineer obtained before proceeding

with the installation work.

11.1.11 Rated Power, Voltage and frequency of supply of current consuming

devices and materials used in installation shall be suitable for the power

and frequency of the supply to which these are to be connected.

11.1.12 Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of

Practice as stipulated below shall apply to the equipments and the work

covered in this section. In addition the relevant clauses of the Indian

Electricity Act 1910, Indian Electricity Rules 1956, National Building

Code 2005, National Electric Code 1985, Code of Practice for Fire

Safety of Building (general) : General

11.1.13 Principal and Fire Grading ‐ IS 1641 and IEE wiring regulation 16th

edition as amended up to date shall also apply. Wherever appropriate

Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/or IEC

Standards shall be applicable.

11.1.14 660/1100 V grade FRLS PVC insulated wires. IS 694 : 1990

11.1.15 Accessories for rigid steel conduits IS 3837 : 1990


88

11.1.16 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring IS 3480 : 1990

11.1.17 Switch socket outlets IS 4615 : 1990

11.1.18 3 pin plugs and socket outlets up to 250 volts IS 1293 : 1988

11.1.19 Glossary of items for electrical cables IS 1885 : 1971

and conductors

11.1.20 Conductors for insulated electric cable IS 8130 : 1984

11.1.21 General and safety requirements for IS 1913:1978

fluorescent lamps luminaries

11.1.22 Switches for domestic and similar purposes IS 3854 : 1997

11.1.23 Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories IS 5133 : Parts I

& II 1969

11.1.24 Danger notice plates IS 2551 : 1982

11.1.25 Code of practice for personal hazard IS 1644: 1998

fire safety of buildings

11.1.26 Code of practice for electrical installation IS 1646 : 1997

fire safety of buildings

11.1.27 Code of practice for electrical wiring IS 732 : 1989

Installations

11.1.28 Code of practice of fire safety buildings IS 1646 : 1982

(General‐ Electrical installations)

11.1.29 Guide for safety procedure and practices IS 5216 : 1982

in electrical works

11.2 CHECKING OF DRAWINGS

11.2.1 Before commencing the Conduiting work, the Contractor shall

carefully examine the approved floor drawings indicating the layout of

conduits, check the number and size of conduits with respect to number

of wires, location of junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes

and other relevant details. Any changes suggested by the Contractor


89

shall be got approved from the Consultants before the actual laying of

conduits. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be brought to the

notice of the Architects/ Consultants promptly before execution of the

work.

11.3 SYSTEM OF DISTRIBUTION AND WIRING:

11.3.1 The wiring shall be done from a distribution system through main and

/or branch distribution boards. The system design and location of

boards will be properly worked out.

11.3.2 Each main distribution board and branch distribution board shall be

controlled by an incoming circuit breaker/linked switch with fuse. Each

outgoing circuit shall be controlled by circuit breaker/switch with fuse.

11.3.3 For non‐residential buildings, as far as possible, DBs shall be separate

for light and power.

11.3.4 Only MCCB/MCB DBs shall be used. Rewirable type fuses shall not be

used.

11.3.5 Three phase DBs shall not be used for final circuit distribution as far as

possible.

11.3.6 ‘POWER’ wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from light wiring,

from the level of circuits, i.e., beyond the branch distribution boards.

Conduits for light/power wiring shall be separate.

11.3.7 Essential/non‐essential/UPS distribution each will have a completely

independent and separate distribution system starting from the main,

switchboard up to final wiring for each system. As for example, conduit

carrying non‐essential wiring shall not have essential or UPS wiring.

Wiring foe essentials and UPS supply will have their own conduit system.

No mixing of wiring is allowed.

11.3.8 Generally, no switchboard will have more than one source of incoming

supply. More than one incoming supply will be allowed only at main

board with proper safety and interlocking so that only one source can

be switched on at a time.


90

11.3.9 Each MDB/DB/S witch Board will have reasonable spare outgoing ways

for future expansion.

11.3.10 Balancing of 3‐phase circuit shall be done.

11.4 WIRING:

11.5 SUBMAIN & CIRCUIT WIRING:

11.5.1 Submain wiring:

11.5.2 Submain wiring shall mean the wiring from one main/distribution

switchboard to another.

11.5.3 Circuit wiring :

11.5.4 Circuit wiring shall mean the wiring from the distribution board to the

1st tapping point inside the switch box, from where point wiring starts.

11.6 MEASUREMENT OF SUBMAIN & CIRCUIT WIRING:

11.6.1 Circuit and submain wiring shall be measured on linear basis along the

run of wiring. The measurement shall include all lengths from end to

end of conduit or channel as the case may be, exclusive of

interconnections inside the switchboard etc. The increase on account of

diversion or slackness shall not be include in the measurement.

11.6.2 The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the

distribution board to the nearest switch box from which the point wiring

starts. Looping of switch boxes also will be counted towards circuit

wiring. Measured along the length of conduit/channel.

11.6.3 When wires of different circuits are grouped in a single conduit/channel,

the same shall be measured on linear basis depending on the actual

number and sizes of wires run.

11.6.4 Protective (loop earthing) conductors, which are run along the circuit

wiring and the sub main wiring, shall be measured on linear basis and

paid for separately.

11.6.5 NOTE: Conduit carrying submain will not carry circuit/point wiring.

Similarly conduit carrying circuit wiring will not carry submain/point

wiring.

11.6.6 Conduit carrying circuit wiring will not carry submain /point wiring.


91

11.7 MEASUREMENT OF OTHER WIRING WORK :

11.7.1 Except as specified above for point wiring, circuit wiring and

submain wiring, other types of wiring shall be measured separately on

linear basis along the run of wiring depending on the actual

number and sizes of wires run.

11.8 POINT WIRING :

11.8.1 Definition: A point (other than socket outlet point) shall include all work

necessary in complete wiring to the following outlets from the controlling

switch or MCB).

a. Ceiling rose or connector (in the case of points for

ceiling/exhaust fan points, prewired light fittings, and call bells).

b. Ceiling rose (in case of pendants except stiff pendants

c. Back plate (in the case of stiff pendants).

d. Lamps holder (in the case of goose neck type wall brackets,

batten holders and fittings which are not prewired).

11.9 SCOPE

11.9.1 Following shall be deemed to be included in point wiring.

a. Conduit/channel as the case may be , accessories for the same

and wiring cables between the switch box and the point outlet,

loop protective earthing of each fan/light fixture.

b. All fixing accessories such as clips, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug

etc. as required.

c. Metal or PVC switch boxes for control switches, regulators,

sockets etc, recessed or surface type, and phenolic laminated

sheet covers over the same.

d. Outlets boxes, junction boxes, pull‐through boxes etc. but

excluding metal boxes if any, provided with switchboards for

loose wires/conduit terminations.

e. Any special block required for neatly housing the connector in

batten wiring system.

f. Control switch or MCB as specified.


92

g. 3 pin or 6 pin socket, ceiling rose, or connector as required. (2

pin and 5 pin socket outlet shall not be permitted).

h. Connections to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp

holder, switch etc.

i. Bushed conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass

through wall etc.

11.10 MEASUREMENT:

11.10.1 Point wiring (other than socket outlet points)

11.10.2 Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement

for point wiring for light points, fan points, exhaust fan points and call

bell points. These shall be measured on unit basis by counting.

11.11 POINT WIRING FOR SOCKET OUTLET POINTS :

i. The light (6A) [point and power (16A) point wiring shall be

measured on linear basis, from the respective tapping point of

live cable, namely, switch box, another socket outlet point, or the

sub distribution board as the case may be, up to the socket

outlet.

ii. The metal/PVC box with cover, switch/MCB, socket outlet and

other accessories shall be measured and paid as a separate item.

NOTE: There shall normally be “no the board” light plug point.

iii. The power point outlet may be 16A/6A six pin socket outlet,

where so specified in the tender documents.

11.12 GROUP CONTROL POINT WIRING :

i. In the case of points with more than one point controlled by the

same switch, such points shall be measured in parts i.e. from the

switch to the first point outlet as one point for the subsequent

points, the distance from that outlet to the next one and so on,

shall be treated as separate point(s)

ii. No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one

switch in such cases.


93

11.13 TWIN CONTROL LIGHT POINT WIRING

11.13.1 A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be

measured as two points from the fitting to the switches on either side.

11.13.2 No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one ceiling

rose or connector in such cases.

11.14 MULTIPLE CONTROLLED CALL BELL POINT WIRING

11.14.1 In the case of call bell points with a single call bell outlet, controlled

from more than one place, the points shall be measured in parts i.e. (a)

from the call bell outlet to one of the nearest ceiling roses meant

for connection to bell push, treated as one point and classified

according to 1.4.4 and, (b) from that ceiling rose to the next one and so

on, shall be treated as separate point(s) and classified according to

1.4.4.

11.14.2 No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one ceiling

rose connector for connection to call bell in such cases.

11.15 WIRING SYSTEM

11.15.1 Wiring shall be done only by the looping system. Phase/live conductors

shall be looped at the switch box. For point wiring, neutral wire/earth

wire looping for the 1st point shall be done in the switch box; and

neutral/earth looping of subsequent points will be made from point

outlets.

11.15.2 In wiring, no joints in wiring will be permitted anywhere, except in switch

box or point outlets, where jointing of wires will be allowed with use

of suitable connector.

11.15.3 The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in

the neutral wire except in the form of linked switchgear.

i. Colour Coding :‐

Following colour coding shall be followed in wiring:‐

Phase : Red/Yellow/Blue. (3 phase wiring)

Live : Red (Single phase wiring)

Neutral : Black

Earth : Green


94

ii. Termination of circuit into switchboard :‐

Circuit will consist of phase/neutral/earth wire. Circuit will terminate in a

switchboard first tapping point, where from point wiring starts) in

following manner:‐

Phase wire terminated in phase connector. Neutral wire terminated in

neutral. Earth wire terminated in earth connector. The switchboard will

have phase neutral and earth terminal connector blocks to receive

phase/neutral/earth wire.

11.16 RUN OF WIRING :

11.16.1 The type of wiring shall be as specified in the tender documents namely,

surface conduit/recessed conduit, steel/PVC, channel.

11.16.2 Surface wiring shall run as far as possible along the walls and

ceiling, so as to be easily accessible for inspection.

11.16.3 Above false ceiling, in no case, open wiring shall be allowed.

Wiring will be done in recessed conduit or surface steel conduit.

11.16.4 In recessed conduit system, routes of conduit will be planned, so that

various inspection boxes provided don’t present a shabby look. Such

boxes can be provided 5mm above plaster level, and they can be

covered with plaster of Paris with marking of junction boxes.

11.16.5 Where number of electrical services like electrical wiring, telephone

wiring, computer cabling, pass through corridors, it may be proper to

plan such service with properly designed aluminum/PVC channels duly

covered by a false ceiling, so that subsequently such service can be

maintained and additional cables can be provided.

11.16.6 Generally conduits for wiring will not be taken in floor slabs. When it is

unavoidable special precaution to be taken to provide floor channels

with provision for safety and maintenance. Alternatively false flooring

can be provided.

11.17 PASSING THROUGH WALLS OR FLOORS :

11.17.1 When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken

through a protection (steel/PVC) pipe or porcelain tube of suitable size


95

such that they pass through in a straight line without twist or cross in

them on either end of such holes. The ends of metallic pipe shall be

neatly bushed with porcelain, PVC or other material.

11.17.2 All floor openings for carrying shall be suitably sealed after installation.

11.18 JOINTS IN WIRING :

11.18.1 No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase,

neutral, and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.

11.18.2 There shall be no joints in the through‐runs of cables. If the length of

final circuit or submain is more than the length of a standard coil, thus

necessitating a through joint, such joints shall be made by means

of approval mechanical connectors in suitable junction boxes.

11.18.3 Termination of multi stranded conductors shall be done using suitable

crimping type thimbles.

11.19 CAPACITY OF CIRCUITS :

11.19.1 Lighting circuit shall feed/fan/call bell points. Each circuit shall not have

more than 800 W connected load or more than 10 points. However,

in case of CFL points where load per point may be less, number of

points may be suitably increased.

11.19.2 Power circuit in non‐residential building will have only one outlet per

circuit.

11.19.3 Each power circuit in residential building can feed following outlets :

a) Not more than 2 nos. 16A outlet

b) Not more than 3 nos. 6A outlets.

c) Not more than 1 no. 16A and 2 nos. 6A outlets.

11.19.4 Load more than 1 KW shall be controlled by suitably rated MCB and

cable size shall be decided as per calculations.

11.19.5 Power wiring with bus trunking: It is permitted to meet large scale power

requirement in a hall, or floor, with use of single phase or 3 phase bus

bars running inside a metal enclosure. This will be provided with


96

careful design and use of factory fabricated bus‐trunking of reputed

make, conforming to relevant BIS standards and with standard

accessories like End feed unit, tap off with necessary safety features like

over current, short circuit and earth fault protection. Such trunking will

be of specified breaking KA rating.

11.20 SOCKET OUTLETS :

11.20.1 Socket outlets shall be 6A 3 pin, 16A 3 pin or 16/6 amp 6 pin 5 pin

socket outlets will not be permitted. The third pin shall be connected to

earth through protective (loop earthing0 conductor, 2 pin or 5 pin

sockets shall not be permitted to be used.

11.20.2 Conductors connecting electrical appliances with socket outlets shall be

of flexible type with an earthing conductor for connection to the earth

terminal of plug and the metallic body of the electrical appliances.

11.20.3 Sockets for the power outlets of rating above 1KW shall be of industrial

type with associated plug top and controlling MCB.

11.20.4 Where specified, shutter type (interlocking type) of sockets shall be used.

11.20.5 Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch or MCB, as specified.

The control switch/MCB shall be connected on the “live” side of the line.

11.21 CABLES :

11.21.1 Copper conductor cable only will be used for submain/circuit/point

wiring.

11.22 INSTALLATION :

11.22.1 Copper conductor cable shall be PVC insulated, Fire retardant, low

smoke (FRLS) type confirming to BIS Specification.

11.22.2 Multi stranded: Cables are permitted to be used.

11.23 MODULAR COVER PLATE MOUNTED WIRING ACCESSORIES

11.23.1 Switches

All 6 and 16 amps switches shall be of the modular enclosed type flush

mounted 220 Volt AC of the best quality and standard. The switch

moving and fixed contacts shall be of silver nickel and silver graphite


97

alloy and contact tips coated with silver. The housing of switches shall be

made from high impact resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet

stabilized Project Managing plastic material. The switch shall be

connected on to the phase wire of the circuit.

Molded Cover Plates

Switches, receptacles and telephone system outlets in wall shall be

provided with moulded cover plates of shape, size and color approved

by the Project Manager made from high impact resistant, flame

retarding and ultra violet stabilized Project Managing plastic material,

and secured to the box with counter sunk round head chromium plated

brass screws. Where two or more switches are installed together, they

shall be provided with one common switch cover plate as described

above with notches to accommodate all switches either in one, two or

three rows.

One and two gang switch cover plate, telephone outlet cover plate, 6

and 16 amps switched/un switched plates, shall have the same shape

and size. Three and four gang switch cover plates shall have the same

shape and size. Six and eight gang switch cover plates shall have the

same shape and size. Nine and twelve switch cover plates shall have the

same shape and size. Wherever five switches, seven switches, ten

switches and eleven switches are to be fixed the next higher size of gang

switch cover plate to be used and openings shall be provided with

blank-off covers at no extra cost.

11.23.3 Wall Socket Outlets

All 6/16 amps wall socket outlets unless otherwise mentioned on the

drawings shall be switched, with round pins and fitted with automatic

linear safety shutters to ensure safety from prying fingers. Un switched

6/16 amp wall socket outlets where called for in the drawings shall be

of three pin type. The socket outlets shall be made from high impact

resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized Project Managing

plastic material. The switch and sockets shall be located in the same

plate. The plates for 6 amps.


98

Switched/ unswitched plugs and telephone outlets shall be of the same

size and shape. All the switched and un switched outlets shall be of the

best standard. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the

phase wire of the circuit. An earth wire shall be provided along the

cables feeding socket outlets for electrical appliances. The earth wire

shall be connected to the earthing terminal screw inside the box. The

earth terminal of the socket shall be connected to the earth terminal

provided inside the box.

11.24 FLEXIBLE CABLE:

11.24.1 Conductor of flexible cables shall be of copper. The cross sectional area

of conductor for flexible cable shall be as per design.

11.24.2 Only 3 core flexible cables shall be used for connecting single-phase

appliances.

11.24.3 Unless the flexible cables are mechanically protected by armour, or

tough rubber, or PVC sheath, these shall not be used in workshops and

other places where they are liable to mechanical damage.

11.24.4 Flexible cable connection to bell push from ceiling rose shall be taken

through steel conduit/metallic casing and capping.

11.25 WIRING ACCESSORIES:

11.26 CONTROL SWITCH FOR POINT:

11.26.1 Control switches (single pole switch) carrying nit more than 16A shall be

modular type. The switch shall be ‘On’ when the knob is down.

11.26.2 Modular type switches of reputed make along with matching mounting

boxes shall be used in non- residential building and residential quarters

of all types. Modular type sockets, stepped type fan regulators shall be

used. All such boxes, switches and accessories shall be of same make of

modular switch manufacturer.

11.26.3 It is recommended to provide double pole MCB in proper enclosure as

power out let for window type AC units, geysers etc.


99

11.27 SWITCH BOX:

11.27.1 Switch box shall be hot dip galvanized, factory fabricated. Suitable in

size for surface/ recess mounting and suitable in size for accommodating the required number of switches and accessories

(where required to be used for applications other then modular

switches/ sockets).

11.27.2 Switch box also can be of non-metallic material. The technical

sanctioning authority will approve specified makes of reputed quality

and specifications.

11.28 CEILING ROSE:

11.28.1 A ceiling rose shall not be used on a circuit, the voltage of which

normally exceeds 250V.

11.28.2 Only one flexible cord shall be connected to a ceiling rose. Specially

designed ceiling roses shall be used for multiple pendants.

11.28.3 A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal as an integral part of it.

11.29 LAMP HOLDERS:

11.29.1 Lamp holders may be batten, angle, pendant or bracket holder type as

required. The holder shall be made of brass and shall be rigid enough

to maintain shape on application of a nominal external pressure. There

should be sufficient threading for fixing the base to the lamp holder part

so that they do not open out during attention to the lamp or shade.

11.29.2 Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall have not less than 1.3 cm nipple, and all those for use with flexible pendant shall be

provided with cord grips.

11.29.3 All lamp holders shall be provided with shade carriers.

11.29.4 Where center contact Edison Screw lamp holder is used the outer or

screw contact shall be connected to the ‘middle wire’. Or the neutral

conductor of the circuit.

11.30 FITTINGS:

11.31 TYPES:

The type of fittings shall be as specified in tender documents. Indoor

type fittings:


100

11.31.1 Where conductor are required to be drawn through tube or channel

leading to the fitting, the tube or channel must be free sharp angles or

projecting edge, and of such size as will enable them to be wired with

the conductors used for the final circuit without removing the braiding

or sheathing. As far as possible all such tubes or channels should be of

sufficient size to permit looping back.

11.31.2 Wires used within prewired fittings shall be flexible with PVC insulation

and 14/0.193mm (minimum) copper conductors. The leads shall be

terminated on built-in-terminal block, ceiling rose or connector, as

required.

11.31.3 Fitting using discharge lamps shall be complete with power factor

correction capacitors, either integrally or externally. An earth terminal

with suitable marking shall be provided for each fitting for discharge

lamps.

11.31.4 Fitting shall be installed such that the lamp is at a height of 2.4m above

floor level, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

11.31.5 Fittings made or CRCA shall be phosphatized and powder/epoxy

painted. For coastal areas and humid area like toilets, Kitchen, for

prolonging the life of such fittings, corrosion free materials like

engineering plastic, aluminium, stainless steel etc. Should be used.

11.32 OUTDOOR FITTINGS:

11.32.1 Outdoor fitting shall have suitable IP protection. It is preferable that

street light fitting are of cast aluminium body of IP65, for reducing

recurring maintenance cost and improved performance. Where required

IP66 fitting also can be provided for reducing maintenance frequency

and cost.

11.32.2 Other fittings, which are not available with tested IP 65/54 protection,

can be properly fabricated with weatherproof features, proper

Gasketing etc. As far as possible corrosion free material like cast

aluminium, stainless steel, engineering plastics may be used for

fabrication of such fittings, to prolong life such fittings. There should not

be any exposed wiring in such outdoor fittings.


101

11.33 ATTACHMENT OF FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:

11.33.1 Conduit wiring system:

11.32.2 All accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushes and

regulators shall be fixed in flush pattern inside the switch/regulator

boxes. Accessories like ceiling roses, brackets, batten holders etc. shall

be fixed on outlet boxes. The fan regulators may also be fixed on outlet

boxes, if so directed by the Engineer.

11.32.3 Aluminum alloy or cadmium plated iron screws shall be used to fix the

accessories to their bases.

11.32.4 The switch box/regulator box shall normally be mounted with their

bottom 1.25mm from floor level, unless other directed by the Engineer.

11.33.5 Fixing to walls and ceiling:

11.33.6 Wooden plugs for fixing to wall/ceiling will not be allowed. Fixing will be

done with the help of PVC sleeves/Rowel plugs/dash fasteners as

required.

11.33.7 Drilling of holes shall be done by drilling machines only. No manual

drilling of hole will be allowed.

11.34 FANS, REGULATORS AND CLAMPS:

11.35 CEILING FANS:

11.35.1 Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant India

Standards.

11.35.2 All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector

boxes, and suspended from hooks or shackles, with insulators between

hooks and suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension

rod.

11.35.3 For wooden or steel joists and beams, the suspension shall consist of GI

flat of size not less than 40mm X 6mm, secured on the sides of the joists

or beams by means of two coach screws of sizes not less than 5 cm for

each flat. Where there is space be placed above the beam, a through-

bolt of size not less than 1.5 cm dia, shall be secured from movements

by means of another bolt and nut at the bottom of the beam. A hook

consisting of MS rod of size not less than 1.5 cm dia shall be inserted


102

between the MS flat through oval holes on their sides. Alternatively, the

flats may be bent inwards to hold tightly between them by means of a

bolt and nut, a hook of ‘s’ form.

11.35.4 In the case of ‘I’ beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the

flanges And shall be held together by means of a long bolt and nut.

11.35.5 For concrete roofs, a 12mm dia. MS rod in the shape of ‘U’ with their

vertical legs bent horizontally at the top at least 19 cm on either side,

and bound to the top reinforcement of the roof shall be used.

11.35.6 In buildings with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height, where the

fan clamp mentioned under sub clause (v) above cannot be used, or

wherever specified, recessed type fan clamp inside metallic box shall be

used.

11.35.7 Canopies on the top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the

suspension.

11.35.8 The leading in wire shall be of nominal cross sectional areas not less

than 1.5 sq.mm. And shall be protected from abrasion.

11.35.9 Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be hung 2.75m above

the floor.

11.35.10 In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including

wiring, the same shall be measured in units of 10cm. Any length less

than 5cm shall be ignored.

11.35.11 The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing

cable in existing conduit.

11.36 EXHAUST FANS:

11.36.1 Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

11.36.2 Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicated by the Engineer.

For fixing an exhaust fan, a circular opening shall be provided in the

wall to suit the size of the frame, which shall be fixed by means of rag

bolts embedded in the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered to the

original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to the

exhaust fan point, which shall be wired as near to the opening as


103

possible, by means of a flexible cord, care being taken to see that the

blades rotate in the proper direction.

11.36.3 Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere, shall be painted

with special PVC paint or chlorinated rubber paint.

11.36.4 Installation of exhaust fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such other

special locations need careful consideration: any special provisions

needed shall be specified.

11.37 REGULATORS:

11.37.1 The metallic body of regulators of ceiling fans/exhaust fans shall be

connected to earth by protective conductor.

11.38 MARKING OF SWITCH BOARDS:

11.38.1 Schematic diagram:

First a comprehensive schematic diagram for each building is to be

prepared, starting from Main LT Panel, rising main, submain boards,

DBs, etc. and the manner in which they are connected. This will include

essential and UPS systems. Sized of interconnecting main/ submain

cables shall be indicated.

11.38.2 Marking of each Main Board:

Each main boards/ submain board shall be marked indicating rating of

each incoming/outgoing switch and details of load/area it feeds.

Detail/size if incoming and outgoing cable shall be marked indicating

from where the incoming cable has originated.

11.38.3 Marking of Distribution Board:

Each Distribution Board shall be marked indicating detail of incoming

switch (size of cable from where it is fed) and marking of each outgoing

MCB indicating the area it feeds. Suitable marking sticker will be

suitably fixed to indicate such details.

11.38.4 Marking of Power/Light DBS:

Power/light DBs shall be marked ‘P’ and ‘L’

11.38.5 Marking for Non-essential/Essential/UPS/S witch Boards:

Each switchboard shall be marked Essential/non-essential/UPS to

indicate the nature of such switchboards.


104

11.38.6 Marking of Main earthing terminal:

Main earthing terminals in main/ submain switchboard shall be

permanently marked, as “safety Earth -don’t Remove”.

11.39 LT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR:

11.39.1 Only following type switchboards will be used:

a. Main/ Submain switchboard of cubicle type.

b. DBs-Only per-wired type MCB type DBs used.

c. Specially designed switchboards.

Also specially designed switchboards can be used with detailed

specification and fabrication drawings approved by the technical

sanctioning authority.

e. Switch board shall be located only in dry situation and well-

ventilated space. They shall not be placed in the vicinity of

storage battery or exposed to chemical fume.

f. Switch boards shall not be erected above gas stove, or sinks or

within 2.5 meter of any washing unit in washing rooms of

launderings or in the bath rooms, toilets, or Kitchen.

g. As far as possible main boards shall not be located in basement.

Such main boards can be located in ground floor.

h. It is preferable to locate floor main boards in rising main shafts

of adequate size, with steel doors (having ventilation) or in

suitable room.

i. Similarly DBs can be in suitable nitches in corridor walls having

doors.

j. Locating main boards under staircase or standing open in

corridor is not a desirable practice, besides being highly

anaesthetic,

k. The main switchboard, which receives power to the building,

should be invariably located in a switch room, having round the

clock access, foe emergency attendance to the switchboard.


105

11.41 GUIDELINES FOR PLANNING OFFICE BUILDINGS:

11.41.1 The main objective is to avoid possible fire hazards, which calls for

sound detailed designing and use of quality equipments and materials

executed with sound workmanship and supervision.

11.41.2 All control LT Panels, controlling power supply to the entire building will

be located in a centralized room, from where centralized control and

monitoring of the entire power supply system can be made.

11.41.3 Earth fault protection shall be provided for each individual building at

the LT receiving point i.e. Main LT Panel. ELCB shall not be provided as

a matter of routine in distribution boards. These can be provided. If

required, by the Chief Engineer.

11.41.4 Office buildings are prone to fire hazard during night hours. Therefore.

After office hour, all the LT Panels should be switched off. Based on

need of the building, only the specified Lt panel to kept ‘ON’ which feed

the loads during night hours. Such panel, called common service panel,

may feed following loads. Which are normally used after office hours :

i) Staircase/ Corridor/ Compound light.

ii) Fire protection loads.

iii) Pump sets.

iv) Other loads which are kept ‘ON’ after office hours.

11.41.5 Reliability of Power Supply:

Minimum two transformer s to be provides certain redundancy. Also a

smaller size transformer may be provided to take care of reduced load

during ‘after office’ hour to have energy saving transformer, after

proper technical evaluation.

11.41.6 It is preferable to plan for a separate service building, to combine all

electrical and Mechanical services of the building, so that the services

can be maintained comprehensively at a lower cost and also reducing

the overall area requirement. Such service building can combine

electrical substation, DG Sets, UPS, Air- conditioning Plant, water supply

pump sets, etc.


106

11.41.6 While planning, maintaining of various services to be ensured, like

providing facilities like access, approachability of various equipments,

maintenance space etc.

11.42 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES

11.42.1 LIGHT FITTINGS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation

under atmospheric conditions without reduction in lamp life or

without deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Degree of

protection of enclosure shall be IP-66 for outdoor fittings except

bulkhead fitting. Bulkhead fitting shall be provided with IP-54

protection. Fittings shall be so designed as to facilitate easy

maintenance including cleaning, replacement of lamps/ballasts.

b. All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps. All mercury

vapour and sodium vapour lamp fittings shall be complete with

accessories like ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors,

starters, etc. Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with weather

proof junction boxes (IP-55) and IP-54 Control gear boxes. Each

fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-out

connection by 1100 V PVC insulated copper conductor wires upto

4 sq.mm. the internal wiring should be completed by the

manufacturer by means of standard copper wire and terminated

on the terminal block. All hardware used in the fitting shall be

suitably plated or anodized and passivated.

c. Earthing: Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an earthing

terminal. All metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall

be bonded and connected to the earthing terminal so as to

ensure satisfactory earthing continuity throughout the fixture.

d. Painting/Finish: All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly

cleaned and degreased and the fittings shall be free from scale,

rust, sharp-edges, and bums.

e. The housing shall be powder coated/stove-enamelled or

anodised as required. The surface shall be scratch resistant and


107

shall show no sign of cracking or flaking when bent through 90

deg. over 12 mm dia mandrel.

f. Metal used in BODY of lighting fixtures shall be not less than 22

SWG or heavier if so required to comply with specification of

standards. Sheet steel reflectors shall have a thickness of not less

than 20 SWG. The metal parts of the fixtures shall be completely

free from bums and tool marks. Solder shall not be used as

mechanical fastening device on any part of the fixture.

11.42.2 The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed complete

and ready for service, in accordance with details, drawings,

manufacturer’s instructions and to the satisfaction of the Project

Manager.

11.42.3 Wires brought out from junction boxes shall be encased in GI flexible

Conduits for connecting to fixtures concealed in suspended ceiling. The

flexible pipes shall be provided with a check nut at the fixture end.

11.42.4 Pendant fixtures specified with overall lengths are subject to change and

shall be checked with conditions of the job and installed as directed.

11.42.5 All suspended fixtures shall be mounted rigid and fixed in position in

accordance with drawings, instructions and to the approval of the

Project Manager.

11.42.6 Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment, plumb, level and capable

of resisting all lateral and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required.

11.42.7 All suspended light fixtures etc. shall be provided with concealed

suspension arrangement in the concrete slab/roof members. It is the

duty of the Contractor to make these provisions at the appropriate stage

of construction.

11.42.8 All switch and outlet boxes shall be bonded to earth with insulated

stranded copper wire as specified.

11.42.9 Wires shall be connected to all fixtures through connector blocks.

11.42.10 Flexible pipes, wherever used, shall be of make and quality approved by

the Project Manager.


108

11.42.11 Measurement and Payment of Wiring

11.42.12 Wiring for lights, fans and convenience socket outlets shall be measured

and paid for on Point Basis as itemized schedule of quantities and as

elaborated as below (unless otherwise stated).

11.42.13 Fixtures in Hazardous area must be flameproof.

11.42.14 LED Street Light :

Single piece pressure die cast powder coated housing, Single piece

pressure die cast powder coated frame

Visor : Toughened, Glass Synthetic Gasket.

Hardware : S.S. Hardware

Ingress Protection : IP66

Integrated constant current driver, High efficiency thermal design.,

Optics equipped with secondary lens for greater light control and

distribution., Efficacy 100lm/w.

11.42.15 LED Weather Proof Luminaire : Housing Injection moulded corrosion

resistant polycarbonate body.

Visor : Injection moulded polycarbonate.

Hardware : M.S. Zinc plate & Passivated.

Ingress Protection : IP66.

More illuminating area for better optical performance.

Operating Temperature – 100C to 500C

Beam angle 1200

No flickering, No humming, instant start.

Wide spread of light to cover maximum area.

2 Nos. of S.S. Bracket provided for mounting.

11.42.16 LED High Bay : Housing : PC Housing

Visor : Clear polycarbonate sheet.

Gasket : Silicon gasket.

Internal wiring : 1.0 sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated.


109

Hardware : M.S. zinc plated & passivated.

Ingress Protection : IP66. And weight is 1.6Kg

900 Beam angle provides uniform illumination over working plane.

Copper heat sink helps faster heat dissipation then conventional

Aluminium heat sink.

Ultra small size and lightweight simplify installation.

Integrated constant current driver.

Lumen efficacy 100lm/w

11.42.17 LED 2X2 Panel :

Surface mounting LED Panel 40W housing extruded aluminium

powder coated frame. Matt finish opal diffuser of glare free and

uniform lighting constant current type., with bracket.

11.42.18 CELENE – SURFACE LIGHTING:

Encloser : White epoxy powder coated CRCA housing

Visor : High quality PMMA acrylic.

Driver : Constant Current Type.

Hardware: S. S. hardware

Optimized led orientation for better light distribution.

No harmful UV/IR radiation and mercury free.

No flickering, No humming, Instant start.

Wide spread of light to cover maximum area.

11.43 WORKMANSHIP

11.43.1 Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be compiled with.

The entire work of manufacture/ fabrication, assembly and installation

shall conform to sound engineering practice.

11.43.2 The work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a first class

licensed foreman, or of a person holding a certificate of competency

issued by the State Govt. for the type of work involved, employed by

contractor, who shall rectify then and there the defects pointed out by

the Engineer during the progress of work.


110

11.44 COMMISSIONING OF COMPLETION

11.44.1 Before the workman leaves the work finally, he must make sure that the

installation is in commission, after due testing.

11.45 COMPLETION PLAN AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

11.42.1 For all works completion certificate after completion of work shall be

submitted to the Engineer.

11.42.2 Completion plan drawn to a suitable scale in tracing cloth with ink

indicating the following alongwith three blue print copies of the same

shall also be submitted.

i) General layout of the building.

ii) Locations of main switch board and distribution boards,

indicating the circuit numbers controlled by them.

iii) Position of all points and their controls.

iv) Types of fittings, viz. fluorescent, pendants, brackets, bulk head,

etc. fans and exhaust fans.

v) Name of work, job number, accepted tender reference actual

date of completion, names of Division/Sub Division and name of

the firm who executed the work with their signature.

11.46 DRAWINGS

11.46.1 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the approved drawings

of as directed by Engineer.

11.46.2 All wiring diagrams shall be deemed to be ’Drawings’ within the

meaning of the term as used. They shall indicate the main switch board,

the distribution boards (with circuit numbers controlled by them), the

runs of various mains and sub mains and the position of all points with

their controls.

11.46.3 All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in the wiring diagram and

all points shall be given the same number as the circuit to which they

are electrically connected.


111

11.47 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

11.47.1 Conduits shall be of metallic or non -metallic type as specified :

A. All rigid PVC conduit pipes shall be ISI marked. The minimum

wall thickness shall be 1.6 mm (16 SWG) up to 32 mm dia and 2

mm (14 SWG) above 32 mm dia. The conduit shall be solid

drawn or reamed by welding and finished with galvanized or

stove enameled surface.

B. All non-metallic conduit pipes and accessories shall be of suitable

material complying with IS:2509-1973 and IS:3419-1976 for

rigid conduits and IS:6946-1973 for flexible conduits. The

interior of the conduits shall be smooth and free from

obstructions. The rigid pipes shall be ISI marked. The minimum

wall thickness of the rigid non -metallic conduits shall be 1.6 mm

up to 25 mm dia conduit.

C. No conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.

D. All metallic conduit accessories shall be only threaded type, pin

grip or clamp type accessories are not acceptable.

E. Accessories for non-metallic rigid type of conduits shall be

normally of grip type.

11.48 CASING AND CAPPING

11.48.1 Casing and capping shall be of good quality PVC, free from defects like

deformations, unevenness, blisters, cavities, etc.

11.48.2 The casing shall be of square or rectangular body with top of the side

walls suitable for tightly fitting slide-in type capping with double

grooving. All surfaces shall have smooth finish inside and outside.

11.49 STREET LIGHT POLES

Octagonal Poles (OH-PL/OPL)


112

Scope:

Supplying and erecting 8mtr/9mtr. high galvanized octagonal pole

details are as specified below.

Material:

8mtr/9mtr. high galvanized Octagonal Pole with details of given below :

Particulars CSR Item No. 8-3-3 CSR Item No. 8-3-4

Material Galvanised as per

specification

Hot dipped galvanized as

per specification BSEN ISO

1461

Top and bottom

dia. thickness

100mm A/F and 200mm

A/F thickness 3mm HT

plate.

70mm A/F and 155mm

A/F thickness 3mm HT

plate

Bracket 1500mm long decorative

sword type single arm

bracket

1500mm long decorative

sword type double arm

bracket

Method of Construction :

The pole shall be erected in provided cement concrete foundation

specially designed. Erection shall be in plum.

Mode of Measurement :

Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each).

11.50 Brackets for Outdoor fittings (BKT)

Bracket welded to Pole Cap (BKT/BPC)

Fabrication of Street light bracket of specified diameter ‘B’ class G.I.

Pipe, of specified length welded to pole cap erected on top of the pole

for erection of either single/double, side entire WP

fluorescent/CFL/MV/MH/SV fitting(s). duly painted with one coat of red

oxide & one coat of Aluminium paint, and erecting the same with

provided leads.


113

Material:

G.I. Pipe: The galvanized iron pipes shall comply with IS: 1239—1973

and 1969 for the specified class. The specified diameter of the pipes

shall refer to inside diameter.

Pole Cap: Pole cap fabricated from 4 mm thick MS Sheet, of 30 cm in

length.

Corner support: 3 mm thick MS flat/sheet

Set screw: MS bolts, nits of 6 mm dia.

Paint: Red oxide & Aluminium paint.

Method of Construction:

The bracket shall be fabricated as per drawing No(s) BKT-1 (Fig.1 Fig.3)

BKt-2 (Fig.4 Fig.5) and shall be placed on the pole cap, Inner diameter

of pole cap shall be as per the outer diameter of pole with sufficient

clearance, so as to facilitate easy placing of the cap on top of pole. Two

holes minimum 6 mm diameter shall be drilled to pole cap. The nits

shall be placed on the pole cap duly aligned with the hole, and shall be

butt welded Bolts shall then be tightened through the nut so as to hold

the bracket in vertical position.

Mode of Measurement:

Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis (i.e. each)

11.51 STREET LIGHT BOXES (SB)

Providing and fixing of CRCA sheet metal/ FRP boxes on pole with

MS Clamps fixing to poles and terminating the cable.

Material:

CRCA sheet metal box: 16 swg CRCA sheet with mounting

arrangement for kitkat MCB.

Bakelite connectors: Bakelite connector of 2/4 ways,32A,250 V.


114

MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3

mm thick mild steel having 40 mm width.

Hardware: 10 mm mild steel nuts and bolts.

Paints for CRCA box: Superior quality aluminium / silver paint or

required shade enameled paints as per the requirement of site

engineer.

Primer/ Red oxide: Superior quality primer /red oxide for use on

sheet metal.


CRCA Sheet metal boxes:

Box shall be fabricated from 16 swg CRCA sheet as per dimensions

specified in item, with minimum 3 mm fold on front side of the box so

as to make it water proof ( Rubber beading/ gasket shall be pasted

on the edges/ asbestos rope beading.) Edges of front cover shall be

folded in such a manner so that it shall cover the front opening of the

box. The front cover shall be fixed either by screws or be hinged ( as

per requirement), with self-locking arrangement. There shall be

provision of fixing connector/ porcelain kitkat fuse/ single pole MCB,

inside the box. Provision of two holes of minimum 10 mm dia. For

fixing bolt of clamp and one hole of required dia. For PVC wire

leads, shall be made at the rear side of the box and provisions for

holes of required dia. At bottom for fixing the cable gland of

incoming and outgoing cables. Box shall have earth terminal. Box

shall have anti rust treatment and be painted with two coats of red

oxide and finally two coats aluminum/ silver paint. Rubber gasket

shall be provided for making the box watertight. Unless and

otherwise specified the mounting height of the box shall be minimum

1750 mm from the finished ground level for facilitating easy

maintenance.


115

FRP boxes:

FRP boxes manufactured with minimum wall thickness of 2.7 mm

either gray or blue in colour having provisions for fixing either

porcelain kitkat fuse or single pole MCB 4 way Bakelite connector,

and with provision of two holes of minimum 10 mm dia. For fixing

bolt of clamp and one hole of required dia. For PVC wire leads, shall

be made at the rear side of the box and one hole of required dia. At

bottom to for fixing the cable gland of incoming and outgoing

cables. The front cover shall be hinged, with locking arrangement

and lock and key. The mounting height of the box shall be minimum

1750 mm from the finished ground level for facilitating easy

maintenance. Whenever required fixing of box shall be done with MS

clamps of required length, so as to hold pipe pole/RSJ pole and shall

be painted in approved manner.


Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (I.e each)

11.52 PAINTING (PTG)

General:

This part of specification deals with the painting of all types of Fans, Street Light Poles, Fluorescent fitting, Transformer, Fencing & Gate of transformer substation, Feeder pillar, etc.

A) Painting of Fans (PFT)

Scope:

Spray painting of table fan / pedestal fan / cabin fan / ceiling fan / exhaust fan including guards etc., shall be carried out in the workshop by adopting following method:


a) Existing paint on the surface of the fan body and its accessories shall

first be scrapped off with the help of Emery paper of required grade or


116

by heating the surface with blowlamp. One coat of primer shall then be

uniformly applied with spraying gun and same shall be allowed to dry

out. The body of fan then shall be spray painted with 2 coats of enamel

paint of specified colour. When the colour is completely dried, rubbing

Wax compound shall be applied. With a smooth cloth, the surface shall

then be vigorously rubbed, until the painted parts start shining. Same

method shall be adopted for fan blades, base & stand of pedestal fan,

mounting frame of exhaust fan. After complete drying, fan shall be

covered in paper, to avoid abrasion.

b) Grills of the fan shall be soaked and then cleaned with solvent and

pressure dried. Paint shall be applied either by brush or with by

spraying. After complete drying, it shall be covered in paper, to avoid

abrasion.

c) The agency shall have to make arrangement of transportation of fans

from site to workshop & back to site, after completion of painting job.


Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis (i.e. each)

B) Painting of Poles/Channels (PTP)

Scope:

Painting of channel / steel tubular / Rail / RSJ / pipe pole along with

street light / pole brackets / clamps completely & providing one coat of

red oxide paint and two coats of aluminum paint (Black paint up to

1.5m from plinth is recommended)


a) Existing paint of the pole/channel shall be scrapped completely by

emery paper / wire brush then one coat of red oxide shall be applied on

cleaned surface. After drying out of the red oxide two coats of aluminum

paint shall be uniformly applied to the pole/ channel. In case of pole, it

is recommended to apply black paint for the portion, which shall get


117

embedded in soil/ foundation. Remaining portion of the pole shall then

be painted with two coats of aluminum paint as per instruction.

b) The agency shall make arrangement of ladders, tools, spares etc.

required for carrying out painting at site also due care shall be taken for

shut downs in case of lines in operation.


Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis. (i.e per

meter)


118

12.0 FIXING SWITCH BOXES AND ACCESSORIES

Switch boxes shall be mounted flush with the wall. All outlets such as

switches, socket outlets etc. shall be flush mounting type, unless

otherwise specified in the Additional Specifications.

12.1 FISH WIRE

12.1.1 To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit. GI fish wire of

1.6mm/ 1.2mm (16/18 SWG) shall be provided along with the laying of

the recessed conduits.

12.2 BUNCHING OF CABLES

12.2.1 Cables carrying direct current may, if desired, be bunched whatever

their polarity, but cables carrying alternating current, if installed in metal

conduit shall always be bunched so that the outgoing and return cables

are drawn into the same conduit.

12.2.2 Where the distribution is for single phase loads only, conductors for

these phases shall be drawn in one conduit.

12.2.3 In case of three phase loads, separate conduits shall be run from the

distribution boards to the load points, or outlets as the case may be.

12.3 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS

12.3.1 The entire system of metallic conduit work, including the outlet boxes

and other metallic accessories, shall be mechanically and electrically

continuous by proper screwed joints, or by double check nuts at

terminations. The conduit shall be continuous when passing through

walls or floors.

12.3.2 Protective (loop earthing) conductor (s) shall be laid along the runs of

the conduit between the metallic switch boxes and the distribution

boards/switch boards, terminated thereto. These conductors shall be of

such size and material as specified. Depending upon their size and

material, the protective earth Conductors shall be either drawn inside

the conduits along with the cables, or shall be laid external to the

conduits. When laid external to the conduits, this shall be properly

clamped with the conduit at regular intervals.

12.3.3 The protective conductors shall be terminated properly using earth studs,

earth terminal block etc. as the case may be.

12.3.4 Gas or water pipe shall not be used as protective conductor (earth

medium).


119

13.0 TESTING OF INSTALLATION FOR WIRING

13.1 SCOPE

13.1.1 This chapter describes the details of tests to be conducted in the

completed internal electrical installations, before commission.

13.2 GENERAL

13.3 TESTS

13.3.1 One completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried out.

i. Insulation resistance test

ii. Polarity test of switch.

iii. Earth continuity test.

iv. Earth electrode resistance test.

13.4 WITNESSING OF TESTS

13.4.1 Testing shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the

presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the contractor. All

test results shall be recorded and submitted to the client & Electrical

consultants.

13.5 TEST INSTRUMENTS

13.5.1 All necessary test instruments for the tests shall be arranged by the

contractor if so required by the Engineer.

13.6 INSULATION RESISTANCE

13.6.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth

and the whole system of conductors, or any section thereof with all fuses

in place, and all switches closed, and except in earthed concentric

wiring, all lamps in position, or both poles of the installation otherwise

electrically connected together, a direct current pressure of not less than

twice the working pressure, provided it need not exceed 500 volts for

medium voltage, circuits, where the supply is derived from a three wire

D.C. or a polyphane A.C. system the neutral pole of which is connected

to earth either directly or through added resistance, the working


120

pressure shall be deemed to that which is maintained between the

phase conductor and the neutral.

13.6.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all the

conductors connected to one pole, or phase conductor of the supply,

and all the conductors connect to the neutral, or to the other pole or

phase conductors of the supply with all the lamps in position, and

switches in off position, and its value shall be not less than that specified

in sub case.

13.6.3 The insulation resistance in megaohms measured as above shall not less

than 12.5 megaohms for the wiring with PVC insulated cable subject to

a minimum of 1 megaohm.

13.6.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that given

by the formula, subject to a minimum of 1 megaohm, is

acceptable.9.6.5A preliminary and similar test may be made before the

lamps etc. are installed and in this event the insulation resistance to

earth should not be less than 25 megaohms for the wiring with PVC

insulated cables, subject to a minimum of 2 megaohms.

13.6.5 The term outlet includes every point along with every switch except that a

switch combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is

regarded as one outlet.

13.6.6 Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may,

if required, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that

event the insulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all

live parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign shall be not less than that

specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, or where there is

no such specification, shall be not less than one megaohm.

13.7 POLARITY TEST OF SWITCH

13.7.1 In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all the

switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conduits

throughout, and such conductor shall be labeled or marked for

connection to the phase conductor or to the non-earthed conductors of

the supply.


121

13.7.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify

that every non linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor which is

labeled, or marked for connection to one of the phase conductors of the

supply.

13.7.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing the terminals

of all switches shall be tested by a test lamp, one lead of which is

connected to the earth. Glowing of test lamp to its full brilliance, when

the switch is in ’ON’ position irrespective of appliance in position or not,

shall indicate that the switch is connected to the right polarity.

13.8 TESTING OF EARTH CONTINUITY PATH

13.8.1 The earth continuity conductor, including metal conduits and metallic

envelopes of cables in all cases, shall be tested for electric continuity.

The electrical resistance of the same alongwith the earthing lead, but

excluding any added resistance, or earth leakage circuit breaker,

measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in

the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not

exceed one ohm.

13.9 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE

13.9.1 Two auxiliary earth electrode, besides the test electrode, are placed at

suitable distance from the test electrode (see figure). A measured current

is passed between the electrode ’A’ to be tested and an auxiliary current

electrode ’C’ and the potential difference between the electrode ’A’ and

auxiliary potential ’B’ is measured. The resistance of the test electrode

’A’ is then given by;

R = V/I

R = Resistance of the test electrode in

V = Reading of the voltmeter in volts.

I = Reading of the ammeter in amps.

13.9.2 Stray currents flowing in the soil may produce serious errors in the

measurement of earth resistance. To climate this, hand driven generator

is used.


122

13.9.3 If the frequency of the supply of hand driven generator coincides with

the frequency of stray current, there will be wandering of instrument

pointer. An increase or decrease of generator speed will cause this to

disappear.

13.9.4 At the time of test, the test electrode shall be separated from the

earthing system.

13.9.5 The auxiliary electrodes shall be of 13mm diameter mild steel rod driven

upto 1m into the ground.

13.9.6 All the three electrodes shall be so placed that they are independent of

the resistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in the form of a

rod, pipe or plate, the auxiliary current electrode ’C’ shall be placed at

least 30m away from it, and the auxiliary potential electrode ’B’ shall be

placed mid way between them.

13.9.7 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode resistance agree, the

test shall be repeated by increasing the distance between electrodes A

and C upto 50m and each time placing the electrode B midway

between them.

13.9.8 On these principles, ’Megger Earth Tester’ containing a direct reading

ohm-meter, a hand driven generator and auxiliary electrodes are

manufactured for direct reading of earth resistance of electrodes.

13.10 TEST CERTIFICATE

13.10.1 One completion of an electrical insta.11a.tion (or an extension to an

installation) a certificates shall be furnished by the contractor,

countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision

the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed

form as given in Appendix ’F’ in addition to the test certificate required

by the Local Electric Supply Authorities.


123

14.0 INSTALLATION

14.1 GENERAL

14.1.1 The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the Indian

Electricity Rules, the codes of Practice of Bureau of Indian Standards and

other relevant regulations.

14.2 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARDS

14.2.1 Switch Boards shall be floor mounted in the room on the pre-formed

trenches constructed with top /bottom entry for cables or free standing

on floor with top entry for cables.

14.2.2 The portion of the trenches which is not covered by the switch board

shall be covered with 6 mm thick checkered steel plates with suitable MS

reinforcement if required.

14.2.3 All unused cables entries shall be closed with suitable blind plugs or

plates made from 4 mm thick sheet steel bolted to the gland plates.

14.3 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD

14.3.4 MCB Distribution Board shall be fixed with bolts and nuts grouted to the

wall concealed in the cupboards /niches provided or flushed /semi

flushed directly into the wall.

14.4 WIRING

14.4.1 PVC insulated wires shall be drawn through concealed PVC conduits

/open metal conduits.

14.4.2 The wires of a circuit shall not run through the conduits switch / socket

boxes of another circuit. A common draw box with hylam barrier

separating individual circuit wires may be adopted to minimize the

number of draw boxes.

14.4.3 Wires shall be terminated at the switch boxes with suitable crimping type

tinned copper lugs.

14.4.4 The wiring shall be carried out by looping the phase conductors all the

switch box and control conductors at the lights, fans and sockets. For

coping of sires in switch boxes, shrouded type multiway 10A / 20A rated

connectors shall be used.


124

14.5 CIRCUIT WIRING

14.5.1 The circuit wiring shall be from MCB distribution boards to first switch

box and looping the consecutive switch box in the circuit including

conduits and accessories.

14.6 POINT WIRING

14.6.1 The following shall be deemed to be included in Light / Ceiling Fan /

Exhaust fan / Call bell / 6A /15 A,AC , Water cooler, Compressor,

socket points etc :

• Conduit & conduit accessories (bends, tee, deep junction boxes, fan

hook boxes) from switch box T point.

• Wiring of point from switch to point.

• Earth wiring of each point from switch to point.

• Fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, fill plug, rent plug etc. as

required.

• Modular range of plate type cover plate, control switch, box etc.

• Junction boxes, pull boxes etc.

• Connectors for termination of points.

• Ceiling rose / Angel holder / Batten holder for light points.

• 6 A socket outlet .

• 6 A /15 A socket outlet and switch for socket points.

• Cutting and chasing the wall for conduit & boxes installation and

making good the same in original finish after installation complete as

required.

14.7 TELEPHONE WIRE

14.7.1 The telephone wire shall be drawn in the conduits provided for the

purpose. It shall be terminated with standard termination accessories at

the end of socket pin and Telephone junction boxes.

14.8 SWITCH / SOCKET BOXES

14.8.1 Switch / Socket Boxes shall be concealed in the wall and the mounting

height of the boxes shall be as indicated in the drawings.

14.8.2 The switch and socket front plates shall project beyond the switch /

socket box. In the case of concealed conduit wiring, the joints between


125

the box and the surrounding plaster are covered by the cover plate. The

cover plate shall be fixed with brass cup washers and full threaded brass

screws.

14.9 LUMINAIRES

14.9.1 The installation of luminaries shall be at fixed locations indicated in the

drawings or as directed by Engineer with necessary fixing accessories.

14.10 CABLES

14.10.1 The underground cable shall be laid in excavated trenches outside the

building. The trenches shall be excavated to a depth of not less than

800 mm and the cables shall be laid at a depth of 750 mm.

14.10.2 The cables shall be laid over a 50 mm thick sand cushion at bottom and

250 mm on top of cable and shall be with bricks at either ends of trench

and protected at top by slab/bricks. The gap between the cables and the

bricks shall be fill with sand, after that for 400 mm (i.e.) upto firm

ground level the cable trench shall be back filled suitably with soil.

14.10.3 The cable trench shall have the widths as indicated by suitably

excavating in types of soil to attain the required width.

14.10.4 Cable makers shall be installed at every 30 m interval along all straight

lines and at bends. The cable markers shall be of cast iron and shall

have a clear and legible inscription “LT CABLE”.

14.10.5 Wherever cables are required to enter the building the cable shall be

through Hume pipe or GI pipe. Suitable packing shall be made at both

ends of the pipes. Cables inside building shall be run in cable trays.

14.10.6 Where cables are required to cross the roads, cables and pipes of other

services the cables shall be drawn through Hume pipe or GI pipe.

Suitable sealing shall be made at both ends of the pipes.

14.10.7 Vertical runs of cables along the wall shall be laid through GI pipe of

suitable diameter upto a height of 900 mm above finished floor level.

The

14.10.8 GI pipe shall be clipped to the wall with GI clamps and GI screws. The

distance between the clamps shall not exceed 400 mm.


126

14.10.9 The cable laying shall be done in such a way that there is no damage /

injury to the cable. Adequate care shall be taken while pulling cable

from drum and while laying.

14.10.10 Sharp bends shall be avoided in the cable runs. The bending radius

shall not be less than 12 times the diameter of the cables.

14.10.11 No joints shall be permitted in the runs of the cables upto a run of 500

Meter.

14.10.12 Where more than one cable has to be laid along the same route, the

cables shall be laid horizontally touching each other and not one above

the other.

14.10.13 The armour of the cables shall be effectively earthed at termination

point through cables glands.

14.10.14 Suitable phase identifiers shall be provided at the terminals.

14.10.15 The cables shall be laid in preformed trenches wherever required. The

preformed trench shall be RCC casting on all the sides. 50 x 50 x 6 mm

MS angle at required intervals shall be fixed to the casting. The

preformed trench shall be covered with RCC cover which shall be

capable of taking the heavy vehicular load. The wall thickness of

preformed trench shall be suitable to take al type of loads.

14.11 STREET LIGHT POLES

14.11.1 Poles for external lighting shall be installed along the road / pathway

edges as indicated in the drawing and shall be provided with cement

concrete foundation below the ground level and above the ground level.

14.11.2 The concrete used for the foundation shall be fixed in 1:1.5:3

proportions with stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size. Concreting

shall be done solidly to avoid honeycombing using shuttering.

14.11.3 The depth and height of the concrete work shall be as per requirement

of the pole heights as indicated in drawing or as advised by Engineer.

14.12 STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE

14.12.1 The luminaries shall be installed at the locations indicated over the

poles. The lamps shall be fixed after the luminaries are installed.


127

15.0 IMPORTANT INSTRUCTION FOR POINT WIRING

ELECTRICAL WORKS

15.1 GENERAL

15.1.1 Rates quoted shall be for work to be carried out at all heights and levels

as required at site. No extra payment on this account shall be

admissible.

15.1.2 Wiring

15.1.3 Rates quoted for Point Wiring items shall be based on average wiring

and average Conduiting length in all areas of the project. Irrespective of

their being shown in tender drawings or not. No extra claim on this

account shall be admissible.

15.1.4 Cost of circuit wiring (wiring from DB terminal to the first switch in any

sub circuit) shall be measured separately.

15.1.5 Rate quoted for Point Wiring for ceiling fan points shall also include the

cost of providing fan hook cum outlet box in the ceiling. The switchbox

shall have space provision for electronic fan regulator.

15.1.6 Same rate shall be payable for wiring in surface Conduiting system or

recessed Conduiting system

15.1.7 Wiring colour code - Red, Yellow, Blue for three Phases, Black for

Neutral and Green for Earth - shall be maintained for entire wiring

except on UPS

15.1.8 All wiring accessories (switches, socket outlets, bell pushes etc..), shall be

as per approved make, type and colour. Sample of each type shall be

got approved by Project Manager before use on work.

15.1.9 Rates for wiring of IP 56/ Metal clad 20/32 amps single/three phase

socket outlets shall include the cost of matching plugs also.

15.2 SUB-MAINS AND MAINS

15.2.1 Payment of sub main wiring in conduit shall be as per the length of

conduit measured between conduit terminations. Wires without conduits


128

inside equipments for making terminal connections at either end shall

not be payable extra.

15.2.2 Payment of cables shall be based on length of cable laid between cable

termination glands on either end. Length of cable leads inside the cable

termination arrangement shall not be payable extra..

15.2.3 Annular space around cables, conduits, bus ducts and rising mains shall

be filled by fire resistant compound of approved make and type in

accordance with the compound manufacturer’s instructions.

15.2.4 Annular space around cables/earth strips entering below ground level

into the building shall be filled up with suitable mastic compound to

prevent ingress of rodents and water into the building.

15.3 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Quoted rates shall be inclusive of the cost of the following.

• Details of sub-circuits being fed by DBs shall be affixed on the back of

the DB door of each DB Earth bonding of all hinged doors (of DBs and

SDB cubicles/panels) shall be effectively done by braided flexible copper

wire .

• All doors and operable covers shall be gas kitted with neoprene gaskets.

3 mm thick gland plate shall be provided at top/bottom of SDBs for

cable entry.

• 1 no. sample DB shall be got approved from Project Manager before

undertaking bulk procurement/fabrication.

• All DBs and SDBs shall be designated by engraved name plates of

approved material, finish and lettering fixed by countersunk Nickel

/cadmium plated screws. Danger plates shall be affixed on all three

phase boards.

• An as-built schematic wiring diagram in stencilled permanent ink and

housed in wooden frame with clear non- reflective acrylic cover shall be

provided near main LT panel in substation / electrical room.

• Framed safety instructions complete with emergency telephone numbers

shall also be provided inside each switch room and generator room..


129

• Contractor shall provide bus bar rating calculation for current carrying

capacity, short circuit thermal and electro dynamic stresses to comply to

the current and fault current withstand specified for each item of

switchboard, rising main, bus ducts etc. for approval of project manager

prior to fabrication. Changes if any required by contractor shall be

incorporated without any additional cost.

15.4 FIXING OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

Quoted rates shall include the following:

• All components that may be required to make the installation complete

in all respects such as,

• Suitable length of down rod, hanger and connecting wires where called

for.

• Internal wiring between accessories.

• Wiring for connecting the fixtures to the point through connection

blocks.

• Metal blocks to serve as base of fixtures. Bonding with earth.

• Drilling holes in supports where required.

• Fixing clamps, GI bolts and nuts, brass screws, saddles, rawl plugs and

other fixing accessories as required.

• For any fixtures and fittings required to be fixed to the RCC slab/Wall,

the Contractor shall drill the required holes with the use of an

appropriate drilling machine with drill bits and no extra charges shall be

payable on this account..

15.5 SUPERVISION

Installation & commissioning of LT Panels, etc. (Materials / Equipments

Supplied by owners).

• Movement from the point of unloading to the point of erection.

• Erection on provide duct / Foundation with necessary fabrication if

required.

• Termination of cables, earth connections etc.

• Assisting in commissioning.


130

• Any minor work to be carried out for completion.

15.6 WIRES AND CABLES

15.6.1 All wires and cables used shall be of the stipulated make. The contractor

shall provide a certificate from the manufacturer confirming that all

wires and cables supplied to site are of their make, irrespective of

whether the wires/cables are purchased from the manufacturer directly

or through a dealer suitable test certificates from manufacturers, as

required, shall be submitted to project manager.

15.6.2 Payment for Conduits / Wires / Cables / DB’S shall not be made without

the manufacturer's certificate being furnished to the project manager.

15.6.3 We confirm that the Special Instructions to Renderers’ have been

understood and our tender complies to the above in its entirety.


131

16.0 TESTING OF INSTALLATION

16.1 SCOPE

16.1.1 This chapter describes the details of tests to be conducted in the

completed internal electrical installations, before commissioning.

16.2 GENERAL

16.2.1 Tests On completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried

out:-

1) Insulation resistance test.

2) Polarity test of switch.

3) Earth continuity test.

4) Earth electrode resistance test.

16.2.2 Witnessing of tests

16.2.2.1 Testing shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the

presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the contractor. All

test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Department.

16.2.3 Test instruments

16.2.3.1 All necessary test instruments for the tests shall be arranged by the

contractor if so required by the Engineer.

16.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE

16.3.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth

and the whole system of conductors, or any section thereof with all fuses

in place, and all switches closed, and except in earthed concentric

wiring, all lamps in position, or both poles of the installation otherwise

electrically connected together, a direct current pressure of not less than

twice the working pressure, provided it need not exceed 500 volts for

medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from a three wire

D.C, or a polyphase A.C. system, the neutral pole of which is connected

to earth either directly or through added resistance, the working


132

pressure shall be deemed to be that which is maintained between the

phase conductor and the neutral.

16.3.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all the

conductors connected to one pole, or phase conductor of the supply,

and all the conductors connected to the neutral, or to the other pole, or

phase conductors of the supply with all the lamps in position and

switches in "off position.

16.3.3 The insulation resistance in mega ohms measured as above shall not be

less than 12.5 mega ohms for the wiring with PYC insulated cables,

subject to a minimum of 1 mega ohm.

16.3.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that given

by the formula, subject to a minimum of 1 mega ohm, is acceptable.

16.3.5 A preliminary and similar test may be made before the lamps etc. are

installed, and in this event the insulation resistance to earth should not

be less than 25 mega ohms for the wiring with PYC insulted cables,

subject to a minimum of 2 mega ohms.

16.3.6 The term "outlet" includes every point along with every switch, except that

a switch combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is

regarded as one outlet.

16.3.7 Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may,

if required, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that

event the insulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all

live parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign, shall be not less than

that specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, or where

there is no such Specification, shall be not less than one mega ohm.

16.4 POLARITY TEST OF SWITCH

16.4.1 In a two wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that all the

switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conductor

throughout, and such conductor shall be labeled or marked for

connection to the phase conductor, or to the non-earthed conductors of

the supply.


133

16.4.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify

that every non linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor which is

labeled, or marked for connection to one of the phase conductors of the

supply.

16.4.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing. The

terminals of all switches shall be tested by a test lamp, one lead of

which is connected to the earth. Glowing of test lamp to its full

brilliance, when the switch is in "on" position irrespective of appliance in

position or not, shall indicate that the switch is connected to the right

polarity.

16.5 TESTING OF EARTH CONTINUITY PATH

16.5.1 The earth continuity conductor, including metal conduits and metallic

envelopes of cables in all cases, shall be tested for electric continuity.

The electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead, but

excluding any added resistance, or earth leakage circuit breaker,

measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in

the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not

exceed one ohm.

16.6 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE

16.6.1 Two auxiliary earth electrode, besides the test electrode, are placed at

suitable distance from the test electrode. A measure current is passed

between the electrode' A' to be tested and an auxiliary current electrode

'C', and the potential difference between the electrode' A' and auxiliary

potential 'B' is measured. The resistance of the test electrode 'A' is then

given by:

R=V/I

R - Resistance of the test electrode in ohms,

V - Reading of the voltmeter in volts. I - Reading of the ammeter

16.6.2 Stray currents flowing in the soil may produce serious errors in the

measurement of earth resistance. To eliminate this, hand driven

generator is used.


134

16.6.3 If the frequency of the supply of hand driven generator coincides with

the frequency of stray current, there will be wandering of instrument

pointer. An increase or decrease of generator speed will cause this to

disappear.

16.6.4 At the time of test, the test electrode shall be separated from the

earthing system.

16.6.5 The auxiliary electrodes shall be ofl3 mm diameter mild steel rod driven

upto 1 m into the ground.

16.6.6 All the three electrodes shall be so placed that they are independent of

the resistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in the form of a

rod, pipe or plate, the auxiliary current electrode 'c' shall be placed at

least 30 m away from it, and the auxiliary potential electrode' B' shall be

placed mid-way between them.

16.6.7 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode resistance agree, the

test shall be repeated by increasing the distance between electrodes A

and C upto 50 m, and each time placing the electrode B midway

between them.

16.6.8 On these principles, "Megger Earth Tester", containing a direct reading

ohm-meter, a hand driven generator and auxiliary electrodes are

manufactured for direct reading of earth resistance of electrodes.


135

17.0 TEST CERTIFICATE

17.7.1 On completion of an electrical installation (or an extension to an

installation), a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor,

countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision

the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed

form as given in tender in addition to the test certificate required by the

local Electric Supply Authorities.


136

18.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION

18.1 GENERAL

18.1.1 The electrical installation shall be complete in all respects and any item

not included in the specification but essential for proper installation and

functioning of the electrical system shall deemed to be included in the

scope of the specification whether specifically mentioned or not. The

system under the scope of work shall conform to the latest codes and

standards as amended in the respective technical specification and

schedule of works. Nothing in the specification shall be construed to

relieved the successful Bidders from the responsibilities where specifically

mentioned in the tender or not.

18.1.2 The following standards as amended shall also to be covered.

18.2 INSTALLATION

18.2.1 All electrical works shall comply with following standards:

18.2.1.1 Indian Electricity Rules - 1956.

18.2.1.2 State Code of Practice for Installation.

18.2.1.3 CEIG Guidelines on electrical installation.

18.2.1.4 IS - 10028 - Code of Practice for installation of transformers.

18.2.1.5 IS - 732 - Code of Practice for electrical wiring installation.

18.2.1.6 IS - 5216 - Guide for safety procedures & practices in electrical work.

18.2.1.7 IS - 10118 - Code of practice for section, installation and maintenance

of LT switch gears & control gears.

18.2.1.8 Workmanship shall be highest standard and quality.

18.3 EQUIPMENTS

18.3.1 All equipments shall be installed strictly in accordance with

manufacturers instructions / drawings.

18.3.2 All HT and LT panels shall be erected on suitable base frame.


137

18.3.3 Distribution boards shall be erected on wall such that height of top of

board will be at 1800 mm.

18.3.4 Switch boards / MCC’s shall be erected with a front clearance of not

less than 1000 mm and a clearance of not less than 750 mm at the

rear clearance of there are cable entries or with a rear clearance of less

than 200 mm in case there are no cable entries or attachments at the

rear.

18.4 CABLES

18.4.1 Cable shall be taken on trays fixed on ceiling / wall.

18.4.2 Cable tray shall be of prefabricated galvanized iron with welded runs.

18.4.3 All cable shall be provided with punched aluminium identification tags

at every 100 m interval at both

18.5 EARTHINGS

18.5.1 Earthing shall be as per IS 3043.

18.5.2 All electrical power items shall be earthed by two separate and distinct

earth connections from main earth bus.

18.5.3 General grounding shall be done to achieve earth resistance of less

than 1 Ohms.

18.5.4 Special grounding shall be done to achieve earth resistance of less than

5 Ohms.

18.5.5 Earth electrodes shall be erected 1500 mm away from the building edge

and minimum spacing between the electrodes shall be 3000 mm.

18.5.6 Earth electrodes - 80 mm dia 3 m long GI Rod type earthing.

18.5.7 Size of earth

18.5.8 Main earth bus : 25 x6 mm GI.Flat

18.6 TYPE OF WIRING

18.6.1 Basement, substation, electrical rooms, AHU, kitchen & lift shaft : open

wiring using M.S/GI/PVC conduit as specified in BOQ.

18.6.2 Staircase areas: wiring concealed PVC conduit


138

18.6.3 Office, shopping and other areas, above false ceiling & concealed

wiring, below false ceiling : Open conduit wiring using MS/ GI/PVC

conduit as specified in BOQ

18.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION:

18.7.1 Lightning protection shall be as per IS 2309.

18.7.2 Size of lightning shall be as per IS 2309.

18.7.3 Terrace conductor : 25 x 3 mm Cu.Flat

18.7.4 Down conductor : 25 x 3 Cu.Flat Or 70 Sq.MM Cu cable

18.7.5 Earth electrode : 600 x 600 x 3 mm Copper plate.

18.7.6 Test link shall be mounted at a height of 1200 mm from FGL.

18.8 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

18.8.1 All DB’s shall be phase segregated type as required by the Electrical

Inspectorate.

18.8.2 All DB’s shall be phase powder coated, double door type.

18.8.3 All MCB breaking capacity shall be 10 KA.

18.8.4 Light Fittings

18.8.5 All light fittings and lamps shall be supplied by the Client/ or purchased

by contractor as per specified in BOQ.

18.8.6 All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of packing materials, scales,

rust, oil, grease etc prior to commencement of the installation work.

18.8.7 All equipments shall be checked physically for the completeness of all

devices before taking up installation.

18.8.8 All equipments and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions/ drawings. Equipments supplied in

sections or dismantled condition shall be reassembled at site with all

associated accessories as per the manufacture’s instructions. All

accessories required like hardware, junction box glands, hylam sheets

etc to be supplied by contractor.


139

18.9 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

18.9.1 Distribution boards shall be erected on wall with concealed system

inside the premises areas and open system in all electrical rooms.

Erection cost shall be inclusive of all fixing brackets, hardware etc.,

Necessary clearance shall be maintained in front of the Distribution

Boards for operation and maintenance.

18.10 LIGHTING

18.10.1 The Installation charges shall include all connecting wiring, down rods

support brackets, earthing, clamping etc, in accordance with the

requirements of this specification.

18.10.2 The AC lighting shall operate at 230V, 1 Phase, the supply being taken

from the lighting DB.

18.11 INDOOR LIGHTING

18.11.1 Open conduit system using MS /GI conduits above false ceiling and

concealed conduit system below false ceiling, shall be adopted, as

required.

18.11.2 In all Utility areas, Electrical room, AHU room, Basement area open

conduit wiring using MS /GI conduit shall be adopted and in all

Staircase area concealed conduit wiring using PVC conduit shall be

adopted.

18.11.3 Conduit pipes, whenever necessary, shall be fixed by 16 SWG saddles

with spacers, in an approved manner at intervals of every 300mm.

18.11.4 Saddles shall be fixed on either side of couplers, bends or similar fittings

at a distance of 300mm from the center of such fittings.

18.11.5 The cost of saddles, clamp etc., shall be deemed to have been included

in the installation charges.

18.11.6 Switches of lighting circuits shall be mounted at 1300mm above finished

floor level.

18.11.7 Where fittings are suspended, ball and socket type suspension units

shall be used.

18.11.8 Earth continuity shall be maintained throughout the entire installation.


140

18.12 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

18.12.1 Exterior Lighting shall be controlled from the External Lighting Switch

boards/ DB located in Substation. Exterior lighting shall be wired

through armoured cables, buried in excavated trench. Three phase

distribution shall be adopted with alternate fittings connected to different

phases.

18.13 CABLING

18.13.1 No cable shall be laid alongside a water main. Spacing equal to the

diameter of the cable shall be maintained between adjacent power

cables.

18.13.2 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to

minimize straight through joints. In each cable run, extra length shall be

kept at a suitable point to enable one straight through joint to be made,

should the cable develop a fault at a later date.

18.13.3 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of

cable, to avoid damage due to twist, kink and sharp bends, etc.

Wherever cables pass through floor or through wall openings, it shall be

taken through Al. pipe sleeves.

18.13.4 The open ends of the sleeves shall be sealed by cold setting compound

after cables are pulled through them to prevent entry of vermin and

ingress of water.

18.13.5 While laying cable, cable rollers shall be used at an interval of 2.0 Mts.

The cables shall be pushed over the rollers by a gang of people

positioned between rollers. The cable shall not be pulled from the end

without intermediate pushing arrangement. The bending radius shall not

be less than that specified by the manufacturer.

18.13.6 Each cable shall be provided with an identification tags at entrance and

exit from any equipment. The tag shall be of aluminium, with the

number punched on it and securely attached to the cable by not less

than two turns of GI wire.


141

18.13.7 Single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation and clamped with

trefoil clamps at every 600mm intervals.

18.13.8 All multi core cables shall be secured to the cable tray by clamps at

every 600mm intervals.

18.13.9 Cables from overhead cable trays to the equipment shall be taken in

prefabricated cable tray with cover/GI Pipe sleeves.

18.14 DIRECT IN GROUND

18.14.1 Power and control cables laid directly in ground shall be laid generally

conforming to the requirements of code of practice IS: 1255. Generally

cables shall be taken at a depth of 750mm from finished ground level

and shall be provided at least 150mm sand cushioning both at top and

bottom and brick protection.

18.14.2 Control cables shall be laid touching each other without any horizontal

spacing. However the distance of the control cable from the nearest

power cables shall be 150mm. Power and control cables shall be laid

separately in groups.

18.14.3 Wherever power or control cables crosses fire hydrant or any other

pipelines of earth flat the cable shall be taken 300mm below the

pipeline.

18.14.4 After laying of cables, the trench shall be back filled with good

excavated soil and well rammed in successive layer not less than 300

mm depth. The width of the trench shall be in accordance with the

number of cables to be laid and in no case shall be less than 300 mm.

18.14.5 Cast Iron cable route markers(Cast Iron) shall be provided at every

100M intervals and at bends.

18.15 LAID ON CABLE TRAY

18.15.1 The cables inside the plant buildings shall be taken on trays fixed on the

ceiling.

18.15.2 Cable trays shall be of prefabricated GI (2.0mm thick) with necessary

accessories like Tees/Bends etc. and shall be supplied along with

fasteners.


142

18.15.3 Cable trays shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS : 2629.

18.15.4 The top tray shall be provided with cover.

18.15.5 Galvanized angle supports for trays shall be welded to insert plates. The

support shall be spaced at 1500 mm centers.

18.15.6 Cables inside the premises shall be taken on cable trays running on

ceiling.

18.15.7 Vertical spacing between cable racks/trays shall be minimum 300 mm.

Different voltage grade cables shall be laid in separate trays when trays

are arranged in tiers.

18.15.8 Contractor shall include in their scope of supply all Insert plates, Anchor

fasteners, etc. required for the laying of cable trays. Fastening on

walls/RCC columns shall be by Anchor Fasteners only.

18.16 CABLE TERMINATION

18.16.1 Termination and jointing of XLPE /PVC armoured cables shall be by

means of compression method using double compression type glands

and compression type lugs. Control cables are to be terminated by

means of terminal lugs, the same shall be of tinned copper compression

type.

18.16.2 Cable tails shall be sufficiently long to run all cores to the farther most

terminal and then back to the appropriate point of connection.

18.17 EQUIPMENT ERECTION

18.17.1 Circuit breakers, power transformers, and switch boards shall be

handled and erected as per the relevant codes of practice and

manufacturer's drawings and instruction manuals.

18.17.2 HT & LT Panels shall be erected on suitable base frame .

18.17.3 The details of foundation pockets required for grouting the frame, shall

be furnished by the Electrical Contractor.

18.17.4 For power transformer drying out and oil filling as required, after

checking and testing the dielectric strength shall be carried out by the

contractor. Oil filtration shall be carried out by the contractor.


143

18.18 EARTHING

18.18.1 The overall earth resistance of the system shall not be greater than one

(1) ohm.

18.18.2 All panels, Distribution boards shall be provided with two (2)

independent earth connections of adequate capacity to discharge the

max. earth fault current.

18.18.3 The size of Earth bus and earth electrode shall be as per specification

and as per schedule.

18.18.4 Minimum spacing between earth electrodes shall be provided as per

IS:3043.

18.18.5 Water stops shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the

building from outside, below grade level.

18.19 INSPECTION

18.19.1 After completion of erection/installation, each piece of equipment shall

be thoroughly inspected in the presence of Contractor for correctness

and completion of erection and operation.

18.20 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

18.20.1 The contractor shall supply and install the safety devices as required by

the statutory authorities but not limited to the following, for each

Substations

a) Danger boards for HT and LT Panels & Transformers

b) Rubber mats for switchgear panels, power distribution boards etc.

c) Rubber gloves, first aid charts, first aid box etc.

d) Fire extinguishers and Fire Buckets.

e) Discharge rods.


144

19.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TESTING &

COMMISSIONING

19.1 GENERAL

19.1.1 The testing and commissioning for all electrical equipment at site shall

be according to the procedures laid down below:

19.1.2 All electrical equipment shall be Installed, tested and commissioned in

accordance with the latest relevant Standards and Codes of Practices

published by Indian Standards Institution wherever applicable and

stipulations made in relevant general specifications.

19.1.3 The testing of all electrical equipment as well as the system as a whole

shall be carried out to ensure that the equipment and its components

are in satisfactory condition and will successfully perform its functional

operation. The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out to

ensure that all materials, workmanship and installation conform to the

accepted design, engineering and construction standards, as well as

accepted codes of practice and stipulations made in the relevant general

specifications.

19.1.4 All tests shall be carried out by the Contractor using his own instruments,

testing equipment as well as qualified testing personnel.

19.1.5 The results of all tests shall be conform to the specification requirements

as well as any specific performance data guaranteed during finalization

of the contract.

19.2 PREPARATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FOR COMMISSIONING

19.2.1 After completion of the installation at site and for the preparation of

Electrical system commissioning, the contractor shall carry out check and

testing of all equipment and installation in accordance with the agreed

standards, codes of Practice of Indian Standards Institution and specific

instruction furnished by the particular equipment suppliers.

19.2.2 Checking required to be made on all equipment and installations at site

shall comprise, but not be limited, to the following:


145

19.2.3 The following checks shall be made on all equipment and installations

at site:

19.2.3.1 Physical inspection for removal of any foreign bodies, external defects,

such as damaged insulators, loose connecting bolts, loose foundation

bolts etc.

19.2.3.2 Check for grease, insulating/lubricating oil leakage and its proper

quantity.

19.2.3.3 Check for the free movement of mechanism for the circuit breakers,

rotating part of the rotating machines and devices.

19.2.3.4 Check for tightness of all-cable, busbars at termination/ joints ends as

well as earth connections in the main earthing network.

19.2.3.5 Check for clearance of live busbars and connectors from the metal

enclosure.

19.2.3.6 Check for proper alignment of all draw out device like draw out type

circuit-breakers.

19.2.3.7 Continuity check in case of power cables.

19.2.3.8 Checking of all mechanical and electrical interlocks including tripping of

breakers using manual operation of relay.

19.2.3.9 Checking of alarm and annunciation circuits by manual actuation of

relevant relays.

19.2.3.10 Check and calibrate devices requiring field adjustment/ calibration like

adjustment of relay settings etc.

19.2.3.11 Check proper connection to earth network of all noncurrent carrying

parts of the equipment and installation.

19.2.3.12 The tests that shall be carried out on the equipment shall include but not

be limited to the above.


146

20.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

20.1 GENERAL

20.1.1 The telephone system shall include providing main / sub distribution

frames, interconnecting cabling, tag blocks inside the buildings,

interconnecting telephone wires between tag block and telephone socket

outlets. The telephone socket outlet shall be modular type or as specified

in the bill of quantities.

20.2 MAIN TAG BLOCK

20.2.1 The main / sub distribution frame shall be enclosed type made out of

CRCA sheet steel of suitable thickness (2 to 3.15 mm). This shall house

necessary number of terminations with tags as specified, with provision

for terminating incoming and outgoing cables. The termination and the

frame shall be of standard make.

20.2.2 The frame shall be suitable for outdoor application with IP 55

protection. This shall be mounted on suitable civil foundation with

necessary GI pipe sleeves for taking incoming and outgoing cables.

20.2.3 Outdoor termination block, if require to be used, shall be with weather

proof IP-65 enclosure with locking facility housed with necessary brick

and RCC foundation and excavation in soil etc. as required.

20.3 TELEPHONE CABLES

20.3.1 All telephone cables shall be PVC insulated, copper conductor

conforming to latest IS and EC standards. Telephone cables shall be

armoured / unarmoured to suit the nature of application and as

indicated in the Bill of quantities.

20.3.2 All cables shall be run in vertical or horizontal trucking, conduits or

cable trays suitably prepared for distribution and separated from

electrical cabling / wiring in an appropriate manner so as to eliminate

electromagnetic interference. All telephone wiring shall be run in


147

dedicated conduits separate from power wiring. All telephone locations

to be in accordance with instruction of Engineer.

20.3.3 All cables shall be identified by tags and a schedule identifying each

termination shall be issued to Engineer upon completion of the cabling

installation.

20.4 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS

20.4.1 Telephone termination block shall be krone make as per latest

standards. The termination block should have loop in - loop out

arrangements, as required.

20.5 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS

20.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish test reports and preliminary drawings for

the equipment to the Project Manager for approval before commencing

supply of the equipment. The Contractor should intimate with the tender

the equipment intended to be supplied with its technical particulars. Any

test certificates etc., required by the local Inspectors or any other

Authorities would be supplied by the Contractor without any extra

charge. All test reports shall be approved by the Project Manager prior

to energizing of installation.


148

21.0 DIESEL GENERATING SET : Specification D.G Set at site, carrying out all preparatory works,

assembling, installing, making adjustments, confirming all pre-

commissioning requirement as per manufacturer’s instruction,

commissioning, final testing, putting in to operation and handing over

of the complete system of D.G set including inspection from inspectorate

office. The work include necessary minor Civil works including opening

on wall/Slab/floor and making good as it was etc. & comprehensive

maintenance of the DG set for 5 year comprehensive maintenance from

the date of commissioning.

Material:

Diesel Generator set with continuous rating, 3 Phase, 415V, 50 Cycles

A.C. supply of specified capacity, comprising of totally enclosed

air/water cooled diesel engine with standard control panel & tool kit.

(Refer drawing no. GEN-DG-1 & GEN-DG-2)

Diesel Engine

The engine shall be of standard design of original manufactures. It

should be a totally enclosed air/water cooled Diesel engine with 4 stroke

multi cylinders developing suitable BHP (As per Table 11/3) for giving

power rating of (As per table 11/3) at the load terminals of alternator at

1500 R.P.M at armature temperature of 400 C for height at 1000 Meter

above M.S.L at 50% R.H. The engine shall be capable of delivering

specified power at variable loads for P.F. of 0.8 (lag) with 10% over

load available in excess of specified output for one hour in every 12

hours. The average load factor of the engine over period of 24 hours

shall be 0.85 for power output. The engine shall confirm to IS: 10000

and Amended up to date

The engine shall be fitted with following accessories:

1. Dynamically balanced fly wheel.


149

2. Necessary flexible coupling and guard for alternator and engine

applicable

3. Lubricating oil cooler

4. Air cleaner Dry/Bath type

5. Lubricating oil pressure gauge

6. Lubricating oil filter with replicable element

7. Dry exhaust manifold with suitable exhausts heavy duty residential

type exhaust silencer and vertical hot air duct both logged with

asbestos rope exhaust piping of required length to reduce noise

level.

8. 12/24 V. Electric starting equipment complete with standard

batteries, dynamo, cut-out, ammeter necessary wiring, self starter

etc. The system shall be capable of starting D.G set within 20 to 30

second even in winter condition with an ambient temperature down

to 00 C.

9. Mechanical Governor of Class A2 for up to and including 62.5 KVA

capacity and electronic governor of Class A1 for capacity above 20

KVA shall be provided as per standard design of manufacturer.

Governor shall be a self contained unit capable of monitoring

speed.

10 Radiator

11.Daily fuel Tank

Daily fuel service tank of minimum capacity as per Table 11/1, below,

fabricated from M.S. sheet with inlet, outlet connections air vent tap,

drain plug and level indicator (gauge) M.S. fuel piping from tank to

engine with valves, unions, reducers, flexible hose connection and floor

mounting pedestals, twin fuel filter. The location of the tank shall

depend on standard manufactures design.


150

Table 11/1 : Minimum capacity of Daily fuel tank for Generators

Sr. No Capacity of D.G. Set Minimum Fuel Tank Capacity 1. Up to 25 KVA 100 Liters 2. Above 25 KVA to 62.5 KVA 120 Liters 3. Above 62.5 KVA to 125 KVA 225 Liters 4. Above 125 KVA to 200 KVA 285 Liters 5. Above 200 KVA to 380 KVA 520 Liters

Engine Control Panel:

Engine control panel should be fitted with following accessories/

indicators and shall have display:

• Start/stop key switch

• Lube oil pressure indication

• Water temperature indication

• RPM indication

• Engine Hours indication

• Battery charging indication

• Low lube oil trip indication

• High water temperature indication

• Over speed indication

Battery Charger:

The battery charger shall be to Trickle & Boost type, and suitable to

charge required numbers of batteries at 12V/24 complete with,

transformer, rectifier, charge rate selector switch, indicating ammeter,

voltmeter, battery over charging protection with audible alarm.

Connections between the battery charger & batteries shall be provided

with suitable copper leads with lugs.

Battery:

Battery capacity and copper cable sizes for various engine capacities

shall be as per the details given in Table No 11/2. Cable sizes shown


151

are for maximum length of 2m length, if higher size of cable is required,

it shall be selected in such a way that voltage drop does not exceed 2 V.

Table 11/2 Battery Capacity and Copper Cable Sizes for Various Engine Capaciites

S.No D G set Capacity Battery

Capacity (AH)

Copper Cable size in

mm2

Electrical System

(Voltage) 1 Upto 25 KVA 86 35 12 2 Above 25 KVA to 62.5 kVA 120 50 12 3 Above 62.5 kVA upto 82.5

kVA 150 50 12

4 Above 82.5 kVA upto 125 kVA

180 50 24

5 Above 125 kVA upto 500 kVA

180 70 24

For AMF applications, a static battery charger working on mains supply

recommended to keep the batteries charged at all times.

Alternator:

Alternator of specified rating, 415 volts, 1500 RPM, 3 Ph, 50 HZ, A/c

Supply with P.F 0.8 lagging a 400 C armature temperature for height

1000 mtr. Above MSL at 50% R.H alternator shall be brush less type self

regulated having static excitation system having capacity of desired

output confirming to IS: 4722-1968 with automatic voltage Regulation

+ 5% operated voltage from no load to full load, two numbers of earth

terminal on opposite sides. Terminal box shall be suitable for

underground cables and same shall be with stand mechanical and

thermal stresses developed due to any short circuit at the terminals. The

alternator shall be in accordance with following standards:

• IS: 4222 The performance of rotating electrical machines:

• IS: 4889 Rules for method of declaring efficiency of electrical

Machine

• IS: 13364 Part I 1992 Alternator-voltage Regulation up to 20 KVA


152

• IS: 13364 Part II 1992 Alternator Voltage regulation above 20 KVA

to 80 KVA

Performance:

Voltage dip shall not exceed 20% of the rated voltage for any step load

or transient load as per IS: 8528 (Part I). The winding shall not develop

hot spots exceeding safe limits due to unbalance of 20% between

characteristics of the alternator shall be as below-

(a) Efficiency at full load 0.8 P.F

(I) Up to 25 KVA-not less than 82%

(II) Above 25 KVA and up to 62.5 KVA-not less than 86%

(III) Above 62.5 KVA/upto 250 KVA-not less than 90%

(IV) Above 250 KVA-not less than 93%

(b) Total Distortion factor

(i) 10% Overload One Hour in every 12 hrs of continuous operation

(ii) 50% overload 15 seconds.

Common Base Plate:

Engine and alternator shall be coupled by means of flex plate/flexible

coupling as per manufacturer standard design and both units shall be

mounted on a common base plate together with all auxiliaries to ensure

perfect alignment of engine and alternator with minimum vibrations.

The base plate shall be suitable for installation on suitable anti-vibration

mounting system comprising of 6 anti-vibrations pads duly provided.

Control Panel:

Floor/wall mounted control panel Box comprising of voltmeter,

ammeter, selector switches MCCB/MCB of adequate capacity, indicator

lamp duly wired with HRC fuses. Alternator & control panel shall be

connected with provided suitable capacity armored cable with necessary

cable glands & lugs etc.


153

Exhaust System:

It shall comprise of following parameters:

Exhaust system should create minimum back pressure.

Smooth bends shall be used for minimizing the back pressure.

Minimum number of bends shall be used for minimizing the back

pressure.

Pipe sleeve of larger diameter should be used while passing the pipe

through concrete wall & gap shall be filled with felt lining.

Exhaust piping inside the Acoustic enclosure / Generating set room

should be lagged with asbestos rope and covered with aluminium sheet

cladding to avoid heating of the area.

Class ‘B’ MS pipes and long bend / elbows should be used.

The exhaust outlet should be in the direction of prevailing winds and

should not allow exhaust gases to enter air inlet / windows, etc.

Factory Testing:

DG set shall be tested in presence of Engineer in charge or his

authorized representative in the factory for following before dispatch.

• Full load trail for 12 hour. Fuel, lubricating oil, etc shall be arranged by

the agency.

• 10% overload trail for one hour within 12 hrs test.

Certificates:

• Manufacture’s test certificate for Engine, Alternator and of the set.

• Necessary certificate for the engine model so selected along with

compliance of noise and emission norms as per latest CPCB guidelines

for D.G. set should be furnished from the manufacturer along with

manufacturer’s technical details.

• Permission from Electrical Inspector.


154


The DG set with canopy shall be erected with due care and ensuring the

perfect level with the help of Sprit level, on provided cement concrete

foundation and connecting the provided earthing connections. The

exhaust system shall be connected to the exhaust manifold. After

ensuring the filling of fuel, lubricating oil and medium of coolant , the

set shall be commissioned, with giving necessary full load trials or with

the available load at site. The set shall be handed over to the

department along with the installation report given by the manufacturer

and with all the necessary certificates and permissions obtained.


Executed quantity will be counted on number basis (i.e each)

Table No 11/3

Rating of Alternator and minimum BHP of Engine S No. KVA Capacity of

Alternator Minimum BHP of

Diesel Engine Average Fuel

consumption litre per hour at 100% Load

1 10 12 3.0

2 15 19 4.1

3 20 26 6.0

4 25 32 6.4

5 30 42 8.3

6 40 50.5 10.3

7 50 65.8 13.0

8 62.5 76 15.6

9 75 91 16.0

10 82.5 102 18.6

11 100 127 22.8

12 125 154 28.0

13 140 166 30.0


155

S No. KVA Capacity of Alternator

Minimum BHP of Diesel Engine

Average Fuel consumption litre per hour at 100% Load

14 160 198 34.3

15 180 235 40.0

16 200 254 44.0

17 250 313 54.0

22.0 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE PANEL (AMF) The work includes supplying, installing, Testing & commissioning of

automatic mains failure control panel including auto by-pass,

suitable for specified rating of DG set complete with accessories and

comprehensive maintenance of the panel up to 1 year from date of

commissioning.

AMF Panel shall comply following IS specification:

IS: 2147 1962 Degree of protection. IS: 4722 H.V. testing for panel.

Material:

Panel shall consist of following:

Power module a pair of electromechanically interlocked contactors

for all the phase / phases & neutral. ( For mains & generator)

Overload relay for generator contactor, neutral contactor for mains

and generator.

Control and Metering module: Line voltage monitor. Generator

voltage monitor, Ammeter,3 times attempt to start facility.

MCB/MCCB of suitable rating for auto/manual operation.

Auto/manual switch.

Emergency stop push buttons.

Manual start push button.

Frequency meter.


156

Engine hour and RPM meter. (Taco meter)

Two earthing studs.

Protection module: The engine shutdown in the unlikely even of low

lube oil pressure, high cylinder head temperature, high water

temperature (For water cooled engine)

Indicators with alarm for Full/Maximum Load on generator.

Indicators for Load on mains, Load on F.G. set, Engine fails to start,

Emergency stop.

Battery charger complete with transformer/ rectifier, D.C Voltmeter

and Ammeter, selector switch for trickle, off boost charging and

current adjustment.

Main supply failure monitor.

Timers.

Fault reset push button.


AMF Panel complete with relays, timers, set of CT’s for metering &

protection and energy analyzer to indicate currents, phase and line

voltages, frequency, power factor, KWH, KVARH & provision for

overload, short circuit, fault, under frequency control cabling from

AMF panel to diesel engine and elsewhere if required, complete with

metering as per materials list.

System Operation:

The above-mentioned facilities provided shall be functional for

following operational requirements:

1. Auto Mode

• A line voltage monitor shall monitor supply voltage on each phase

when the mains supply voltage fails completely or falls below set

values (variable between 80 to 95 % of the normal value) on any

phase, the monitor module shall initiate start-up diesel engine. To

avoid initiation due to momentary disturbance, a time delay


157

adjustment between 0 to 5 second shall be incorporated In start-up

intimation.

• A three attempt starting facility shall be provided 6 seconds ON, 5

seconds OFF, 6 seconds ON, 5 seconds OFF, 6 seconds ON. if at

the end of the third attempt, the engine dose not start it shall be

locked out of start and a master timer shall be provided for this

function, suitable adjustment timers are to be incorporated which will

make it feasible to vary independently ON*OFF setting periods from

1-10 seconds, if alternator does not build up voltage after the first or

second start as may be the case, further starting attempt will not be

made until the starting facility is reset.

• Once the alternator has built up voltage, the alternator circuit

breaker shall close connecting the road to the alternator. The road is

now supplied by the alternator.

When the main supply is restored and is healthy as sensed by the line

voltage monitor setting, both for under voltage or unbalance, the

system shall be monitored by a suitable timer which can be set

between 1 minute to 10 minutes for the load to be transferred

automatically to main supply.

• The panel shall start the set in the event of fault condition of under

over voltage, phase reversal, high frequency, neutral snapping, short

circuit, etc. on the mains side. if the above fault condition arises if the

load is being fed from the DG set, then, the panel start cut off the

load from the set with an audible alarm, and the set shall run on no

load.

2. Manual Mode:

• In a manual mode, it shall be feasible to start-up the generator set by

the operator on pressing the start push button.

• Three attempts starting facility shall be operative for the start-up

function.


158

• Alternator circuit breakers closing and trip operations shall also be

through operator only by pressing the appropriate button on the

panel and closed shall be feasible only after alternator has built up

full voltage.

3. Test Mode:

• When under test mode, pressing of test button should complete the

start up sequence simulator and engine shall be started.

• Engine shall build up voltage but the set shall not take load by

closing alternator circuit breaker when the load is on the mains,

monitoring performance for voltage / frequency etc. shall be feasible

without supply to load

• If during test mode, the power supply has failed the load shall

automatically get transferred on DG set.

• Bringing the mode selector to auto position shall shut down the set

provided main supply is ON if the mains supply is not available at

that time, the alternator shall take laod.


Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)


159

23.0 CABLE JOINTS & END TERMINATION KITS

(LT/HT CABLES) (JT/LT/HT)

23.1 Scope:

Specification No (CB-JT/LT/HT)

Providing straight through cable jointing kit of approved make and

jointing cable as per the manufacturer’s instructions and duly marking

name of jointer and date.

23.2 Material:

Joint kit: Kit manufactured by reputed manufacturer with PVC moulds

made in two parts, with epoxy compound, earth continuity lead of

appropriate cross section having lugs at both ends, aluminium ferrules

of the size of the cable, cross shaped epoxy spacer, MS clips for holding

the moulds, adhesive for pasting the moulds.

23.3 Method of Construction:

Outdoor/Indoor end termination Kit: LT/HT Cables

Before providing end termination kit to the cable, the cable end of the

equivalent length of the moulds, shall be prepared by removing the

outer PVC insulation along with the steel armouring. The ferrule shall

then be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be crimped

with hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The crimping

shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no air gap. Then the

crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC insulation tape and

then with the insulation tape used for wrapping HT conductor. The

above method shall be carried out for all the cores strictly following the

colour code. The leads of the cable now shall be placed into the mould

by using the epoxy spacer, for having sufficient gap in-between the

leads. The earth continuity lead shall be clamped to the ends of the

cable. After covering the cable leads with the PVC moulds, the edges

shall be clipped after applying the adhesive on the inside face of the

moulds. The pasting of moulds shall be rigid and as far as possible leak

proof, so that the epoxy compound shall not spill out. Now the duly


160

stirred epoxy compound shall be poured and fill till the compound rises

through the risers provided on the moulds. After completing the above

procedure, the joint shall be allowed to dry out for at least 8 to 10 hours

(for epoxy compound to get hardened) depending upon the size of

cable. Before connecting to supply, the dry and hardened joint shall be

tested for its insulation level with 1000 V/ 5000 V Meggar.

23.4 Mode of Measurement:

Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each).


161

24.0 HT METERING CUBICLE

24.1 Scope:

Supplying, erecting, testing, commissioning 11 KV H.T. metering cubical

(Compact Type) approved by MSEDCL/Licensee fabricated with

2mm.(14 SWG) M.S. sheets with supporting angle and channel, painted

with powder coating / epoxy paint of required shade copper bus bar

size 25x6 mm electronic security lock and heavy duty mechanical lock,

with counter meter for measuring no of times the opening of doors, top

side cover ( C.T.P.T COVER) interlock with meter doors, epoxy coated 3

nos C.T having required ratio between 5/5A to 100/5A burden 10 VA

class 0.5 I.L. 12/28/75 KVP epoxy terminal block suitable for provided

trivector meter, and provision for incoming and outgoing cables etc

complete duly tested by Licensee with necessary Test Certificates and

erected on provided plinth/ C.C foundation .

24.2 Material :

a) Current transformer : Rated output : 5/5 A to 100/5 A , 10VA,

Class :0.5S STC , Insulation 12/28/75 KVP, IS 2705-1992.

b) Potential Transformer : VA : 50VA , CL:0.5 11000/v3 / 110V/v3

V Freq : 50Hz , IS:3156,

c) 25x3mm Copper strip with earthing terminals brought out of the

cubicle.

d) Godrej Lock with keys .

e) Testing with the MSEDCL.

d) Steel Sheet.

24.3 Statutory Permissions to be obtained by the Agency / Contractor:

Before commencement of work, the drawing of the installation shall be

got approved from the Electrical Inspector, I.E.&L. Department. The

installation should be got inspected from Electrical Inspector and obtain

written permission to charge the Metering Cubicle.


162

24.4 Commissioning:

After above formalities the Cubicle , should be charged / commissioned

in presence of Engineer in-charge or his representative along with load

trials and shall be handed over to the department for beneficial use.

Following test certificate shall be submitted :

1) Manufacturer’s original certificate of Cubicle as stipulated in I.S.

2) Test certificate for CTs & PTs

3) Test results of I.R. values.

24.5 Mode of Measurement:

Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).


163

25.0 LED STREET LIGHT FIXTURES

Scope:

Supplying and erecting approved make LED street light fitting 100 to

300 Watt having PF>0.95 class IP 66 or above Housing of pressure die

cast aluminium alloy and heat sink extruded aluminium.

(A) Luminaire Specifications:

• LED streetlight/flood light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified

elsewhere in tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum

housing with supplier word mark / name engraved / embossing on the die cast

housing, (Stickering / screen printing is not acceptable).

• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum with a toughened glass

diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages, with a suitability for side-

entry street light poles

• The Luminaire shall be designed so as to have lumen maintenance of at least

70% at the end of 50,000 hours(L70) at design temperature & third

temperature picked by the manufacturer should be >/= 105 deg C

• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output from 140 V-

280V supplied voltages using the same driver, delivering nominal 100

lumens/watt at system level.

• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be at least > 0.95 and with

THD<10%

• The luminaire should be full cut off type as per IS 1944, the throw & spread

should be able to deliver uniform light with exactly the desired intensity, and

offer best pole spacing, along with better light control. The tenderer should

submit the certified photometric report as per LM-79, from UL/ERTL/Govt.

NABL recognized lab to validate the photometric claims.

• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized roadway / area

photometric distribution with photometric lenses designed to optimize

application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be provided

on each LEDs on a lens plate.


164

• The fixture should have minimum impact resistant of IK 07 while the ingress

protection with suitable protection by using cover for driver and LEDs should

confirm to IP 66. The fixture should have double-wall construction with silicone

gasket designed for IP66 without using any glue to prevent breakdown of the

water and dust proof seal for both the LED & the driver compartments.

• Driver compartment shall be Top maintainable and should offer independent

IP66 level of protection.

• Driver shall have inbuilt short circuit, over voltage, overload, reverse polarity &

over voltage cut off features.

• Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external heat-sink.

• The delivered lumen efficacy of the system shall deliver more than 100

Lumen/Watt at luminaire level, Color Rendering Index of minimum 70 with

color temperature 5700K with variation limits of ± 355K) per ANSI C78.377A

CCT.

• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, LUMELEDS only.

• Internal Surge protection > 5KV with an External surge protection of 10KV to

be integrated in the luminair. Also 10 KV additional surge protection should be

put in the output of switching point/Feeder Pillar to ensure protection against

surge arising from power line.

• For Driver an Internal type test report complying with international standards

with reference to various general and safety requirements & parameters needs

to be submitted. The efficiency of the driver shall be more than 85 % in all

cases at all times during project period.

• LED street light fitting should be supplied with serial number which should be

attached to the fitting. The label should mention: Name of Manufacturer,

model name and number, system lumen pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of

fitting, Date of Manufacture, and other labeling details as per IS.

• The fixture should be equipped with analog dimmable driver for continuous

dimming facility other than ON-OFF states. The dimming should be

programmable as per the client's requirement.


165

• Luminair capable for individual / group control for ON/OFF/diming via.

Zigbee / Power line / wifi Technology.

Performance Standards:

Tenderer/ Bidder need to furnish the details of LED lighting module

specification:

1. LM80 compliance certificate to be adhered by the LED chip manufacturer. LED

data sheet should comprise of Lumen depreciation (life) data, lumen output,

junction temperature, pad temperature, thermal resistance, and LED drive

current, efficacy of LED should not be less than 130m/watt (±5%). (LM 80

report should be scanned & uploaded) (IESNA: Approved Method for

Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources and LED lumen

depreciation time to L70 based on LM-80 data) (Approved method for the

Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products).

2. LM-79 compliance certificates from UL/ERTL or Govt/NABL approved third

party laboratory for LED subject to submission of required certificate. (LM 79

report should be scanned & uploaded)

3. Electrical safety as per IEC. - As per IEC safety standards IEC61000, 61547,

61347.

4. The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following test

reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress

Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test, Humidity

Test.

5. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test' as per IEC 60068-2-31/IS9000

Part 7 / Sec 3 standards.

6. The luminaire should be tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANS1/IEC 68-2-6

standards.

7. Lighting Design in Dialux software latest version satisfying all illumination

parameters mentioned in the tender.

8. Following reports to be submitted along with luminaire : Photo biological safety

report, REACH, ROHS, Authorization from original LED source manufacturer.


166

The lighting manufacturer should have following testing facility / R&D facility

either recognized by Govt, or NABL accredited:

• GLOW wire test

• HV Tester

• Adequate number of electrical meters for measurement of different electrical

parameter

• Megger (500 Volt)

• Tracking test

• Resistance to heat

• Measuring gauges such as Vernier caliper, Micrometers, Dial gauges

• NON contact IR based digital thermometer

• Harmonic anlyser and THD meter

• Digital Weighting machine

• Power analyser

• Surge Tester

• Temperature simulation facility to test various temperature parameters

• Ingress protection test facility for dust and water jet

• Transportation drop test

• Vibration test

• Compression test

• Humidity test

• Electronically controlled Gonio Photometer

• Thermal Endurance Tester

(B) SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM (INTEGRAL FEEDER

FILLAR WITH DIMMING & MONITORING FACILITY FOR LED STREET LIGHTS)

This section covers the design, construction and testing of Lighting Control System

(LCS) with programmable timer unit, contactors, relays, internal wiring with remote

operation and housing. All components of the lighting control system shall be housed

in the existing / additional electrical enclosure.

The Lighting Automation System shall feature a web-based solution for remote

management of lighting.


167

The system shall control and monitor lighting distribution boards remotely via wireless

communications such as GPRS as one of the primary communications network to the

server.

The system shall be modular and easily scalable to include platforms, yards, streets

and over bridges.

The centralized solution shall provide on/off control for burn hour optimization,

simplified maintenance and a remotely operated system.

Programming shall be enabled remotely and can be changed at any time. The ON /

OFF times shall be optimized for the different daylight hours every day for energy

optimization. That is, it would be optimized to follow the sunrise and sunset times

every day.

Electrical cabinet monitoring configurations shall be enabled remotely and can be changed at anytime.

Power supply voltage input to electrical cabinets shall be available On-Demand.

All alarm/fault detection events shall be logged and available for report-out printing

for analysis.

Standards and Approvals:

Communication modules used shall be FCC/CE certified.

System Specifications:

Outdoor Lighting Control CPU:

The CPU module shall be equipped with a 32 Bit microcontroller. The CPU modules

shall have internal memory capable of storing data of minimum of 4GB.

The CPU shall monitor and control all other modules in the LCS. Direct

communication between the modules shall takes place by means of an industrially

proven RS-485 technology. The same interface shall also be used for power supply

between the modules.


168

The CPU module shall serve as a WAN communications and data concentrator

module. It shall be capable of two-way communication with the central server takes

place via.

• GPRS

• SMS/WIFI

• Ethernet

The module shall have the ability to automatically switch between different available

communications carriers in order to provide stable arid reliable communication.

It shall be upgradable for used with WIFI and WIMAX in future using the USB or the

Ethernet port on the module.

It shall support remote Software and configurations updates from the server enabling

it to autonomously execute tasks. It shall monitor Voltage values on all three phases of

main supply.

Battery shall be supplied with backup power via the A-Bus in the event of power

failure enabling the CPU module to store data and send a main power failure alarm

to the central server before it shuts down safely.

It shall be light weight compact and DIN rail mountable, supporting Tri band

GSM900 / EGSM900, GSM1800,1900 MHz. Compliant to GSM Phase 2/2+.

It shall have a local Real time clock synchronized with remote time server, to enable

functionality even in case of communication network failure.

Guard for Overvoltage Protection:

This module shall provide Overvoltage protection specifically for the CPU, capable of

withstanding surge pulses up to ± 6 kV and burst pulses up to + 4 kV. The module

shall consist of four independent protected mains rated channels which each have a

built-in thermal protection, Surge protection level ± 6 kV according to EN61000-4-5,


169

Burst protection level ± 4 kV according to EN61000-4-4, Three mains rated phase

(line) inputs: LI, L2 and L3 and shall be DIN Rail Mounted.

Switching Point Control Panel Features –

a. Input to the Switching Point shall be 3 phase grid power input and with 3 phase

output for load.

b. Switching point shall able to measure Voltage, Current, Power Factor, Active

Power, Apparent Power, Metering Cumulative Active Energy, Metering

Cumulative Apparent Energy

c. Configuration – Switching Point Controller shall be able to

d. Communication –

i. GPRS communication between Switching Point Controller and

Server/Cloud

ii. Zigbee RF communication between Switching Point Controller and Street

Lights

e. Shall able to calculate LED Luminaires Glowing Hours

f. Able to calculate number of hours mains supply not available

g. Alerts –

i. Phase wise over current/Short circuit

ii. Phase wise over voltage

iii. Group failure of lights

iv. Individual Light failure

v. No output supply

h. E-meter – 3 phase 10-60A Class 1 accuracy meter with ISI/IS-13779

i. Battery Backup – Switching point controller supports battery backup up

to 48 hours

j. Switching point controller Unit shall analog measurement capability 1 x Analog

voltage, 1 x Current input measurement channels

k. Switching point controller VA rating – 20kVA for 10kVA load.

l. Enclosure –Metallic IP65 level of protection.


170

DIN Rail Battery:

The Battery module shall supply other modules with emergency power in the event of

power failure. This Battery module shall be installed together with CPU module, and

shall be recharged by the CPU.

If the main power fails, Battery shall instantaneously take over the power supply,

enabling the CPU module to store data and send a main power failure alarm to the

central server via GPRS/SMS before it shuts down safely.

Annual Recurring Charges:

Server hosting charges and Monthly usage charges of GSM shall be recurring costs. 1

year subscription for server hosting charges is inclusive in the offer. GSM SIM &

Charges shall be inclusive in the offer.

Additional System Requirements:

• The system shall generate power failure alarm or Individual Phase failure

alarm

• The system should able detect the panel door open condition and should notify

the user

• The system shall support to integrate both analog and digital type of Photocell

• The system shall allow configuring priority levels for commands (Eg. Fixed

programs, Manuel switching, twilight switching)

• The system shall provide API for integrating with third party applications like

SCADA or ERP applications for basic monitoring and control.

• The system shall be modular to support dimming with configurable scenes with

varying dimming levels.

• The system shall provide facility for inventor/ management for luminaires

Web application Requirements –

a. Control and Monitoring –

i. Allows user to communicate with individual and networked switching

points.

ii. Allows user to communicate with individual and group street lights

under particular switching point


171

b. Intensity Control/Dimming –The Intensity level (10%-100%) of street Lights shall

be controlled instantly/ automatically by adjusting/ pre-programmed intensity

level.

c. The Street Light Status such as ON hours, voltage, current, power, Energy

consumed, Intensity and operating Mode (Auto/Manual) shall be monitored

d. Remote configuration – It is possible to configure switching points through we

application. Remote configuration includes new ON/OFF timings, RTC time,

Real time data of each switching point, Energy meter parameters

e. Fault Alarms/Alerts – Switching point failures, Network Down failures, Group

Luminaires failure, excess voltage/current drawn, no mains power, Luminaires

failure and contactor failure.

f. Google Map – Allows user to trace switching points through google maps.

g. Reports – Allows user to generate various reports like energy consumed, failure

reports, uptime % etc

Server/Cloud Requirement –

a. The server/Cloud platform shall be of dedicated Windows server (IIS) with

minimum of 16GB RAM with unlimited bandwidth.

b. Following software shall be installed in server

i. ASP.NET4

ii. MySQL Server

iii. MySQL Workbench

c. The server/Cloud platform should support unlimited storage

d. Server/Cloud platform provider shall have capable to perform auto backup

and restore facilities.

e. Server/Cloud platform provider shall have regular maintenance of the server

and immediately address in case of server down.

f. Server/Cloud platform shall have minimum uptime of 99%

g. Server/Cloud should able to handle minimum of 1000 concurrent connections.


172

Network connectivity

The charges for same are inclusive in the offer for the period including one

year defect liability period. GPS connection to be taken in the name of CIDCO.

Reporting

• It shall be possible to create reports, both as html pages or as Excel files.

• It shall be possible generate an alarm report, filtered on alarm severity, alarm

type, alarm state, alarm period, no. of parent nodes.

• It shall be possible to generate a report on the meter readings.

• It shall be possible to generate a burn time report.

• It shall be possible to create an action report, based on modules, light

commands, report, alarm, photocell or light status.

• It shall be possible to create a lamp surveillance report for critical lamp failure,

preventive lamp replacement or failures before burning hours.

• It shall be possible to generate reports from Historical data available in

Lighting control system server for following:

o Switching operations

o Alarms/ Warning generated

o Run Time of Circuits

Programming

• It shall be possible to create programs based on a fixed time table.

• In the fixed time table program, it shall be possible to define ON and OFF

commands.

• It shall be possible to activate the fixed time table on a daily, weekly or monthly

basis

• It shall be possible to activate the fixed time table based on a time period; from

day/month to day/month.

• It shall be possible to create programs based on a twilight table,

• It shall be possible to generate a twilight table based on a geographic location.


173

• It shall be possible to combine a twilight table with a primary and secondary

photocell.

• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a Twilight table

sunrise offset

• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a Twilight table

sunset offset

• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to include ON and OFF

commands at fixed times between sunset and sunrise.

• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a photocell event

delay for the primary and for the secondary photocell.

Software upgrade

It shall be possible to upgrade the software locally on the CPU using a USB stick.

It shall be possible to upgrade the software remotely through the webpage

application.

Customers, permission groups and users

• It shall be possible to define "Customers" to limit access for users within these

"Customers" to only a part of the node tree.

• It shall be possible to define permission groups to define different levels of user

access.

• It shall be possible to design user accounts within customers, and assign a

permission group and a password to each user.

• It shall be possible to subscribe users to alarms via SMS or email.

• It shall be possible for a user to control ON, OFF, DIM1 and DIM 2 via SMS.

Control Room Application

• The streetlight automation system shall feature a map application that gives an

overview of all boxes on top of a street map or a satellite image.

• It shall be possible to visualize the light status of the boxes or the alarm status

of the boxes.


174

• It shall be possible to see the geo-location data of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the serial number of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the node of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the name of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the communication status of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the alarm status of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the phone number of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to see the communication status of the carriers of a selected

box.

• It shall be possible to see the light status of a selected box.

• It shall be possible to upload and view .jpg pictures of the box.

• It shall be possible to set the Configurable communication class with Control

station / server- Ethernet, GPRS or SMS.

Warranty : - Warranty integral feeder pillar 1 years from the date of

commissioning of panel.

C) INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF STREET

LIGHTINHG INSTALLATION

The specifications covers the requirement of installation, testing and

commissioning of electrical equipment related with street lighting installation.

1.0 STANDARDS:

The electrical equipment installation work shall comply with the latest

applicable standards, regulations, rules, safety codes.

2.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

The installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical equipment shall be

carried out in accordance with general technical requirement furnished below.


175

3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

3.1 GENERAL SCOPE :

3.1.1 The contractor shall furnish all tools, welding equipment, testing

equipment, kits etc. required for installation, testing and commissioning

of the equipment.

3.1.2 The contractor shall co-operate with other contractors at site so as not to

obstruct activities of others.

3.1.3 The work shall be carries out strictly as per the instructions and layout

drawings of the owners, their consultants and the equipment

manufacture.

3.1.4 The contractor shall carryout touch-up painting on the equipment if

required. The paint shall be supplied by the contractor.

3.1.5 The contractor shall ensure workmanship of good quality, employeed

shall also be skilled careful and experienced.

3.2 INSTALLATION SCOPE :

3.2.1 The contractor shall install, test and commission all the equipment either

furnished of supplied by him. All material necessary for completion of

the work including hardware, consumable shall be provided by the

contractor.

3.2.2 The equipment shall be installed in a neat workman like manner so that

it is leveled, plumbs & properly aligned and oriented. No equipment

shall be permanently bolted down to the foundation or structure unless

the alignment has been checked and accepted

3.2.3 Care shall be taken in handling the equipment to avoid any distortion to

the supporting structure or damage to the delicate instruments &

electrical parts.

3.2.4 The contractor shall use crane for lifting & placing the outdoor

equipment on structure. No part of existing structure shall be used to lift

any equipment without prior permission of the owners.


176

3.2.5 Foundation of poles shall be constructed. However minor modifications

to the foundations wherever found necessary for proper installation shall

be carried out by the erection contractor. The foundation bolts pockets

shall be cleaned before placing the bolts & the equipment on the

foundation concerning of bolts shall also he included in the scope of this

contract.

3.2.6 Before commissioning of street lighting following points to be checked &

ensured for safe & successful commissioning.

1. Check any physical damage, tightness of all nuts, clamps &

terminals.

2. All the fitting, earthing arrangements are properly connected.

3. Lux level illumination check.

4. Voltage drop checking.

5. Current to be measured at the incoming in the junction box.

6. The earthing measurement at each pole.

7. Cable are property connected & crimped.

8. Tightness of connections.

D) EARTHING:

The intent of these specifications is to give general guidelines for the

equipments/materials proposed to be used and best efforts are made to

cover all CIDCO/MSEDCL requirements and IE specifications. However,

if any changes, modifications or additions are to be done as indicated

by CIDCO/MSEDCL, the same shall be done without any extra cost or

financial implication.

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers supply of necessary materials and erection at

site, of complete earthing system including earth pits at the locations

indicated, earth conductors from earth pit to the respective equipments,

switchgears, pillars, etc. and making connections, testing at site,

commissioning and handing over.


177

2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:

The entire work of earthing system, shall conform to IS 3043, Indian

Electricity Act and Rules and Relevant CIDCO/MSEDCL regulations.

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

3.1 The earthing shall generally be carried out in accordance with the

requirements of Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended from time to

time and relevant regulations of MSEDCL. The following IE Rules are

particularly applicable I.E. Rule Nos. 32, 51, 61, 62, 67, 69, 88 (2) and

90.

3.2 All earth connections shall be carefully made, visible for inspection, and

testing of individual earth electrode shall be possible.

3.3 All materials, fittings, etc. used in earthing shall conform to IS

specifications and in the absence of which the approval of competent

authority shall be obtained.

3.4 The earthing electrode shall be at a minimum distance of 2 meters away

from the outer face of the building wall. A minimum clearance of twice

the depth of the electrode shall be maintained between two earthing

stations. Wherever adequate distances cannot be maintained due to site

constraints the decision of the Engineer-in-charges will be final and

binding.

3.5 A brick masonry chamber to facilitate easy identification and for

carrying out periodical tests and inspection shall be constructed on top

of the earth pit.

3.6 All metal conduits, trucking, cable sheaths, HT and MV switchgears,

transformers, distribution boards, meters, light fixtures, fans, and all

other metal parts forming part of the work shall be bonded together and

connected to earthing network as specified.

3.7 Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be

capable of retaining low resistance even after passage of fault currents.


178

3.8 Joints shall be soldered, tinned and double riveted. All the joints shall be

‘mechanically, electrically continuous and effective. Joints shall be

protected against corrosion.

4.0 EARTH ELECTRODES:

4.1 The materials of earth electrode and earth conductors shall be

galvanized iron unless specified otherwise in Schedule ‘A’, specifications

or drawings.

4.2 The earth electrodes shall be free from paint, enamel, grease, etc.

4.3 The earth electrodes shall be embedded as far as practicable in a moist

soil and below permanent moist level.

4.4 The earth electrode shall not be installed in the proximity of a metal

fence.

5.0 TYPES OF EARTH ELECTRODES:

5.1 The earth electrodes shall be either a pipe electrode or plate electrode,

the details of which are as given in the following sections of

specifications, drawings and schedule ‘A’. Generally plate electrodes

shall be used for substations and large medium voltage network and

pipe electrodes for small medium voltage network and installations.

6.0 PLATE ELECTRODE:

6.1 The plate electrode shall consist of either copper plate of size 60 cm x

60 cm x 3.15 mm or G.I. plate of size 60 cm x 6.3 mm and as specified

in the bill of quantities or drawings.

6.2 The electrode shall be buried vertically in a specially prepared earth pit

which shall be dug upto 2.5 M depth from the ground level. The earth

plate shall be placed in the earth pit with its faces vertical and

embedded in the alternate layers of coal and salt for a minimum

thickness of 15 cms.

6.3 The earth conductor shall be same material as of the earth electrode.

For copper earth electrode a copper strip shall be provided as conductor

and for GI earth electrode a GI strip shall be used as earth conductor.

The size and materials of the earth conductor shall be as specified


179

separately to the earth electrode (plate) with two nos. of nut bolts, check

nuts and washers (all of G.I.) and shall be brought top in the masonry

chamber at the ground level.

6.4 The earth conductor shall be extended via the earth test link provided in

the masonry chamber. The test link shall be connected to earth

conductor from the earth plate and earth conductor going to

equipments with two nos. of nut bolts, check nut and washer (all of GI)

to make secured connections. This link can be removed in the chamber

for testing the earthing.

6.5 A 20 mm dia. G.I. pipe shall be provided from the masonry chamber to

the top of the earth plate for watering purpose. The G.I. pipe shall be

provided with a funnel at the top with wire mesh inside.

6.6 A masonry chamber with a cast iron cover hinged to the cast iron frame

embedded in the top portion of the masonry shall be constructed on top

of the GI pipe to house the funnel and the earth connection. The

approximate size of the chamber shall be 400 mm x 400 mm and 300

mm deep.

6.7 The earth conductor from electrode shall be taken out of the masonry

chamber through a protecting pipe embedded in the masonry.

6.8 The top of the masonry chamber shall be 50 mm above the finished

ground level.

7.0 EARTH CONNECTION:

7.1 All metal clad switches and other equipment carrying single phase

current shall be connected to earth by a single connection. All metal

clad switches carrying three phase medium voltage and high voltage

shall be connected with earth by two separate and distinct connections.

7.2 The earthing conductors inside the building, whenever exposed shall be

properly protects from mechanical injury by running the same to G.I. of

adequate size. Earthing conductors outside the building shall be laid

600 mm below the finished ground level.

7.3 The over lapping of strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75

mm. The joints shall be riveted in an approved manner. Lugs of


180

adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of wire

above 6 sq.mm. size and bare copper wire above 2.5 mm dia. Lugs

shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal

body is cleaned of paint and other city substance and properly tinned.

8.0 CONNECTION OF EARTHING CONDUCTOR:

The earthing conductors are broadly divided in the following categories.

a. Main earthing conductor shall be taken from the earth electrode to the

earth bus/connection at the main switch board.

b. Sub-main earthing conductor shall run from the main switch board to

the sub-distribution boards.

9.0 PROHIBITED CONDUCTORS:

Use of following as earth conductor is not recommended and strictly

prohibited for earthing an installation or even effecting as a link in an

earthing system. Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes or pipes conveying

gas, water or inflammable liquid, structural steel steel work, metallic

enclosures or armour or cables and conductors, metallic conduits and

lightening protection system conductors are all prohibited to be used as

earth conductor.

10.0 TESTING:

On completion of the entire installation, the earthing network shall be

tested for their resistance to earth in accordance with IS:3043. All

meters, instruments and labour required for the test Shalala be provided

by the contractor. The test results shall be submitted in triplicate to the

owners/MSEDCL for approval. The following tests shall be conducted.

1. Earth resistance of electrodes.

2. Impendence of earth continuity conductors.

3. Effectiveness of earthing.


181

11.0 DOCUMENTS, CERTIFICATIONS, DRAWING:

The intent of this specification is to give guideline to contractor to furnish

all relevant papers and list of spares for continuous performance of

installation. Nothing shall absolve contractor for not furnishing

documents or paper that have not been specially stated herein.

11.1 DOCUMENTS:

All relevant documents for maintenance like manuals, procedures, etc.

of all electrical equipments erected by contractor shall be furnished in

two sets.

11.2 CERTIFICATES:

The contractor shall also submit certificate issued by the original

manufacture towards guarantee of materials supplied. As-built drawing

of the complete installation. Including location of feeder pillar,

distribution control panel, poles, main switches, cable routing,

connection, diagram circuit, conductor size length test results, reading,

etc.

11.3 TESTING & COMMISSIONING:

11.3.1 TESTING OF EQUPMENTS:

All equipments before installation on site shall be tested and such results

need to be submitted to the CIDCO as well as MSEDCL. Nothing shall

absolve the contractor from performing any test that the contractor has

been called up by the CIDCO.

11.3.2 MANAUFACTURERS TESTS:

The contractors shall specifically Performa all test such as routine test,

type test on all equipments in the presence of CIDCO & MSEDCL

officials, All cost incidental to such test shall be deemed to have been

included in the specific item of that equipment and no extra pipe.


182

11.3.3 PRECOMMISSIONING TESTS:

All test required or called by the local electricity supply authority,

Government officials and as laid in relevant Indian Standard

Specifications, Rules Regulations & Acts shall be strictly completed.

11.3.4 COMMISSIONING:

The contractor shall obtain the written permission or sanction for

commissioning of the electrical equipment if required from I.E. & L.

Department of Government of Maharashtra. All cost, visit fees, etc.

incidental for abstaining the sanction to be to the contractors account.

11.3.5 The contractor should take special note that pole/structure painting shall

be of good quality and best workmanship. The painting work shall be

guaranteed for minimum one year from the date of handing over on the

installation.

A. High Bay Luminaire

• LED Highbay light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified elsewhere in

tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum housing with

supplier word mark / name embossing on the die cast housing, (Stickering

/ screen printing is not acceptable) to allow traceability till the end of life.

• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum aesthetically designed

with Black / Silver Grey color corrosion resistant polyester powder coating

with a toughened glass diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages

with a suitable mounting arrangement. Shall consist of separate optical and

control gear compartment. Driver should be easily replaceable in the field

condition. Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external

heat-sink made from high pressure die cast aluminium.

• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output at

constant operating voltage of 230 V supplied voltages using the same

driver, delivering minimum 125 lumens/watt (+-5%) at system level. The


183

total lumen output should be at least equal to 14500/10000 lumens with

wattages as less as possible.

• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be> 0.9 and with THD<20%

for all wattages.

• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized area


application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be

provided on each LEDs on a molded lens plate fixed mechanically (Glue

fixing of individual lens on led is not allowed).



confirm to minimum IP 65.

• The Color Rendering Index of typical 70 with color temperature 5700K with

variation limits of ±355K) per ANSI C78.377A CCT.

• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, LUMILEDS only.

• Driver type test report from internal or external NABL accredited lab

complying with international standards with reference to various general

and safety requirements as per IEC/ BIS as follows

a. performance test

b. EMI test

c. Emission and (b)

d. Immunity (surge burst, dips, Interrupts, ESD)

e. Harmonics

f. Surge protection

g. The efficiency of the driver should be more than 85%.

• LED streetlight should be tested as per IEC (International Electronic

commission) / or relevant equivalent Indian standards and following test

reports should be submitted at the time of approval : Thermal test, Ingress

protection test, Electrical & Insulation resistance test, Endurance test,


184

humidity test, Resistance to heat, fire and tracking, drop & vibration. Test

report should be submitted from NABL approved test laboratory.

• The fitting should work satisfactorily in the temperature range of minus (-) 5

deg C to 50 deg C and humidity range of 10% to 90% RH.

• The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following

test reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress

Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test,

Humidity Test. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test1 as per IEC

60068-2-31/IS9000 Part 7 / Sec 3 standards. The luminaire should be

tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANSI/IEC 68-2-6 standards. Should comply

with IESNA LM-79 (Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products). The Photometric distribution

& electricals parameters should be tested at all dimming wattages. The LED'

used should comply to LM-80 standards (IESNA: Approved Method for


depreciation time to L70 based on LM-80 data)

• Random samples from supplied lot should be tested at NABL accredited

laboratory and report submitted for acceptance. as requested by the

department.

• LED street light fitting should be supplied with separate tracking serial

number barcoded / QR coded for LED board / Driver / Housing which

should be provided in the fitting. General label as per IS should mention at

least: Name of Manufacturer, model name and number, system lumen

pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of fitting, Date of Manufacture.

• The bidder should submit the lighting design as per the tender document in

Dialux software. Maintenance factor of 0.85 should be used for all lighting

design purposes.

B. LED Street light luminaire

• LED Highbay light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified elsewhere in

tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum housing with


185

supplier word mark / name embossing on the die cast housing,{Stickering /

screen printing is not acceptable) to allow traceability till the end of life.

• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum aesthetically designed

with Black / Silver Grey color corrosion resistant polyester powder coating

with a toughened glass diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages

with a suitable mounting arrangement. Shall consist of separate optical and

control gear compartment. Driver should be easily replaceable in the field

condition.Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external

heat-sink made from high pressure die cast aluminium.

• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output at

constant operating voltage of 230 V supplied voltages using the same

driver, delivering minimum 105 lumens/watt (+-5%) at system level. The

lumen efficacy of the LED at the chip level should be more than 130 Lm/W

@700mA drive current @ Tj = 85Deg C.

• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be> 0.9 and with THD<20%

for all wattages.

• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized area


application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be

provided on each LEDs on a molded lens plate fixed mechanically {Glue

fixing of individual lens on led is not allowed).



confirm to minimum IP 66.

• The Color Rendering Index of typical 70 with color temperature 5700K with

variation limits of ±355K) per ANSI C78.377A CCT.

• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, and LUMILEDS only.

• Driver should have an internal surge protection for 4 KV and external surge

protection of 10 KV for efficient surge protection.


186

• Driver type test report from internal or external NABL accredited lab

complying with international standards with reference to various general

and safety requirements as per IEC/ BiS as follows

h. performance test

i. EMI test

j. Emission and (b)

k. Immunity (surge burst, dips, Interrupts, ESQ)

I. Harmonics

m. Surge protection

n. The efficiency of the driver should be more than 85%.

• LED streetlight should be tested as per IEC (International Electronic

commission) / or relevant equivalent Indian standards and following test

reports should be submitted at the time of approval : Thermal test, ingress

protection test, Electrical & Insulation resistance test, Endurance test,

humidity test, Resistance to heat, fire and tracking, drop & vibration. Test

report should be submitted from NABL approved test laboratory.

• The fitting should work satisfactorily in the temperature range of minus (-) 5

deg C to 50 deg C and humidity range of 10% to 90% RH.

• The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following

test reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress

Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test,

Humidity Test. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test' as per IEC

60068-2-31/IS9000 Part 7 / Sec 3 standards. The luminaire should be

tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANSI/IEC 68-2-6 standards. Should comply

with IESNA LM-79 (Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products). The Photometric distribution

& electricals parameters should be tested at all dimming wattages. The LED'

used should comply to LM-80 standards (IESNA: Approved Method for


depreciation time to L7Q based on LM-80 data)


187

• Random samples from supplied lot should be tested at NABL accredited

laboratory and report submitted for acceptance. as requested by the

department.

• LED street light fitting should be supplied with separate tracking serial

number barcoded / QR coded for LED board / Driver / Housing which

should be provided in the fitting. General label as per IS should mention at

least: Name of Manufacturer, model name and number, system lumen

pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of fitting, Date of Manufacture

• • The bidder should submit the lighting design as per the tender

document in Dialux software. Maintenance factor of 0.85 should be used

for all lighting design purposes.

Surface Mounted Down lighter

• Integral LED downlighter with Die cast aluminium housing and

polycarbonate diffuser firmly fixed to the frame. The heat sink should be

provided for efficient heat distribution. System lumen output for the same

should be more than 100 lumens/W and color temp of 6500 K.

• The power factor should be more than 0.9, CRI > 70, CCT = 6500 K. THD

< 10% For Constant current driver. Wattage not to exceed 15 W


188

26.0 PVC/XLPE Cables (CB)

(A) Armoured Cables (HT & LT)

1. General

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall

carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark

is not available in market, it shall be as included in approved list.

Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by

BIS. If there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS,

such work shall be carried out as per the approved method of

construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.

Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above

shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.

2. Cables: (Armoured)

The following list records those Indian Standards in force,

which are acceptable as good practice, and accepted

standards.

SP 30: 1984 : National Electrical Code

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : : National Building Code

IS 1255: 1983

: Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of armored cables up to 33 kv

IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 :

: Recommended current ratings of PVC cables-

PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electrical cables Part1 for working voltages up to and including1100 Volts.

IS 1554: Part 1, 1988 :

: PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables: Part 1 for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to 11 kV

IS 10810. Part 63; 1993 : : Method for test of cables Part 63 Smoke density of electric cables under fire condition.


189

3. Scope: (Armoured cables)

Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT)

Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified

conducting material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3

including requiied material, hardware’s for erection and erecting on

wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same through pole, pipe, laying

in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of

construction including glands, lugs, etc.

4. Material:

Cables:

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3

and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No,

manufacturer’s name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every

metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at each

mark.

Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per

Table No 7/1.

Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass

metal with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers

and nuts.

Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum/ copper / bimetallic of

required type, with required size of hole and smooth finished both

from inside and outside.

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from Gl sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of i cable aeither galvanized or painted with superior

quality enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical

strength, semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable holes

for fixing.

G I Strip: 22 q x 25 mm width G I Strip.


190

Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having

the size of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size

of cable), rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the

cable.

Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position Gl strip with

identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie

should be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.

Hardware: Sheet Metal screws of lequired sizes, plugs / wooden gutties,

etc.

4. Method of Construction:

General:

a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be

terminated with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly

crimped, as directed by Site engineer.

b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as

mentioned in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with

adequate distance between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize

de-iating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name /

mark at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare earth

wire of appropriate size -»s per Table no. 7/1 shall run along with the

cable. Earth wire running with the cable shall be terminated at the earth

terminal nearest io cable termination.

5.1 Erection of Cable on Surface:

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect

level and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far

as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare Gl earth wire of

required gauge as per Table'No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire

shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to

wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties',

etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450


191

mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for

stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable

shall be made good by filling and finishing with plastering the same.

5.2 Erection of Cable on Trusses:

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be

firmly clamped by wrapping Gl strip of 22 q. 2-5 mm width of requited

length fixed to truss with nuts and bolts.

5.3 Erection of Cable on Pole:

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be

firmly clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with

25 x 3 mm or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole

with nuts and bolts.

5.4 Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole:

While laying Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, utmost care shall be

taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open

end. Cable shall be biought out from trench vertically straight (minimum

1.0 metre above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that

depth of cable shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4.

Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point at

adequate depth.

5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench I duct:

Erection of cable/s In constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide

lines of IS 1255.

5.6 Erection of cable/s on trays:

Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on Gl trays. At bending point

care shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage

insulation of cable.


192

5.7 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the

basis of running metre per run of cable.

6. Dismantling

Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled

carefully without damaging complete with all its accessories, making

coil and stored as directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be

made clear by removing of unwanted material, cement mortar, etc.

When cable is dismantled from trench refill back the trench and making

the surface proper.

7. Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the

basis of running metre per run of cable.

Table No 7/1

Size of Bare Gl Earth wire to be used with LT Cables upto 1.1 kV

S.No. Size of cable Size of bare Gl Earth wire to be used with cable

1 2.5 Sqmm to 50 Sqmm of all cores. 12 SWG

2 70 Sqmm to 95 Sqmm of all cores. 10 SWG 3 120 Sqmm and above of all cores. (B) SWG

(B) PVC/XLPE Cables (CB)

Armoured Cables (HT & LT)

1. General

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI

mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available

in market, it shall be as

included in approved list.

Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If

there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such work


193

shall be carried out as per the approved method of construction specified in

chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.

Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above

shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.


The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are

acceptable as good practice, and accepted standards. *

SP 30: 1984 National Electrical Code

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 National Building Code

IS 1255: 1983 Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of

armored cables up to 33 kV.

IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 Recommended current ratings of PVC cables.

IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1

for working voltages up to and including 1100

Volts.

IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1

for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to

11 kV.

IS 10810. Part 63; 1993 : Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke density of

electric cables under fire condition.


Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT)

Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified

conducting material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3 including

required material, hardware's for erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC

slab or drawing the same through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit,

trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of construction including glands,

lugs, etc.


194

4. Material:

Cables:

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3 and of

required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No, manufacturer's

name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every metre and having the

total count of progressive length in meter at each mark.

Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per Table No

7/1.

Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass metal

with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers and nuts.

Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum/ copper / bimetallic of required

type, with required size of hole and smooth finished both from inside and

outside.

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from Gl sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality

enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular

shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing.

GI Strip: 22 q x 25 mm width G I Strip.

Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size

of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size of cable),

rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the cable.

Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position Gl strip with

identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie should

be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.

Hardware: Sheet Metal (L'.A) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden gutties,

etc.


General:

a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated with

appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed by Site

engineer.


195

b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as mentioned

in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with adequate distance

between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize de-iating. Cables shall

be tagged/ferruled with identification name / mark at the point from where

distribution starts and at ends. Dare earth wire of appropriate size ^s per

Table no. 7/1 shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running with the

cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable termination.


Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level

and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible

for good aesthetics look, continuous bare Gl earth wire of required gauge as

per Table No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire shall be fixed by saddles

firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm

SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports I

saddles shall be maximum 450 mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever

required (Especially for stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc

for laying the cable shall be made good by filling and finishing with

plastering the same. 1


Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be firmly

clamped by wrapping Gl strip of 22 q. 25 mm width of requited length fixed to

truss with nuts and bolts.


Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be firmly

clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with 25 x 3 mm

or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole with nuts and bolts.


While laying Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, utmost care shall be taken

to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open end. Cable

shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum 1.0 metre

above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that depth of cable


196

shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4. Suitable size of cable loops

shall be provided near termination point at adequate depth.

5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct:

Erection of cable/s '.n constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide lines of

IS 1255.


Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on Gl trays. At bending point care

shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of

cable.

5.7 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of

running metre per run of cable.

6. Dismantling

Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled carefully

without damaging complete with all its accessories, making coil and stored as

directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be made clear by

removing of unwanted material, cement mortar, etc. When cable is

dismantled from trench refill back the trench and making the surface proper.

7. Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of

running metre per run of cable.

Table No 7/1

Size of Bare Gl Earth wire to be used with LT Cables upto 1.1 Kv

S.No. Size of cable Size of bare Gl Earth wire to be

used with cable

1 2.5 Sqmm to 50 Sqmm of all cores. 12 SWG

2 70 Sqmm to 95 Sqmm of all cores. 10 SWG 3 120 Sqmm and above of all cores. 8 SWG


197

Table No 7/2

Minimum bending Radius for Cable

S.No. Voltage level of cables Single core Multi core

Unarmoured Multi core

Armoured 1 Up to 11 kV 20 D 15 D 12 D 2 Up to 22 kV 25 D 20 D 15 D 3 .Up to 33 kV 30 D 25 D 20 D

Note: D diameter of cable. Wherever possible, 25 percent larger radii than the specified above should be used.

Table No 7/3

Current Rating (In Ground) for PVC/XLPE Insulated 1.1 kV Grada Cables

Nominal area of conductor

Aluminum Conductor Copper Conductor

(Rating in A) Single Core Multi Core Single Core Multi Core

Sqmm PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE

10 51 55 46 50 65 71 60 65 16 66 74 60 68 85 95 77 87 25 86 98 76 90 110 125 99 115 35 100 118 92 108 130 150 120 138 50 120 137 110 126 153 175 145 161 70 140 172 135 158 190 220 175 202 95 175 ;?>14 165 187 220 260 210 239 120 195 234 185 215 250 301 240 276 150 220 ^62 210 240 280 336 270 308 185 240 298 235 273 305 381 300 350 240 270 344 275 316 345 441 345 405 300 295 387 305 355 375 496 385 455 400 325 458 335 420 400 586 425 538 500 345 495 - - 425 635 - - 630 390 555 - 470 710 - -

800 440 625 - - - - - - 1000 490 685 - - - - -


198

Rating Factors for Variation in Ambient Air Temperature Air Temperature (°C) 40 45 50 Rating Factor (XLPE) 1.00 0.94 0.88 Rating Factor (PVC) 1.00 0.90 0.81

Table No 7/4

Minimum laying Depth of cables (IS:1255)

S.No. Voltage level of cables Minimum depth from top of the

cable

1 Up to 1.1 kV 750 mm 2 3.3 kV to 11 kV 900 mm 3 22 kV to 33 kV 1050 mm 4 At road crossing 1000 mm 5 At railway crossing (from Bottom of

sleepers to Top of pipe) 1000 mm

Notes below Table No 7/4:

1. PVC Insulated electrical cable for voltage grade up to ,1.1 kV is based on 8 volts drop.

2. The distances are given in meters and after rounding.

3. The distances are given in meters and after rounding.

For Temperature Correction please see as detailed below:

Ground temp. 20 degree C 25 degree C 30 degree C 35 degree C

Rating factors: 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80

Table No 7/5

Distance up to which different sizes of UG Aluminum Conductor Cables 1.1 kV grade, can bo

used for different current ratings of S Volts drop. (PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed, 3 cores or 4

cores) Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C

S.

No

Current Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmrr.

Amp 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 1S0 185 240 300

1 5 165 26

0

415 725 895 1300 1925 2360 3065 3555 4300 5770 6460

2 10 80 13

0

205 360 450 650 960 1180 1530 1775 2150 2885 3230


199

Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C

S.

No

Current Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmrr.

Amp 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 1S0 185 240 300

vJ IS 55 85 140 240 300 430 640 785 1020 1185 1430 1920 2155

4 20 40 65 100 180 225 325 480 590 765 890 1075 1440 1615

5 25 30 50 80 145 180 260 385 470 610 710 860 1150 1290

6 30 25 40 70 120 150 215 320 390 570 590 715 960 1075

7 40 20 30 50 90 110 160 240 295 380 445 535 720 805

8 50 - 25 40 70 90 130 190 235 305 355 i 430 575 645

9 60 - - 35 60 75 110 160 195 255 295 355 480 535

10 70 - 30 50 65 90 135 165 215 255 305 410 460

11 80 - - - 45 55 80 120 145 190 220 265 360 405

12 90 - - - 40 50 70 105 130 170 195 235 320 360

13 100 - - - - 35 45 65 95 115 150 175 215 290 320

14 110 - - - - 40 60 35 105 140 160 195 260 290

15 120 - - - - 35 55 80 95 125 145 180 240 270

16 130 - - - - - 50 75 90 115 135 165 220 250

17 140 - - - - - 45 70 80 110 125 150 205 230

18 150 - - - - - - 65 75 100 115 140 190 215

19 160 - - - - - - 60 70 95 110 130 180 200

20 170 - - - - - 55 70 90 105 125 170 190

21 180 - - - - - - 50 65 85 100 120 160 180

22 190 - - - - - - - 60 80 90 110 150 170

23 200 - - - - - - - 60 75 90 105 145 160

24 225 - - - - - - - - 65 80 95 125 145

25 250 - - - - - - - - - 70 85 115 130

26 275 - - - - - - - - - - 80 105 115

27 300 - - - - - - - - - 70 95 105

(C) Cable Joints & End Termination Kits (LT/HT Cables ) (JT/LT/HT)

1. Scope: Specification No. (CB-JT/LT/HT)

Providing straight through cable jointing kit of approved make and

jointing cable as per the manufacturer’s instructions and duly

marking name of jointer and date.


200

2. Material:

Joint kit : Kit manufactured by reputed manufacturer with PVC

moulds made in two parts, with epoxy compound, earth continuity

lead of appropriate cross section having lugs at both ends, aluminum

ferrules of the size of the cable, cross shaped epoxy spacer, Ms clips

for holding the moulds, adhesive for pasting the moulds.


3.1 Straight through joint Kit: LT/HT Cables

Before providing joint to the cable. The cable ends of the equivalent

length of the joint moulds. Shall be prepared by removing the outer

PVC insulation along with the steel armouring. The ferrule shall then

be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be crimped

wot5h hydraulic/ mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The

crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC insulation tape

and then with the insulation tape used got wrapped HT conductor.

The above method shall be carried out for all the cores strictly

following the colour code. The leads of the both the cables now shall

be placed into the mould by using the epoxy spacer, for having

sufficient gap in- between the leads. The earth continuity lead shall

be clamped to the both ends of the cable. After covering the cable

leads with the PVC moulds, the edges shall be clipped after applying

the adhesives of the inside face of the moulds. The pasting of moulds

shall be rigid and as far as possible leak proof, so that the epoxy

compound shall not spill out. Now the duly stirred epoxy compound

shall be poured and fill till the compound rises through the risers

provided on the moulds. After completing the above procedure, the

joint shall be allowed to dry out for at least 8 to 10 hours (for epoxy

compound, to get hardened) depending upon the size of cable.


201

Before connecting to supply, the dry and hardened joint shall be

tested for its insulation level with 1000V/5000 V Meggar.

The cable should be fixed or laid in such manner that there should

not be pressure on end of moulds or on jointing position of cables.

(Refer drawing No. CB – JT-1)

3.2 Outdoor/Indoor end termination Kit: LT/HT Cables

Before providing end termination kit to the cable, the cables end of

the equivalent length of the moulds, shall be prepared by removing

the outer PVC insulation along with steel armouring. The ferrule shall

then be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be

crimped with hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool.

The crimping shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no

air gap. Then the crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC

insulation tape and then with the insulation tape used for wrapping

HT conductor. The above method shall be carried out for all the

cores strictly following the colour code. The leads of the cable now

shall be placed into the mould by using the epoxy spacer, for having

sufficient gap in – between the leads. The earth continuity lead shall

be clamped to theends of the cable. After covering the cable leads

with the PVC moulds, the edges shall be clipped after applying the

adhesive on the inside face of the moulds. The pasting of moulds

shall be rigid and as far as possible leak proof, so that the epoxy

compound shall not spill out. Now the duly stirred epoxy compound

shall be poured and fill till the compound rises through the risers

provided on the moulds. (Refer drawing No. CB-JT-2)

After completing the above procedure, the joint shall be allowed to

dry out for at least 8 to10 hours (for epoxy compound to get harden)

depending upon the size of cable. Before connecting to supply, the


202

dry and hardened joint shall be tested for its insulation level with

1000V/5000V meggar.

4. Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e.each)

(D) Cable Glands (GL)

Scope:

Specification Nos (CB- GL)

Termination of cable ends with cable glands for preparing and fixing

the cable leads for connection. Cable glands shall be of Flange type.

Material:

Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass

metal with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers

and nuts.

Method of Construction

Before erection of gland, the cable end shall be prepared by

removing the outer PVC insulation up to the point where gland to be

fixed, by assessing the length of leads required.

Bottom portion of gland shall be inserted over the steel armouring,

and then armour strips shall be bent for the length of collar of gland,

remaining length of armoring shall be cut. The cable end shall then

be, inserted through the entry of plate where the cable is to be

terminated. The top portion of gland with washer shall be then

inserted in such a manner that the bent armour strip should be

touching the surface of the entry. The nuts shall be tightened with

spring washers over the projected stud portion. Fixing of gland shall

be at right angle to the gland plate. Tightening shall assure continuity

of earth. Hole to the gland plate shall be punched / knocked out, of

correct diameter with respect to gland size.


Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each).


203

27.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING

WORK LATEST EDITION CODES TO BE USED

1. Life Safety code - NFPA 101

2. Standard for installation of sprinkler system - TAC/NBC

3 Fire Hydrant System - TAC/NBC

4. Fire Pumps - TAC

5. Fire Sprinkler System - TAC/NFPA11

6. Addressable Fire alarm & detection System - TAC/IS:2189/NFPA72

1.0 FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES

1.1 Work under this sub-head consists of furnishing all Labour, Materials,

equipment and accessories necessary and required to completely install

the Fire Fighting equipment etc., specified hereinafter and given in the

Schedule of Quantities.

1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work of Fire

Fighting System shall include the followings:

a) Providing M.S. steel pressure pipe line main for above ground &

underground pipe line & Butterfly valves for above ground pipe

lines, gear operated butterfly valve, check valve, ball valves,

strainers, Fire Hydrants, Excavation for Pipe, RCC Hume pipe,

Laying of pipe, anti-corrosion material, Painting of pipe and

Making Connection to supply system.

b) Black Steel Pipe, Mains Laterals, Branches, Valves, Hangers and

Appurtenances.

c) Hose Reels, Rubberized fabric lined hose pipes, air release

valves, Hose cabinets, Sprinkler heads, water flow switches, level

controller and Landing Valves, alarm check valves, air release


204

valve, structural supports, hanger supports along with Portable

Fire Extinguisher as local norms.

d) Making RCC Pedestal for aboveground pipe lines.

e) Fire Fighting Pump set electrical driven 1no. as working(hydrant

& sprinkler system),1no. as Jockey, & 1No.booster pump set &

1No. Diesel engine driven pump set as standby all accessories

such as day tank, battery set, diesel engine controller etc with

complete set, panels and all connected accessories including

suction & delivery pipes.

f) Testing Commissioning and giving live demonstrations to the

various Inspection Authorities such as consultant, Chief Fire

Officer PMC, client authorized representative and Obtain Final

"No Objection Certificate" (NOC) from local authority i.e. Chief

Fire Officer PMC.

2.1 All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the Specifications

and subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 Pipes and Fittings shall be fixed truly Vertical, Horizontal or in slopes as

required in a neat workman like manner.

2.3 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for

repair and maintenance and shall not cause any obstruction in shaft,

passage etc.

2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceiling by suitable clamps at

intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used

for RCC ceilings/columns.

2.5 Valves and other appurtenance shall be so located that they are easily

accessible for operation, repairs and maintenance.

3.0 PIPES

3.1 All pipes above ground outside/inside the buildings/factory sheds and

vertical shafts shall be M.S. Pipes as follows:


205

3.1.1 Pipes 150 mm dia and below IS: 1239 Heavy Class

3.1.2 Pipe 200 mm dia and above IS 3589 of thickness specified in bill of

quantity.

3.2.1 All underground pipes shall be M.S. Pipes heavy class with soil corrosion

protection.

4.0 PIPE FITTINGS

4.1 Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc.

And all such connecting devices that are needed to complete the piping

work in its totality fittings for 50mm dia and below should be socket

welded/ and for pipes 65mm dia & above should be butt welded.

4.2 Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm and

below.

4.3 When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and inspected in

workshops under supervision of Project Managers whose welding

procedures have been approved by project manager/consultant & same

will be as per Chief Fire Officer M.I.D.C. for sprinkler system and

applicable to hydrant, internal hose reel and sprinkler system. For "T"

connections, pipes shall be drilled and reamed. If Cutting by gas or

electrical welding beyond 65mm dia & above sizes pipe then it will be in

proper round as per respective pipe joint size with grinding & ensuring

any burr will not fallen inside the pipes.

5.0 JOINTING

5.1 Threaded (50 mm dia pipes and below)

Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be threading joints.

5.2 Welded (65 mm dia and above)

Joints between M.S. pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and

fittings having "V" groove and welded with electrical resistance welding

in an approved manner. Buried pipes will be subject to X Ray test from


206

an approved agency as per the TAC norms at the cost of contractor.

(With welded M.S. fittings heavy class with V-Groove). The welding

machine shall be 3 Phase of required current and capacity.

5.3 Flanges.

Flanged joints shall be provided on:

a) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bend tees etc. of 80 mm dia or

larger diameter.

b) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with

other type of pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and

required as good for engineering practice.

d) Flanges shall be as per BS: 10 TABE E with appropriate number of G.I.

nuts and bolts, half threaded of GKW make or equivalent with 3 mm

insertion neoprene gasket complete for above ground pipe lines.

5.4 Unions

Provide Approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm

and below in similar places as specified for flanges shall be provided.

6.0 PIPE PROTECTION

6.1 All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with

one coat of Red Oxide Primer and two or more coats of Synthetic

Enamel Paint of approved shade.

6.2 All black steel pipes below ground shall be provided with protection

against corrosion by application of 100mm wide and 4mm thick layer

of PYPKOTE/ MAKPOLYKOTE over the pipe, as per manufacturer's

specifications.

7.0 PIPE SUPPORTS Above Ground Pipe

7.1 All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling, columns, trusses,

purlins or walls from existing/new inserts by Structural clamps fabricated

from M.S. Structural e.g. Rods, Channels, Angles, rod and Flats as per

details given in drawings and specifications. All clamps shall be painted

with one coat of red lead and two coats of black Enamel paint.


207

7.2 Where inserts are not provided, the Contractor shall provide anchor

fasteners. Anchor fastener shall be fixed to walls and ceilings by drilling

holes with Electrical drill in an approved manner as recommended by

the manufacturer of the fasteners.

Underground Pipe

7.3 Proper rigid surface to be made before laying pipe in excavated

trenches.

8.0 TESTING

8.1 All pipes in the system shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1.5

times of the working pressure or minimum of 15 Kg/Cm2 without drop

in the pressure for at least 2 hours.

8.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required.

9.0 HOLIDAY TEST

On completion of the coating, it shall be tested using high voltage

holiday detectors, to 11 Kv. All holidays found shall be repaired and the

repairs be tested to ensure that adequate repairs have been made.

Holiday testing shall be carried out once the pipes have been lowered in

trenches and should be carried out with the help of detachable rings

only. Testing by brush shall not be acceptable.

10.0 PAINTING

Paint shall be thoroughly stirred before pouring in small containers and

while applying to ensure uniform consistency. The operation for each

coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush given form the top

downwards, another from the bottom upward over the first stroke and

similarly sideways before it dries. No brush marks, hair marks or

clogging of paint puddles shall be left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry

before the next coat is applied. After the work is complete, the brushes

shall be cleaned of paint and linseed oil by rinsing by turpentine. Initial


208

cleaning of the pipes by buffing wheel, to be followed by 2 coats of Red

Oxide primer and followed by 2 Coats of Fire Red enamel paint.

11.0 RCC PEDESTAL SUPPORT

Contractor shall provide suitable RCC pedestal supports of ample

dimensions at all bends, tee connection and other places required and

necessary for overcoming pressure thrusts in pipes. RCC pedestal shall

be of including required plaster as per civil engineering standard.

12. VALVES

12.2 Butterfly valves shall be tested to a minimum of 10 kg / cm2. The valves

shall fulfill the requirements of BS: 5155 or AWWA C 504, API 609 and

MSS-SP-67. The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive

epoxy or nickel coating. The valve seat shall be high grade elastomer or

nitrile rubber. The shaft shall be of EN8 grade carbon steel. Gear

operated above 150mm dia.

12.3 Check valves shall be ductile iron Double Flanged with a rating of

PN1.0 valves shall be swing check type. The body shall confirm to CI

body confirming to IS 5312.

12.4 Brass Ball Valve full port with P.T.F.E. seat screwed female ends suitable

for water including either side fittings with rating of PN1.0.

13.0 EXTERNAL YARD HYDRANTS

13.1 The Contractor shall provide External Fire Hydrant shall comprise "Single

Headed Single Outlet Gun-metal Valve" conforming to type 'A' of IS:

5290-1977. in the Ring or on External Fire Line, as per specifications as

specified in Schedule of Quantities and as shown in drawings. The

spacing of the hydrants and the distance from the building shall be

maintained as per relevant requirements of latest relevant codes, unless

specified herewith.


209

13.2 Each External Fire Hydrant shall be provided with an External Fire Hose

Cabinet of M.S or fiber glass, as specified in Schedule of Quantities of

size specified, as approved by the Architect to equip 2 nos. of 63 mm

dia R.R.L hose and accessories as required. The cabinet shall be

installed near the Hydrant as per details specified in drawings, approved

by the Engineer /consultant.

14.0 INTERNAL HYDRANTS

14.1 The Internal Hydrant outlet shall comprise "Single Headed Single Outlet

Gun metal Landing Valve" conforming to type 'A' of IS: 5290¬1977.

Separate valve on the head shall form part of the landing valve

construction.

14.2 A Gun metal cap with chain is provided on one head of the outlet. The

hydrant will have an instantaneous pattern female coupling for

connecting to Hose Pipe.

14.3 The Landing Valve shall be fitted to a Tee connection on the wet riser at

the landing.

15.0 FIRST-AID HOSE REEL EQUIPMENT

15.1 First aid hose reel equipment shall comprise reel, hose guide fixing

bracket hose tubing ball valve, union and nozzle. This shall conform to

IS: 884 - 1969. The hose tubing shall confirm to IS: 1532-1969.

and ball valve shall be of 19 mm size.

15.3 The hose tubing shall be 25 mm dia and 30m long. The G.M nozzle

suitable/standard size and ball valve shall be of 25 mm size along for

internal fire hose reel system except for landing hydrants.

15.4 The fixing bracket shall be of swinging type. Operating instructions shall

be engraved on the assembly. This heavy duty mild steel and cast iron

brackets shall be conforming to IS:884 - 1969. The first-aid hose reel

shall be connected directly to the M.S. pipe riser taken independently

from ring.


210

16.0 HOSE PIPES, BRANCH PIPES AND NOZZLES

16.1 Hose pipes

16.1.1 Two numbers Hose Pipes shall be rubber lined woven jacketed and

63mm in dia. 15m long. They shall confirm to type A (Reinforced rubber

lined) of IS: 636 - 1979. The hose shall be sufficiently flexible and

capable of being rolled.

16.1.2 Each run of hose shall be complete with necessary coupling at the ends

to match with the landing valve or with another run of hose pipe or with

branch pipe. The couplings shall be of instantaneous spring lock type &

MOC will be Gun Metal. This shall be conforming to IS: 903.

16.2 BRANCH PIPE

16.2.1 Branch pipes

Branch pipe shall be of Gun Metal as given in BOQ 63 mm dia and be

complete with male instantaneous spring lock type coupling for

connection to the hose pipe. The branch pipe shall be externally

threaded to receive the nozzle.

16.3 Nozzle

The nozzle shall be of Gun Metal, as specified in BOQ 20 mm in

(internal) diameter. The screw threads at the inlet connection shall match

with the threading on the branch pipe. The inlet end shall have a

hexagonal head to facilitate screwing of the nozzle on to the branch

pipe with nozzle spanner.

16.3.1 End Couplings, Branch pipe, and Nozzles shall conform to IS: 903 -

1985.

16.3.2 Two R.R.L. hoses of 15m length with couplings shall be provided with

each External (Yard) Hydrant. Two R.R.L. hoses of 15m length, as

specified, with couplings shall be provided with each Internal Hydrant.

One nozzle and one branch pipe with coupling shall be provided with

each Yard Hydrant and Internal Hydrant.


211

17.0 HOSE BOX

17.1 The External/internal hose cabinet shall accommodate the Hose Pipes &

Branch Pipe and shall be fabricated from 2 mm thick or 14 mm gauge

M.S sheet as specified in Bill of Quantities. The overall size shall be

750x600x250 mm (external) & 750x600x250 mm (Internal), or as

specified in the consultants' drawing. This shall have lockable centre

opening glazed doors as per the requirement and as per consultant's

drawing along with support arraignment shown in drawings including

required civil pedestal, pad plates & fasteners etc. complete. Glass

thickness shall be min. 4mm with required rubber beading.

17.2 The hose box shall be painted red and stove enameled and woods FIRE

written in front glazed portion.

18.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTIONS

18.1 Fire Brigade Inlet connection shall be provided near the pump house

and to the ring main system as specified and as described in the BOQ,

for the following purposes:

i) Fire Brigade suction connection for fire static tank with provision of foot

valve.

ii) Fire brigade inlet connection to fire static tank.

iii) Fire brigade inlet connection to ring main system. Each connection shall

be provided with similar dia of Butterfly valve.

18.2 The locations of these Fire brigade connections shall be suitably decided

with the approval of Consultant/Landscape Architect and with a view

that these are easily accessible to the fire brigade, without any possible

Hindrance.

19.0 SPRINKLER HEADS

19.1 Sprinkler heads shall be provided at approximate spacing to cover as

per FM Global requirements per Sprinkler head. The spacing shall

however, be in conformity with the drawings and properly coordinated


212

with Electrical Fixtures, Ventilation Ducts and Grills and other services

along the ceiling.

19.2 Sprinkler heads shall be Chrome finished Brass/Gunmetal with quartz

bulb with a temperature rating of 68°C Sprinkler heads shall be of type

and quality approved by UL or FM. The inlet shall be screwed. Sprinkler

heads shall be pendent Sprinkler types as shown in drawings. All

Sprinklers should have the UL or FM.

19.3 Contractor shall supply spare Sprinkler Heads of each type as per

requirement and one Spanner for each type of sprinkler neatly installed

in a steel box with glass shutters at locations approved by the Engineer.

At Extra Cost

20.0 ALARM VALVE & AUTOMATIC WATER MOTOR GONG VALVE

The alarm valve & water motor gong valve with required trims is to be

provided on the each sprinkler individual tap point as per shown in

drawings & same shall be UL or FM approved.

21.0 FIRE FIGHTING HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SETS

21.1 Fire and Jockey Pumps

21.1.1 The selected pump capacity is in line with the recommendations of NBC

- Part IV. The pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150 %

of the rated capacity of water at a head of not less than 65 % of the

rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120 % of the rated head.

The fire pumps shall be single stage split casing type horizontal

centrifugal pumps with CI body and bronze impellers. Connecting shaft

shall be stainless steel with bronze sleeve and grease lubricated

bearings as per TAC regulations. The pumps shall be connected to the

drive by means of spacer type love – joy coupling which shall be

individually balanced dynamically and statically. The coupling, which

joins the prime mover with the pump, shall be provided with a sheet

metal guard. Pumps shall be installed on anti - vibration pads.

21.1.2 Pumps shall be connected to the drive by means of pin-bush type

coupling, which shall be individually balanced dynamically and

statically.


213

21.1.3 The coupling joins the prime mover with the pump shall be provided

with a sheet metal guard.

21.1.4 Pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated

capacity of water at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The

shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated head.

21.1.5 The pump shall meet the requirements of the NFPA 20 and unit shall be

design proven in fire protection services.

21.2 Motors for Electric Driven Pumps

21.2.1 Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan

cooled induction motors. For fire pumps, the motors should be rated not

to draw starting current more than 3 times normal running current.

21.2.2 Motors for fire protection pumps shall be at least equivalent to the horse

power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge and

the should follow the NFPA curve.

21.2.3 Motors for fire pumps shall meet all requirements and specifications of

the tariff advisory committee.

21.2.4 Motors shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 Phase,50 cycles A.C supply and

shall be designed for 33o C ambient temperature. Motors shall conform

to IS: 325.

21.2.5 Motors shall be designed for auto start system.

21.2.6 Motors shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the

pumps.

21.3.0 DIESEL ENGINE

The engine shall be cold starting type without the necessity of

preliminary heating of the engine cylinders or combustion chambers.

The engine shall be multi cylinder, 4 stroke cycle, water cooled engine

developing suitable HP at the operating speed specified to drive the

pump. Continuous capacity available for the load shall be exclusive of

the power requirement of auxiliaries of the diesel engine and after

correction for altitude, ambient temperature and humidity for the

specified environmental conditions as mentioned. This shall be atleast


214

20 % greater than the maximum HP required to drive the pump at its

duty point. It shall also be capable of driving the pump at its duty point.

It shall also be capable of driving the pump at 150 % of the rated

discharge at 65 % of rated head. The engine shall be capable of

continuous operation for 8 hours and atleast 3000 hours of operation

before major overhaul.

The engine shall have 10 % overload capacity for one hour in any

period of 12 hours continuous run.

The engine shall accept full load within 15 seconds from the receipt of

signal to start. The diesel engine shall come along with baseplate,

coupling, coupling guard, foundation bolts, antivibration pads,

batteries, battery charger cum diesel engine controller, fuel tank,

exhaust piping and exhaust insulation / painting, one complete fill of

diesel for testing and one for operation. The capacity of the fuel tank

shall be for a continuous operation of 8 hrs.

Starting system

The starting system shall comprise of necessary batteries, starter motor

of adequate capacity and axle type gear to match with the toothed ring

on the flywheel. Metallic relay protection suitably integrated with engine

protection system shall be included within the scope of work to protect

starting motor from excessively long cranking runs.

The battery capacity shall be suitable for meeting the needs of the

starting system. The batteries shall be maintenance free batteries. The

battery capacity shall be adequate for 10 consecutive starts without

recharging with cold engine under full compression.

The scope shall cover all cabling, terminals, initial charging etc. Exhaust

system

The exhaust system shall be complete with residential type silencer

suitable for outdoor installation and silencer piping including bends and

bird / water canopy. The total backpressure shall not exceed the engine


215

manufacturer's recommendation. The exhaust piping shall be suitably

lagged.

Engine shutdown mechanism

This shall be manually operated and shall return automatically to the

starting position after use.

Governing system

The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to control the

engine speed with 5 % of its rated speed under all conditions of load

upto full load. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed

at maximum pump load.

Engine instrumentation

• Lubricating oil pressure gauge.

• Lubricating oil temperature gauge.

• Water pressure gauge.

• Water temperature gauge.

• Tachometer.

• Hour meter.

The instrumentation panel shall be suitably mounted on the engine.

Engine protection devices

• Low lubricating oil pressure.

• High cooling water temperature.

• High lubricating oil temperature.

• Over speed shut down.

Anti vibration mounting

Suitable anti vibration mounting duly approved (10 mm thk / 6 * 6 inch

long rubber pads) shall be employed for mounting the unit so as to

minimise transmission of vibration to the structure. The isolation

efficiency achievable shall be clearly indicated.


216

Battery Charger cum engine controller.

Necessary float and boost charger shall be incorporated in the control

section of the power and control panel, to keep the battery under trim

condition. Voltmeter to indicate the state of charge of the batteries shall

be provided. The control panel shall be wall mounted, provided with

breaker, ammeter, voltmeter, selector switch, Hz meter lamps, terminal

block special relay, interlock, autostart facility to be offered with engine

fault shut down system.

All pump sets data sheet, G.A. drawing & characteristic curve to be

furnished along with technical bid in addition to be below given data

sheet format.

21.3.3 Pipe work

All pipe line with fittings and accessories required shall be provided for

fuel oil, lube oil and exhaust piping systems, heat exchanger water

cooling piping of adequate sizes shall be used for lube oil and fuel oil.

21.3.4 Anti Vibration mounting

Suitable vibration mounting duly approved by Engineer shall be

employed for mounting the unit so as to minimize transmission of

vibration to the structure. The isolation efficiency achievable shall be

clearly indicated.

21.3.5 Battery Charger

Necessary float and boost charger shall be incorporated in the control

section of the power and control panel, to keep the battery under trim

condition. Voltmeter to indicate the state of charge of the batteries shall

be provided.

21.3.6 Diesel Engine Controller

Diesel Engine controller will be the part of fire MCC Panel.


217

22.0 Air Vessel

The air vessel shall be provided to compensate for slight loss of pressure

in the system and to provide an air cushion for counter acting, pressure,

surges, whenever the pumping sets come into operation. Air vessel shall

conform to IS: 3844. It shall be normally half full of water, when the

system is in normal operation. Air vessel shall be fabricated with 8 mm

thick M.S. plate with dished ends and suitable supporting legs. It shall

be provided with one 50mm dia connection from delivery header, one

25 mm drain with valve, one water level gauge and 25 mm sockets for

pressure switches. The air vessel shall be tested to pressure for 12 hours

at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5 times the shut-off.

23.0 CABLES

23.1 Contractor shall provide all power control cables from the motor control

centre to various motors, level controllers and other control devices.

23.2 Cables shall conform to IS: 1554 and carry ISI mark.

23.3 Wiring cables shall conform to IS 694.

23.4 All power and wiring cables shall be aluminium conductor PVC

insulated armoured and PVC sheathed of 1100 volts grade.

23.5 All control cables shall be copper conductor PVC insulated armoured

and PVC sheathed 1100 Volt grade.

23.6 All cables shall have stranded conductors. The cables shall be in drums

as far as possible and bear manufacturer's name.

23.7 All cables joints shall be made in approved manner as per standard

practice.

23.8 The cable jointing shall be Crimping type.

24.0 CABLE TRAYS

24.1 Contractor shall provide G.I. perforated cable trays at locations as

shown on the drawings and of sizes as given in the bill of quantities,

with G.I. sheet thickness of 1.5mm.


218

24.2 Cable trays shall be supported from the bottom of the slab at intervals

of 60cms at both ends by welding support rods with insert plates OR

Anchor fasteners.

24.3 Cost of clips, bolts, nuts, support rods and any other materials required

to fix the trays in proper manner shall be included in the rate for trays.

25.0 EARTHING

25.1 There shall be an independent earthing station. The earthing shall

consist of an earth tape connected to an independent plate made of

copper or G.I. having a conductivity of not less than 100% international

standard. All electrical apparatus, cable boxes and sheath/armour

clamps shall be connected to the main bar by means of branch earth

connections of appropriate size. All joints in the main bar and between

main bar and branch bars shall have the lapping surface properly

tinned to prevent oxidation. The joints shall be riveted and sweated.

25.2 Earth plates shall be buried in a pit of 1.20x1.20M at minimum depth of

3M below ground. The connections between main bar shall be made by

means of three 10mm brass studs and fixed at 100mm centres. The pit

shall be filled with coke breeze, rock salt and loose soil. A G.I. pipe of

20mm dia with perforations on the periphery shall be placed vertically

over the plate to reach ground level for watering.

25.3 A brick masonry manhole 30x30x30xcm size shall be provided to

surround the pipe for inspection. A bolted removable link connecting

main bar outside the pit portion leading to the plates shall be

accommodated, in this manhole for testing.

25.4 Following sizes of earth conductors shall be used for motors:

Upto 5 KW 8 SWG G.I. Wire

5 KW to 30 KW 25 mm x 3 mm G.I. Flat

Above 30 KW 32 mm x 6 mm G.I. Flat.

The complete earthing system for the fire fighting system shall be

included in the scope of work.


219

This shall include earthing for MCC, motors, distribution boards, Diesel

engine controller etc. and any other interconnections to make the system

complete.

26.0 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

26.1 MCC shall be cubical type i.e. one motor feeder completely in one

cubicle, and shall be fabricated from 14 gauge M.S. sheet with dust &

vermin proof construction. It shall have Powder Coated finish and shall

be fitted with suitable etched plastic identification plates for each motor.

The cubicle shall comprise of the following: -

INCOMING

1 no. suitable rating TPN SFU

1set of suitable rating Amps. TPN AI. Bus bars with colours coded heat

shrinkable PVC sleeves.

1 set of RYB indicating lamps with individual HRC control fuses. 1 No.

96 mm x 96mm. 400 Amps. Ammeter with selector switch and suitable

rated current transformers. 1 No. 96mmx96mm. voltmeter with selector

switch.

Outgoing

feeder for main pumps -2Nos. 1No.suitable rating TP SFU .

Star delta starter for 60 hp with over load relay, single phase preventor

and indicating lamps for pressure ok, on, off and automode with

ON/OFF push button. feeder for jockey pump -1No.

1 No. suitable rating TP MCB .

S/D starter for suitable hp with over load relay, single phase preventor

and indicating lamps for pressure ok, on, off and automode with ON

/OFF push button.

1 No. Automanual selector switch

Feeder for booster pump -N.A.

1 No. suitable rating TP MCB.


220

S/D starter for 12.5 hp with over load relay, single phase preventor and

indicating lamps for on,off,with ON /OFF push button. Manual mode

only DIESEL ENGINE PUMP 1 No.

a) suitable rating DPMCB -4 Nos.

b) battery charger with transformer with rectifier resistance DC

voltmeter , trickle /booster /off selector switch/ or smps chargers

- 1 No.

c) 1 set of indicating lamps for the following :

1. battery charger on

2. DC supply on

3. control switch on

4. Engine fails to start

5. Engine fails to stop

6. Pressure sw not opretable (at start)

7. pump on

8. Low oil pressure

9. High water temperature

10. auto manual selector switch

d) 1 set of push button stations for the following :

1. Engine start

2. Engine stop

3. Engine hooter ACK

4. Engine fault reset

e) selector switches (Engine control ,mode selector) -1 No.

f) Auxilary relays / Engine controller for sequence operating for

starting and stopping of the engine - 1 set

g) Hooter for audio alarm in case of main pump start and any

pump over load or engine fault with test and ACK.

ACK push button (industrial type ) -1 No.


221

All the components shall be housed in a common cubical made of 14

swg. M.S. sheet with required stiffeners (if required ). The panel shell

have top cable entry provisions and panel shall be mounted on pedestal

of 300 mm height.

Also panel shall have min. 6Nos. Per pump set NO /NC contacts for

extending the status of fire pumps to the fire alarm panel. Overloading

status to be connected to hooter located on panel.

27.0 AIR RELEASE VALVE

The mounting shall be screwed type. The material shall be gunmetal.

This should be of spring type.

28.0 FOOT VALVE

28.1 Foot valves with strainer shall be C.I., confirming to I.S:4038 - 1979, as

specified in bill of quantities.

29.0 PRESSURE SWITCH Connection size Switch

Fluid Type

Working temperature

Element type & material type

Water Ambient V2" NPT (FM)

Bellows type & phosphor bronze Snap acting micro switch

Size of cable entry V2" NPT +/-

Accuracy 0.5%

Type of enclosure Dust proof

Voltage 230V, 50 Hz

Operating Pressure Electrical contact closure

30.0 PRESSURE GAUGE

Fluid Water

Working pressure 10.0 Kg / sq.cm


222

Element Bourdon tube element of SS 316

Dial Size 150 mm diameter & scale division

shall be in Metric units marked in

B/W

Operating pressure 0 to 16 Kg/cm2

Connection size V" NPT (M)

FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

31.0 ALARM SYSTEM:

31.1 The Fire detection.& Alarm system along with fire fighting equipments

mentioned in the above scope has been designed so that it protects the

entire building including passages, stores, rooms, still service plant

rooms, substation equipments rooms etc. but excludes car parking area.

31.2 The General type of detectors to be used should be Ionization smoke

detectors & heat detectors. The use of temperature type detectors shall

be installed in very small area only & where fire load so necessitates.

The application & selections however will depend upon the technical

characteristics of the particular motive of the detector.

31.3 The each floor/area will have certain no. of detectors & will be provided

suitably in the false ceiling / surface of the ceilings. The bell push &

sounders shall also be provided at suitable location for ease of use at

difficult time of fire. These detectors push buttons etc. shall be controlled

in operation through a wall mounted panel in the lobby. The detectors

zones shall be divided in such a way that it shall cater to entire area of

the floor. The floor Panel/Repeater panel (where necessary) shall be

connected to the Main Control Panel to be located in Main reception

area for easy location & identification.


223

31.4 The main control panel shall be given an audio / visual indication of the

floor & shall also Transmit faulty zones/area there by indicating

probably fire areas.

31.5 The individual detectors located in the closed rooms. ducts. etc. shall be

wired to visual response indicators located just out side the area housing

that particular detector . to enable authorized fire fighting personnel to

pin point at a glance the affected area, immediately on entry into the

affected zone & there by proceed with fire fighting operations without

losing time.

31.6 The technical requirement of each of the important components of fire

detection & alarm are mentioned in the specifications.

32.0 DESIGN

32.1 The fire fighting hydrant equipment such as fire pumps, hose panel

stations, wet risers, different types of extinguisher has been designed so

that the capacity & quantity is adequate to cover the worst conditions of

fires in the any area of Factory complex.

32.2 The general requirement of wet riser for the building with provision of

adequate capacity of fire fighting pumps shall be of M.S. pipe

permanently charged with water under pressure, rising the full height of

the building / reaching all areas.

32.3 The extinguishers shall be of appropriate type for the various class of

fires causing from Electrical system or otherwise.

32.4 The location mountings & operation of such equipments shall be easy &

the use of this is made by the fire fighting personals immediately. on

entry into the affected area by starting operations without loss of time.

32.5 The technical requirement of each of the important components of the

fire fighting equipments & extinguishers are covered in this specification.


224

33. 0 MAIN CONTROL PANEL

33.1 The main control panel shall be fabricated from 16 SWG M.S. sheet.

It should be suitable for wall mounting. The Main panel shall be of with

extensible zones. All components should be so designed / chosen that

the reliability of control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration,

resulting from variation in temperature, humidity and corrosion over the

years. The panel shall be completely dust and vermin proof All manual

control should be of robust design/ construction positive in location to

avoid accidental operation.

Manual controls should be clearly labeled to clearly indicate mode of

operation and their functions.

33. 2 The panel should have Electronic solid - state circuitry with different

colors LED lamps to indicate origin in fault or fire alarms with district

and discrete audible sound audible signal acknowledge / silence button

including LED lamps to indicate its operation.

33. 3 The panel shall be provided with Test facility to check fire alarm circuit

and indicators should also be provided. The panel shall be located on

the reception area to have visualization. The exact location will be

decided at site in consultation with Architect/ consultant.

33. 4 Failure of any indicator circuit should not prevent the fire alarm from

sounding.

33. 5 A switch to actuate alarm in main control panel to one or more floor

area should be provided.

33. 6 The panel should have public Address system with Talk back facility with

all floor/building areas.

33. 7 The Main Control Panel shall be provided with following indicators.

a. Power On.


225

b. Fire in the zones.

c. Wiring Fault

d. Charger Fault.

e. Battery Fault.

f. Main failure.

g. Auxiliary fault.

h. Zone Isolation

i. Fireman's switch arrangement of the lift.

33. 8 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V A.C. Supply and

backed up with 24V, D.C. Battery supply. The battery should be self-

charging and shall be capable of keeping the system running for a

minimum 12 hours.

33. 9 The panel shall be provided with following auxiliary functions.

a. Public Address System.

b. Tripping of air handling units. A/C plants, fire dampers etc.

33. 10 The panel should be painted as per the required shade to be decided at

later date by Client/Consultants.

33.11 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections, interlocking

wiring and lamp/Alarm/Test push button. Circuit labels comprising of

the white engraved letter on block PVC sheets printed circuit diagram

fixed on the covers of the panels.

34.0 FLOOR CONTROL PANEL/REPEATER PANEL:

34.1 The panel shall be fabricated from 16SWG CRCA H.S. sheet. It should

be suitable for wall Mounting. The panel shall be with extensible zones.

All the components should be so designed/ Chosen that the reliability of

control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration resulting from


226

variation in temperature, humidity and corrosion over the years. The

panels shall be completely dust and vermin proof. All manual controls

should be robust design/ construction, positive in location to avoid

accidentals operation. Manual controls should be clearly labeled to

clearly indicate mode of operation and their functions.

34.2 The panel should have Electronic solid state circuitry with different colour

LED lamps to indicate origin in fault or fire. fault and fire alarms with

distinct and discrete audible sound audible signal acknowledge/silence

button including LED lamps to indicate its operators.

34.3 The panel should be provided with Test facility to check fire alarm circuit

and indicators should also be provided. The panel shall be located at

suitable place near staircase for easy visualization.

34.4 Failures of any indicator circuit should not prevent the fire alarm from

sounding.

34.5 A switch to actuate alarm from main control panel to one or more floors

should be provided.

34.6 The panel should have public address system with Talk back facility with

all floor/areas.

34.7 The floor control panel shall be provided with following indicators.

a. Power on

b. Fire in the Zones

c. Wiring Faults

d. Charger Faults

e. Battery Fault.

f. Main Failure.

g. Auxiliary Fault.

h. Zone Isolation.


227

34.8 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V AC supply and

backed up with 24 V D.C. battery supply. The battery should be SMF

type.

34.9 The panel shall be provided with following auxiliary functions.

a. Public Address system

b. Tripping of Air Handling units, A/C plant and window air conditioners,

fire dampers etc.

34.10 The panel should be painted as per the required shade to be decided at

later date by Client / Consultants.

34.11 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections interlocking

wiring Lamp/Alarm/Test push button, circuit labels comprising of the

white engraved letter on black PVC sheet printed circuit diagrams fixed

on the inner covers of the panels.

34.12 The panel should be provided with test facility to check fire alarm circuit

and should also be provided. The panel shall be located in the reception

area to have easy visualization. The exact location will be decided at the

site with consultation &Client/Consultants.

34.13 The panel should have public address system with Talk back facility with

all floors.

34.14 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V A.C. supply, and

backed up with 24V D.C. battery supply. The battery should SMF type.

The battery should be self-charging and shall be capable of keeping the

system running for minimum 12 hours.

34.15 The main control panel shall be fabricated from 16 SWG M.S. shade it

should be suitable for wall mounting. The main panel shall be of

minimum 12 zones All components should be so designed/chosen that

the reliability of control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration

resulting from variation in temperature, humidity and over the years.

The panels shall be completely dust and vermin proof. All manual


228

control should be robust design / controls should be clearly labeled to

clearly indicate mode of operation and their functions.

34.16 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections, interlocking

wiring lamp/Alarm/Test push button, circuit labels comprising of the

white engraved letter on black PVC sheet printed circuit diagrams fixed

on the inner covers of the panels.

35.0 OPERATIONS :

The following standardized control units shall be available.

a) Switch unit for fully or semi - automatic switch ON / OFF of

individual zones of Complete zone units.

b) Relay units for controlling foul air extraction system fans etc.

35.1 All the main switching circuit for control units must be supervised and

any fault must Automatically release an acoustical and visual signal.

35.2 The acoustical alarm shall have two stages alarm facility where by only

an "alert alarm" is initiated automatically by the operation of a smoke

detector , followed by an "evacuation alarm" to be operated manually

from the main control room , should the need arise.

35.3 The "alert alarm" shall be interrupted acoustical signal, where as the "

evacuation alarm" shall be continuous. The alarm should be silenced be

only by the manual operation of a push button provided on the main

control panel.

35.4 An indicating light with inter-changing labeling must be provided to

identify each detector zone.

35.5 Remote signaling in various places must be possible. Each detector zone

must be connectable Disconnect able individually.

35.6 Switches & lamps must be easily identified even in closed. An " alarm off

" switch is particularly important . on " alarm off " position all acoustical


229

alarm signals are to stop while visual Signals are to maintain the alarm

indication. The alarm indictor lamp in particular must stay on.

35.7 A test switch must permit the checking of any signal detector without

tripping audible alarm Test alarm must automatically stop after some

time - say 15-20 sec s continuous functioning of push button, alarm

zones or certain vital detector zones must be ensured during test or in

"Alarm off " position.

36.0 BREAK GLASS TYPE - MANUAL CALL POINTS.

Each floor will have at least two manual call point. The call points shall

from integral part of the fire detection system, manual call points shall

be wall -mounted type. the housing Should be Mild steel / Thermo

plastic and should be dust proof . Once the glass is broken alarm

should sound on the floor as well as on the main control panel and

visible indication its operation. Provision for inserting a hand set for

direct communication to main panel shall be made near the manual call

point, within the tendered rate.

37.0 ELECTRONIC HOOTERS :

Depending on the floor area its layout external audible alarm devices

shall be provided with a pair of devices in parallel. The circuit feeding

power from zonal panel to these alarm devices in parallel. The circuit

feeding power from zonal panel to these alarm devices shall be a ring

circuit . If ring circuit is not provided then design provision to give fault

signal on zonal panel in the events of short circuit or disconnection of

power to sounders shall be made.

38.0 CABLES:

38.1 The PVC insulted cables shall be in accordance with IS 1554 part I The

cable conductor shall be of stranded copper .


230

38.2 The cable shall be laid as per standard with spaces, saddles, screw,

fabricated supported etc . The cables shall be cleared at regular interval

of 1.0 meter.

38.3 The cable shall be terminated with "SIEMENS" type compression glands.

38.4 All end terminations shall be provided with crimping type copper lugs.

38.5 The interconnections between the main control panel, floor control

panel and fire detector shall be carried out by means of 660 / 1100V

grade, heavy duty, twin or multi core PVC armored control cables with

copper conductor or by means of copper wire drawn in suitably sized

concealed conduits.

39.0 POWER SUPPLY

a) The fire detection system will normally be fed with power from a

constant voltage, ripple free pure D. C. stabilized power supply unit

operating on 230 V, 50 cycles A.C. mains.

b) In the events of mains failure the system shall automatically switch over

to battery supply of the required operating voltage. The battery shall be

SMF type and shall be capable of keeping the system running for a

minimum of 3 hours.

40.0 WIRING SYSTEM

40.1 All the cable shall be FRLS & ISI approved. Normally 2c x 1.5 Sq.mm

copper armored cable per detector zone should be sufficient. The wires

required a greater section even when used with the maximum length

and maximum number of detector / per zone.

41.0 SIGNAL PANEL :

41.1.0 The control units must be enclosed in a dust casting and protected

against handling by Unauthorized persons. Surface as well as flush

mounting must be possible.


231

41.1.1 Standard voltage of 240 V A.C. should be considered. An emergency

power supply must be provided to keep the system energized at least for

12 hours.

41.1.2 After at least 4 hours of emergency power supply, a 15 minutes alarm

with all important signaling devices must still be guaranteed.

41.1.3 The emergency power batteries must be constantly maintained at full

capacity and automatically recharged. An audiovisual alarm should be

provided on the main panel for semi-discharged condition.

41.1.4 The signal panel should be designed to take up individual standard

units so that it can easily be enlarged as the system demands. Simple

screw or plug connection are not to be done.

41.1.5 The following provisions shall be included in the local / main console

panel.

a) Smoke dampers of the respective affected floor shall open

automatically when the local panel is actuated

b) Smoke exhaust fans shall be simultaneously started the main

panel when any one of the local is panel actuated.

c) The local control panel shall trip off the air - handling unit of the

affected floors. The main air conditioning plant shall be shut

down by the panel it the same has not been switch off within a

period of about 5 minutes from time of sounding emergency in

any of the zones.

42.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

42.1.1 The extinguishers shall be provided on each floor for extinguishing fire

resulting from Electrical System & any other than Electrical system.

42.1.2 The different type of extinguisher shall be properly distinguished with the

help of labels.


232

42.1.3 CO2 Gas type extinguisher shall be used for fighting fire in Electrical

rooms such as main & floor Distribution panel, A.H.U room etc.

Extinguisher shall confirm to IS 2878.

42.1.4 Light water type extinguisher shall be used for fighting class B fire

involving in flammable liquids In are as Kitchen, Cafeteria etc.

42.1.5 The extinguishers shall be located ideally to approach them and for

indicate use event of fire.

42.1.6 The extinguishers to be installed in various areas mentioned shall have

proper mounting arrangements to suite Architectural aesthetic

requirements.

43.0 Temperature Heat Detector

Heat detectors will be of the fixed temperature type or rate of rise of

temperature with fixed temperature element type.

Fixed temperature Type: This detector will be capable of responding

when the temperature of the surrounding due to a fire exceeds the

preset temperature of the detector.

The temperature setting, classification with respect to temperature of

operation (by means of appropriate colour code) and the design and

constructional features of the detector will be in accordance with IS-

2175, BS-5445 Part 5 or 8 (European Standard EN54-5 or 8) or ANSI-

UL.521 as applicable.

Rate of Rise of temperature with fixed temperature Element type: The

rate of rise of temperature element of this detector will be capable of

responding when the rate of rise temperature at the detector exceeds a

predetermined value within a given time regardless of the actual

temperature. The detector will also be provided with a fixed temperature

element which will respond when the temperature exceeds the preset

value.


233

These detectors will be supplied with grades appropriate to the response

time with respect to rate of rise of temperature settings of the rate rise of

temperature element and temperature of operation of the fixed

temperature element for particular application. The installed spacing

and mounting height will be based on the rate or rise of temperature

element of the detector.

All such detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity, listed

spacing and response grade (or colour coded) as per relevant

standards.

The sensitivity, setting, response grade, listed spacing, the design and

construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-2175, BS-5445

Part 5 or 8 (European Standard EN54-5 or 8) or ANSI-UL.521 as

applicable.

44.0 Ionization Smoke Detector:

This detector will be capable of detecting a fire both in its incipient or

smoldering stages as well as visible flames. To meet this requirement the

detector will respond to visible combustion products in the form of

smoke as well as invisible particles, aerosols and pyroslysis products

from a clear burning fire.

The sensitivity / response threshold value, the design and construction of

the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-5445 Part 7

(European Standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as applicable. The

detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity, sensitivity range

listed spacing, radiation level or radio active component etc., as per

relevant standards.

Radio active material used in ionisation smoke detector will be such as

not to have any harmful effect on the personnel in the area where

installed even if the area is continuously inhabited. The radiation will be

in the range 0.5 micro curie to 0.9 micro curie.


234

45.0 Photoelectric Smoke Detector

This detector working on the light scattering principle will be capable of

detecting visible smoke from smouldering fires long before the fire

breaks out into visible flame.

The normal sensitivity / reponse threshold value, the design and

construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-

5445 Part 7 (European standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as

applicable. Smoke detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity

and tolerance limits and listed spacing as per relevant standards.

46.0 Water flow detector

Vane-type water flow detectors shall be installed on system piping as

designated on the drawing and/or as specified herein. Detectors shall

mount on any clear pipe span of the appropriate nominal size, either a

vertical up flow or horizontal run, at least 6" from any fittings that may

change water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter or no closer than

24" from a valve or drain. Detectors shall have a sensitivity in the range

of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 450 psi* for

2" - 8" pipes. The detector shall respond to water flow in the specified

direction after a preset time delay that is field adjustable. The delay

mechanism shall be a sealed mechanical pneumatic unit with visual

indication of actuation. The actuation mechanism shall include a

polyethylene vane inserted through a hole in the pipe and connected by

a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of

dual

SPDT switches (Form C contacts). Two conduit entrances for standard

fittings of commonly used electrical conduit shall be provided on the

detectors.

47.0 FIRE BUCKETS

The Fire Buckets shall be as per the relevant Indian Standard.

Size of the Fire Bucket shall be minimum nine ( 9 ) litres.


235

The Fire Buckets shall be supplied empty.

The material of construction shall be Galvanised Iron.

The Fire Buckets shall be provided with anti corrosive treatment.

The bottom of the buckets shall be hemispherical.

The Fire Buckets shall be provided with handle for hanging at the top.

There shall be another handle at the side / botton of the bucket. The

handles shall help for holding while throwing the content.

The Fire Buckets shall be provided with anti corrosive treatment.

Painting, Outside of the Fire Bucket shall be painted with primer and

Fire Red Colour the word FIRE shall be written outside the bucket in bold

black letters.

The inside of the Fire Bucket shall be painted with primer and white.

48.0 Air Release Valves

Air Release Valves automatically exhaust these small amounts of air

which collect at system high points, while the system is flowing and

under pressure. This ensures the system will remain free of trapped air

pockets, thereby increasing the efficiency and decreasing the overall

operating cost of the system In operation, these valves are installed at

high points in the system where air would naturally tend to collect. Air

bubbles entering the valve will displace the liquid within the valve and

lower the liquid level. When the level drops to where it no longer buoys

the float, the float drops. This motion pulls the seat away from the

orifice, opening the valve and allows the air that has accumulated in the

upper portion of the valve to be exhausted to atmosphere. As the air is

exhausted, liquid re-enters the valve, once again buoying the float,

lifting it until the seat presses against the orifice, closing the valve. This

cycle automatically repeats as often as necessary to maintained air free

system.


236

LIST OF STANDARDS WITH LATEST AMENDMANT

1. Cable

2. Motors

3. Cast Iron Pipes

4. M.S. Pipes Fittings

5. Cast Iron Fitting & Vales

6. M.S. Fittings

7. Hydrant Valves

8. Hoses

9. Branch Pipe/ Nozzles

10. Portable Fine Extinguishers

11. Main Control Panel & Floor Panel

12. Detectors

13. Sprinkler Head

IS 1554 IS

325

IS 7181 / IS 1536 / 37 IS

1239 / IS 3589

IS 1538 / BS 1641 / IS 780

IS 1239 IS 5290 IS 4927 /

636 IS 903

IS 2878 / 2171 / 933 / 934

IS 2189

U.L./ F.M./ F.O.C./ D.I.N./

T.A.C./ IS 2175

U.L./ F.M./ F.O.C./

D.I.N./ T.A.C./ IS 2175

SECTION 3 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to select the pump/motor to

meet the requirements specified in the tender. Contractor is asked to fill

up all the data given below.

1. Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System.

Horizontal

centrifugal Pumps

Elec. Driven

Fire Pump

Diesel Driven

Jockey Pump

Booster Pump

(As per TAC) (As per TAC) (As per TAC) (Mono-block)

1.1.1 Makes

1.1.2 Model No.

1.1.3 Rated Discharge (LPM)

1.1.4 Rated Head (M)

1.1.5 Speed (RPM)


237

1.1.6 No. of Stages

1.1.7 Efficiency at rates Capacity & head

1.1.8 KW required at rated Capacity & head

1.1.9 KW required at 120% Rated discharge

1.1.10 Shut off head (M)

1.1.11 Material of Construction

a) Body

b) Impeller

c) Shaft

1.1.12 Whether pump is capable of discharging 150% of rated Capacity at a

head not less than 65% of rated head.

1.1.13 Lubrication

1.1.14 Anti-vibration pad

1.2 Pipes(MS)

1.2.1 Make

1.2.2 Standard/Class

1.2.3 Thickness

1.2.4 Painting details for above ground & exposed pipes

1.2.5 Wrapping & coating

1.2.6 IS: code

1.3 Fittings

Screwed Fittings Butt welded Fittings

(up to 50 mm dia) (65 mm dia & above.)

1.3.1 Type

1.3.2 Make

1.3.3 Material

1.3.4 Type of ends

1.3.5 Pressure rating

1.3.6 IS: code

1.4 Pipes(Stainless Steel

1.4.1 Make

1.4.2 Grade


238

1.4.3 Thickness (SCH)

1.4.4 Painting details for above ground & exposed pipes

1.4.5 IS: Code

1.5 Fittings Stainless Steel Fittings

1.5.1 Type

1.5.2 Make

1.5.3 Material

1.5.4 Type of ends

1.5.5 Pressure rating

1.5.6 IS: code

1.6 Valves

Butterfly Sluice(NRS) Ball

1.6.1 Make & Type

1.6.2 Type of ends

1.6.3 Material of construction

1.6.4 Test Pressure

1.6.5 Provided with all Accessories including gear system as per relevant IS

1.6.6 IS: code

1.6.7 Approval

1.7 Engine/Motors

Engine Main Pump Jockey Pump Booster pump

(TAC) (As per TAC) (As per TAC) (Mono-block)

1.7.1 Make

Type & Model No

1.7.2 Frame Size

1.7.3 Speed (RPM)

1.7.4 Rated Cap. (KW)

1.7.4 Efficiency (%)

1.8 Control Panel (MCC)

1.8.2 Manufacturer

1.8.3 Dimensions

1.8.4 Type of construction & mounting


239

1.8.5 Sheet Metal Enclosure

a) Material

b) Thickness

1.8.5 Electrical Rating

1.8.6 Make of starters/Contactors

1.8.7 Rating of Contactors

1.8.8 Size & material of Bus bar

1.8.9 Annunciation system

1.8.10 Approx. weight

1.8.11 Painting details

1.8.12 Whether all equipment/Components as per Specification included

1.9 Swing type check Valves

1.9.1 Make & Type

1.9.2 Type of ends


1.9.4 Test Pressure

1.9.5 IS : code/TAC approved

1.9.6 Approval Brass Ball Valve

1.10.1 Make & Type

1.10.2 Type of ends

1.10.3 Whether confirm to & marked IS:778

1.11 Hydrant Landing Valve

1.11.1 Make & Type


1.11.3 Details of Flange

O.D. (MM)

P.C.D (MM)

No. of Holes


240

1.11.4 IS: code/TAC approved

1.12 Hose Pipes C.P. Hose RRL (Type A)

1.12.1 Make

1.12.2 Test Pressure

1.12.3 Dia (MM)

1.12.4 Length (M)

1.12.5 Material of couplings

1.12.6 Where hose & Couplings ISI marked

1.13 Branch Pipes & Nozzles

1.13.1 Make

1.13.2 Material

1.13.3 Dia. of Coupling

1.13.4 Dia of Nozzle

1.13.5 Where ISI marked

1.14 Hose Cabinet External /Internal

1.14.1 Size

1.14.2 Material

1.14.3 Thickness of sheet

1.14.4 Thickness of glass

1.14.5 Whether Rubber Gasket Provided

1.14.6 Painting Details

1.15 First Aid Hose Reel

1.15.1 Make & Material

a) Drum

b) Hose

1.15.2 Size of Drum (Dia x length)

1.15.3 Size of Hose (Dia x length)

1.15.4 Hose test pressure


241

1.15.5 Size & material of Nozzle

1.15.6 Size & material of Shut off valve

1.15.7 Whether complete unit strictly confirms to and marked IS:884 TAC

approved

1.16 Pressure Switch

1.16.1 Make & Type

1.16.2 Type of ends

1.16.3 Test Pressure



1.16.6 Whether complete with gland or other accessories

1.17 Pressure Gauge

1.17.1 Make & Type

1.17.2 Dial size (mm)

1.17.3 Range (kg/cm.sq.)


1.18 Water Flow Detector

1.18.1 Make & Type

1.18.2 Pressure Rating


1.18.4 FM Approved

2.1 Sprinkler Head Pendant

2.1.1 Make

2.1.2 Material

2.1.3 Type of sensing Element & temperature Rating (C)

2.1.4 Orifice size (MM)

2.1.5 Type (UPRIGHT / PENDENT / CONVENTIONAL / SIDEWALL /

EXTENDED RANGE)

2.1.6 FM or UL Approved


242

2.2 Alarm check Valve

2.2.1 Make

2.2.2 Material

2.2.3 Size (MM)

2.2.4 Whether provided with electric bell, test valve, drain valve, & all other

training connections

2.2.5 Whether approved hydraulic alarm motor & gong provided

2.2.6 FM or UL Approved


243

28.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 Supplying and installing, testing, perfect aligning and proper leveling

and commissioning of fire service main pump, multistage, of 1620 LPM

(Litres/min.) at 70m head centrifugal type, 50 HP, 37.5 kW as per

specification No. FF-MFP/MSC

&

2.0 Supply & installation, testing & commissioning of Fire Jockey pump, of

180 LPM at 70 M head, 3 ph, 440 A.C. 10 HP (7.5 kw), Suction/delivery

sizes 50/32mm as per specification no. FF-MEP/JP

&

3.0 Supplying and erecting testing, perfect aligning and proper leveling and

commissioning of horizontal centrifugal back pull out pump rated 1620

LPM (Litres/min) at 70 m head coupled to a diesel Engine of 1800 rpm,

55 BHP with diesel storage tank, exhaust chimney, battery backup with

standby provision & accessories such as standard coupling guard,

common base plate and foundation bolts, anti vibration pads and

control cables:

Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper levelling and

commissioning of Fire service main/jockey/booster pump single/multi

stage having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar

to with minimum parameters, confirming to IS: 12469 with specified size

of suction and delivery pipes, coupled with squirrel cage A.C. induction

motor. The pump set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete

foundation. The Main Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum

operating pressure of 3.5 kg/cm2 at highest and farthest hydrant.

Material: Pump Body:

The centrifugal pumps shall be manufactured and tested and marked in

accordance with IS 12469. The pump shall be capable of developing

not less than 150% of rated capacity at head of not less than 65% of

rated head.


244

The pump casing shall be of heavy section close grained cast iron and

designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure. The casing shall

be provided with shaft seal arrangement as well as flanges for suction

and delivery pipe connections as required. Parts of pumps like impeller,

shaft sleeve, wear ring etc shall be non corrosive metal. Pump have

continuous rising head capacity characteristic from the specified duty

point towards the shut off point, the maximum being shut off. The horse

power characteristic shall preferably non overloading type beyond the

rated capacity point.

Impeller:

The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined

collars. Wear rings, where fitted to the impeller, shall be of the same

material as the impeller. The impeller surface shall be smooth finished

for minimum frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by

a key.

Shaft:

The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/ C - 40 and shall be accurately

machined. The shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibration at any speed

within the operating range of the pump.

Bearing:

The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable

for duty involved. These shall be grease lubricated and shall be

provided with grease nipples /cups. The bearings shall be effectively

sealed against leakage of lubricant or entry of dust or water.

Shaft seal:

The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum

leakage. A drip well shall be provided beneath the seal.

Item Material of construction

1) Casing CI FG260, IS210

2) Impeller Bronze Gr2


245

Item Material of construction

3) Shaft sleeve Bronze Gr2 IS318

4) Wearing Ring Bronze Gr2 IS318

5) Shaft SS AISI 410

6) Stuffing box CIFG 260 IS210

7) Lantern ring Bronze Gr1 IS318

8) Gland CIFG 260 IS210

Motor:

Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan

cooled) synchronous speed 2900 RPM, suitable for operation on 415

volts, 3 phase 50 Hz. AC with IP 55 protection for enclosure, horizontal

foot mounted type with Class-'F' insulation, conforming to IS-325. The

motor shall be given tropical & fungicidal treatment for successful

operation of motor in hot, humid and tropical environment.

Body: Cast iron

Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel

Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.

Winding: Class 'F' insulated copper winding.

Base plate: Fabricated from Mild Steel, foundation bolts etc.

Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand, and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.

Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade

and strength. Hardware: Mild Steel

Method of Construction: The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic

hammer or sharp pointed chisel. The teak wood box of appropriate size

shall be placed and filled with cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 to

25 mm stone metal and required size and strength of foundation nut &

bolts. The necessary curing & finishing shall be done in approved


246

manner. The M.S. fabricated base plate of suitable size & strength

should be fixed with anti-vibration rubber pads. Proper leveling and

alignment shall be observed before tightening of foundation bolts. Both

the pump and motor shall be placed on common base plate frame with

perfect alignment, proper leveling. The pump should be connected to

pipe line with M.S. flanges, gaskets, nut bolt etc and shall be checked

for the leakages. The coupling guard shall be provided with nut bolts of

required size. The pump shall be tested for 3.5 kg/cm2 pressure at

highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The

necessary test certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be

produced. The motor should have efficiency more than 90% and power

factor above 0.80.


Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.

Fire Fighting pump (Multi Stage Centrifugal)

Capacity in HP

Speed in RPM Discharge in

LPM Head in metre

Suction /Delivery Size

in mm 30 1450 1400 56 80/65 50 1450 1800 76 100/80 75 1450 2400 88 125/100 75 1450 2800 76 125/100 120 1450 2800 105 150/125

Table No. 13.1/3

Jockey Pump (Centrifugal type)

Capacity in HP


LPM Head in metre


in mm 15 2900 240 56 50/32 20 2900 240 105 50/32

Table No. 13.1/4

Booster Pump (Centrifugal type)

Capacity in HP


LPM Head in metre


in mm 7.5 2900 450 35 50/32 10 2900 468 40 50/32


247

4.0 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of giving a discharge of 171

M3/Hr of water at a pressure of 70 mtr. complete with 85 HP automatic

diesel engine driven pump set with suitable speed, having the residential

silencer system and other accessories like fuel tank, necessary cooling

system, foot valve, day oil storage tank as per detailed specification

SR.

NO. TECHNICAL SPECS ENG DRVN

1 Quantity 1 No 2 Liquid Water 3 Temperature Ambient 4 Sp. Gravity 1 5 Viscosity - 6 Rated cap. in lpm / m3/hr 2850 / 171 7 Total Head in 'm' 70 8 Pump Type (KBL) CE 80/40 9 RPM 1800 10 Rec. Eng / Motor (KW/HP) 85 BHP 11 Material of Construction 20

Cummins/ KOEL/ Caterpillar/Ruston

12 Engine Details Horns bey B Enclosure Radiator Cooled C Speed in RPM 1800 D Rated Voltage / Frequency 12 Volt Electric Start E Frame Size / Appl. Code F Silencer Industrial

The diesel engine shall be capable of 20% in excess of maximum HP

required to drive the pump set @ it's duty point or BHP required to drive

the pump set at 150% of it's rated discharge.



5.0 MCC for Fire Pumps :Design, manufacture, supply ,installation, testing

and commissioning of following MCC panels suitable for 415V, 3

phase, 4 wire, 50 hz power distribution system. the panel should be

indoor, free standing, floor mounting, sheet metal clad, Cubicle, dead


248

front, dust and vermin proof confirming to IP-55 enclosure,

compartmentalized design fabricated out of 14 SWG sheet steel

complete with Al bus bars, separate earth bus bar to be provided

through out the length of the panel. The incoming and outgoing feeders

shall be accommodated in a modular multitier arrangement, adequate

size cable alley, painting, earthling numbering, damper plate etc. as

required as per specifications and drawings. The panel shall withstand a

fault level of 25 KA as per Single Line Diagram.(Cost of PLC and related

wiring for switching on and switching off the pumps as per the

requirement) The LT panel incorporating incomer and outgoing feeder

as details below.

The scope of work is thus to design M.S. sheet cubical type panel board

to incorporate all the accessories mentioned above. Providing all

material M.S. sheet, M.S. angle, channels etc. and fabricating the panel,

providing and erecting all the accessories mentioned above in panel

board, transporting the same, loading unloading and erection at site of

work and testing and commissioning the same.

The design of panel board shall be prepared by the contractor as per

standard installation practice. The contractor shall consult with Engineer

and as per the instructions, suggestions the design shall be prepared.

Adequate space to facilitate working for removing cable connection,

replacement of accessories etc. shall be kept while designing.

Accordingly the complete drawing of dimensional details of cubical box,

inside partitions, erection of accessories, bus bar erections, power

wiring, control wiring shall be prepared by the contractor and got

approved from Engineer before commencement of fabrication work.

Fabrication of panel shall be done in 14 gauge CRCA sheet with

necessary cutting, bonding, welding, drilling etc. The compartments

viewing from front side shall be kept separately for switch fuse unit,

change over switches. ACB's and compartment for housing measuring


249

instrument shall generally be kept separate however the same may be

permitted to install in the compartments of respective switch gear where

the measurements are to be taken.

However the Engineer's decision in this matter will be final. Doors with

self- locking arrangement for such individual compartments.

Inside partitions for isolating the compartments shall be fabricated out

of CRCA sheets and Bakelite sheet shall be provided for isolating

electrical contacts. Continuous Bakelite insulating sheets shall be

provided with nuts, bolts for the entire length of bus bars to separate the

three phases from each other and from neutral.

Necessary angle irons, channel irons, M.S. flats of required size and

lengths shall be provided and erected inside / outside panel board for

strengthening, fixing accessories, bus bar supports etc. The scope also

includes cutting required size and numbers of opening at bottom for

cable entries. The foundation channel M.S. of adequate size and length

shall be provided and erected for installation of the panel board

necessary cement concrete work, if required along with plastering with

cement plaster shall be provided for mounting the panel board. The

details of foundation shall be got approved from the Engineer along

with relative drawings. etc. The panel board shall consist of following

switchgears.

A Incomer Feeder

1) 250A MCB 1 NO

2) Control Fuse with 4 A Fuse Link

3) NOS 3 Phase indicating Lamp R.Y.B.LED Type 3 NOS

4) 0-.500 Volt meter S.Switch Digital 1 SET

5) 0-.300A Ameter with CTS Switch Digital 1 SET

6) TPN Aluminum Busbar full Length 300A or required length.

(B) Out Going Feeder for 2x75HP S/D Main Hydrant-Sprinkler for

Each Feeder


250

1) 160A TPN Switch Fuse Unit 1 NO

2) 70A TP Power contactors 3 NOS

3) ON-OFF & Trip Srion on indicating Lamp 4 NOS

4) Start / Stop Push Button 1 NO

5) E-Stop Push Batton for Siron 1 NO 6 Auto Manual Switch 1 NO

6) Over Load Relay 6-110A 1 NO

7) Timer 0-60 sec start Delta 1 NO

C) Out Going Feeder for1x12.5/20 HP For Booster Pump / Jockey Pump

1. 40 A TP MCB 1 NO

2. 25 A TP Power contactor 1 NO

3. ON/OFF indicating Lamp 2 NOS

4. Start / Stop Push Button 2 NOS

5. Auto Manual Switch 1 NO

6. Over Load Relay 14-23A 1 NO

D) OutGoingfor12VDieselEngineControlPanel

1. IndicatingLamp6NOS

2. DCAmeter/Voltmeter1+1NO

3. FusebaseWithLink7NOS

4. PushButton4NOS

5. Switches6AAuto/Manual/Boost/Trikal4NOS

6. Transformer12V/14VACA/E1 NO

7. PlaRelay12.3C-107NOS

8. EngineControlRelay1NO 9.Battery Charges Unit 1 NO

Powder coating shall be provided from inside and outside of panel

board, rubber gaskets for panel doors, busbar extension opening shall

be provided to ensure proper safety. All the switchgears, SFU, ACBS's,

MCCB , MCB shall be suitably mounted for operation on front side of

panel. Arrangement shall be made in such away that when the

switchgear is ON, the panel door couldn't be opened. All the measuring

instruments, indicating lamps shall be erected flush mounted. The

identification numbering for the switchgear, measuring instruments and


251

indicating lamps etc. shall be made with respect to the transformers,

pumps, capacitors, auxiliary feeders etc.

6.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armored cable 1100 V 3-1/2 core 300

sq.mm aluminum conductor with continuous 12.97 sq.mm (8 SWG) G.I

earth wire complete erected with glands & lugs on wall/ tresses/ poles

or laid in provided trench/pipe as per specification No CB-LT/AL

& 7.0 Supplying & erecting PVC armored cable 3 1/2 core 70 sq mm

aluminum conductor with continuous 8.35 sq mm (10 SWG) G.I. earth

wire complete erected with glands & lugs, on wall/ trusses/pole or laid

in provided trench/ pipe as per specification no. CB-LT/AL

& 8.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armored cable 4 core 10 sq.mm aluminum

conductor with continuous 5.48 sq.mm (12 SWG) G.I earth wire

complete erected with glands & lugs on wall/tresses/poles or laid in

provided trench/pipe as per specification No CB-LT/AL

&

9.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armoured cable 8 core 1.5 sq.mm FRLS

copper complete erected on wall/ceiling as per specification No CB-

LT/Cu

1. General

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall

carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark

is not available in market, it shall be as included in approved list. Work

shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If

there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such

work shall be carried out as per the approved method of construction

specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook. Material and Work not

qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the satisfaction

of the Engineer.


252


The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are

acceptable as good practice, and accepted standards. SP 30: 1984 :

National Electrical Code SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : National Building Code

IS 1255: 1983 Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of

armoured cables up to 33 kV. IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 : Recommended

current ratings of PVC cables.

IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables;

Part 1 for working voltages up to and including 1100 Volts.

IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables;

Part 1for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to 11kV.

IS 10810: Part 63; 1993 : Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke

density of electric cables under fire condition.


Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT) Providing armoured

cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting material

(Aluminum / Copper) including required material, hardware's for

erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same

through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as

per approved method of construction including glands, lugs, etc.

4. Material:

Cables:

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3

and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No,

manufacturer's name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every

metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at each

mark.


253

Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per

Table No 7/1. Glands: As per specification (CB-GL).

Specification Nos (CB-GL)

Termination of cable ends with cable glands for preparing and fixing the

cable leads for connection. Cable glands shall be of Flange type.

Material:

Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass metal,

with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers and nuts.

Method of Construction

Before erection of gland, the cable end shall be prepared by removing

the outer PVC insulation up to the point where gland to be fixed, by

assessing the length of leads required. Bottom portion of gland shall be

inserted over the steel armouring, and then armour strips shall be bent

for the length of collar of gland, remaining length of armoring shall be

cut. The cable end shall then be, inserted through the entry of plate

where the cable is to be terminated. The top portion of gland with

washer shall be then inserted in such a manner that the bent armour

strip should be touching the surface of the entry. The nuts shall be

tightened with spring washers over the projected stud portion. Fixing of

gland shall be at right angle to the gland plate. Tightening shall assure

continuity of earth. Hole to the gland plate shall be punched / knocked

out, of correct diameter with respect to gland size.


Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each). Street

Light Boxes & Cable Indicators A) Cable Indicator Plate (CIP)


254

Scope:

Specification No (CB-CIP)

Providing and fixing of cable indicator plate along the route of under

ground cable.

Material:

Cable indicator plate: Circular plate made of cast iron having 100 mm

dia. and 6 mm thick.

Iron rod for fixing of cable indicator plate: 700 mm long galvanized

iron rod of 12 mm dia., and 150 mm long cross bar welded at bottom

or hook to be made with same continuous bar.


Cable indicator plate fixed/welded to the 700 mm long iron rod or

angle, with 150 mm cross bars welded at bottom as fasteners or bent in

'J' shape to hook the cable in the bent portion, shall be buried along the

route of cable in the trench made for laying the cable. For clear visibility,

the Cable indicator plate shall be buried in such a manner that the plate

should be minimum 200 mm above the ground level and shall be

provided at every 15-25 metre in straight run, at both ends of road

crossing and immediate before and after turning point of cable.

Mode of Measurement: Specification Nos (CB-CL/AL)

Crimping of lugs, and fixing to the terminals with nuts and bolts, etc.

Material: Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum / copper /

bimetallic of required type, with required size of hole and smooth

finished both from inside and outside.

Hardware: Brass or Cadmium plated mild steel nuts and bolts,

bimetallic washers. Anti-Oxide paste: Paste of superior quality

manufactured by reputed manufacturer.


255


Before fixing of lugs to the cable end, the cable end to the equivalent

length of the lug shall be prepared by removing the outer PVC insulation

along with the steel armouring and then, the inner PVC insulation. The

paste shall be applied to the cable lead and inside the lug prior to the

inserting of lug on the cable lead. The lug shall then be crimped with

hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The crimping

shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no air gap. Then the

crimped portion shall be wrapped with the PVC insulation tape. (Colour

of tape shall be of that of cable lead) The above method shall be carried

out for all the cores. The cable end with lug shall then be terminated

into the terminal and then be tightened with either brass nuts or

Cadmium plated nuts as directed by Engineer.

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior

quality enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength,

semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for

fixing.

G I Strip: 22 g x 25 mm width G I Strip.

Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having

the size of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size

of cable), rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the

cable.

Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with

identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie

should be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.

Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden

gutties, etc.


256

Method of Construction: General:

a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated

with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as

directed by Site engineer.


mentioned in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with

adequate distance between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize

de-rating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name /

mark at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare

earthwire of appropriate size as per Table no. 7/1 shall run along with

the cable. Earth wire running with the cable shall be terminated at the

earth terminal nearest to cable termination.

Erection of Cable on Surface:

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect

level and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far

as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of

required gauge as per Table No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire

shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to

wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties,

etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450

mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for

stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable


Erection of Cable on Trusses:

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be

firmly clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22 g, 25 mm width of required

length fixed to truss with nuts and bolts.


257

Erection of Cable on Pole:

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be

firmly clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with

25 x 3 mm or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole

with nuts and bolts.

Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole:

While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be

taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open

end. Cable shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum

1.0 metre above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that

depth of cable shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4. Suitable

size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point at adequate

depth.

Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct:

Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide

lines of IS 1255.

Erection of cable/s on trays:

Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care

shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of

cable.

Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the

basis of running meter basis.

10.0 Supplying and Installing Air Vessel of 300 mm dia. 1.5M height M.S

tank installed at terrace as per specification No - FF-FFA/ACT

Specification No (FF-FFA/ACT)

Scope:

Supplying and installing Air Vessel of 300mm Φ 1.5 mtr. In height M.S.

Tank fabricated from M.S. black ERW pipe, conforming to I.S.3589,

having 6mm thickness, dish end at both ends, duly welded with 300mm

Φ pipe, having inlet of 50 mm Φ , duly fitted with 50mm Φ sluice valve


258

and 20/25mm Φ drain with G.M. gate valve, to be installed inside

pump house along with provided M.S. angle tripod.

Material:

Air Vessel: MS ERW pipe confirming to IS: 3589

Tripod: MS angle of size 75 x 75 x 5mm


300mm dia. 1.5 metre height air vessel, Gate Valve, flanges, MS angle

Tripod including necessary labour, material and use of required tools

and plants.



11.0 Supplying and Installing G.I pipes Under Ground of C class ERW of size

150 mm dia with necessary fittings as per specification No.FF-PP

including excavation & anticorrosive protection

&


100 mm dia with necessary fittings as per specification No.FF- PP

Scope:

Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark

of specified diameter with screwed sockets, Joints & necessary G.I.

fittings such as sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers,

enlarger, plugs, etc. including electric resistance welding (ERW), fixing

with clamps & all connected works such as excavation, drilling holes in

wall, slabs, backfilling & making good the damages.

Material:

The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified

and shall comply with I.S. 1239--1973 and 1969 for the specified type.

The specified diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of

the bore pipes. The fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged


259

shall not be used. For the firefighting works, the C Class pipes and

accessories shall be used.

Pressure Testing:

All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and

a half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10

kg/cm2 for a period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in

joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of

the Engineer. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test

shall be re-tested in the same manner. System may be tested in sections

and such sections shall be securely capped. Pressure gauges may be

capped off during pressure testing of the installation.


Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized

iron fittings with ERW shall be erected on MS angle support with one

coat of red oxide primer and two coats of Post Office fire red enamel

paint duly tested to 1.5 times of working pressure. Excavating and back

filling trenches including dewatering, cutting through walls, floor, etc.,

and making site good.

Laying, jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting

pipes, wastage and threading the ends. At all the road crossings the

pipes shall be laid lower than the crust of the road. During excavation if,

any other service pipes (Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across,

these shall be carefully protected and supported. Any damages done

shall be made good. The pipe shall be laid on a well compacted bed in

the trench. The trench after laying the pipe shall be refilled except at the

joints in layers and manually rammed. Care shall be taken to see that

no earth, etc., gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be kept raised by

about 5 cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning of

murum, good earth, or sand shall be provided for the pipe in case of

trench through rock. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after


260

satisfactory testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be

disposed of satisfactorily without causing nuisance.


Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe

laid complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified. The lengths shall be

measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the

pipes and fittings correct up to a cm.

13.0 Providing coating of Bitumen Paint & 4mm thick Wrapping as per IS

10221 for underground 150 mm Ring Main of Fire Fighting System.

&

14.0 Providing coating of Bitumen Paint & 4mm thick Wrapping as per IS

10221 for underground 100 mm Ring Main of Fire Fighting System.

Anti-Corrosive Protection On Under Ground Pipe: Corrosion protection

tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in ground. This

corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt component

supported on fabric of organic or inorganic fiber and minimum 4 mm.

thick and conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of practice for

coating and wrapping of under ground mild steel pipe line. Before

application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall

be removed with the help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be

applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed to dry until

the solvent evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and

tape shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection

tape shall then be wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and

bounded completely to the pipe. There shall be no air pocket or bubble

beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be 15 mm. and 250 mm. shall be

left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit installation and welding.

This area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipeline is installed.

The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface of

the pipe shall be pre- heated until it is worm to touch and traces of


261

moisture are removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to

dry.

No joint shall be located in the thickness of the walls. If the pipe is

required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall

be filled smooth and any obstruction in the bore shall be entirely

eliminated. The rate includes wastage in cutting etc. When the pipe is to

be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder

bates keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be

fixed to the wall horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another

when more than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable. The supporting

clips,etc., for the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so as

necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut

into the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps.

etc., after fixing of the pipes, clamps etc., these shall be neatly made

good

Mode of Measurement: Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe

laid complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified. The lengths shall be

measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the

pipes and fittings correct up to a cm.

15.0 Excavation in trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings,

walls etc. in earth's soils of all types, gravel, sand, soft & hard murum,

and boulders up to 0.03 cum. size including removing the excavated

material upto a distance of 50 M beyond the edge of excavation

including the initial lift of 1.5 M, stacking or spreading as directed,

bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation etc., and

back filing the excavated pit or trench using the excavated material in

layers including watering and ramming as required or as directed by

Engineer, including all labour and materials complete.

Scope:


262

The Item includes Excavation in trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations,

column footings, walls etc. in earth's soils of all types, gravel, sand, soft

& hard murum, and boulders up to 0.03 cum. size including removing

the excavated material upto a distance of 50 M beyond the edge of

excavation including the initial lift of 1.5 M, stacking or spreading as

directed, bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation

etc., and back filing the excavated pit or trench using the excavated

material in layers including watering and ramming as required or as

directed by Engineer, including all labour and materials complete.


Executed quantity shall be measured on cubic meter basis.



including excavation & anticorrosive protection.

&

17.0 Supplying and Installing G.I pipes Above Ground of C class ERW of size


&

18.0 Providing and laying galvanized iron pipes conforming to IS:1239-1992

(Part I & II) and jointing etc. complete including cost of all specials for

jointing of pipes sun and safeda to be used for making joint perfectly

watertight including taxes and duties etc. complete. (32mm diameter)

&



&



&


263



Scope:

Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark of specified diameter with screwed sockets, Joints & necessary G.I. fittings such as

sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers, enlarger, plugs, etc. including electric resistance welding (ERW), fixing with clamps and all

connected works such as excavation, drilling holes in wall, slabs, backfilling &

making good the damages.

Material:

The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified and shall

comply with I.S.1239-1973 and 1969 for the specified type. The specified

diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of the bore pipes. The fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged shall not be used. For the

firefighting works, the C Class pipes and accessories shall be used.

Anti-Corrosive Protection on Under Ground Pipe:

Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in

ground. This corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt

component supported on fabric of organic of organic or inorganic fiber and minimum 4mm. thick and conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of

practice for coating and wrapping of underground mild steel pipe line. Before

application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall be

removed with the help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be applied over

the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed to dry until the solvent

evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and tape shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection tape shall then be

wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and bounded completely to the pipe.

There shall be no air pocket or bubble beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be

15mm and 250mm. shall be left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit

installation and welding. This area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipe

line is installed.

The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface of the


264

pipe shall be pre-heated until it is warm to touch and traces of moisture are

removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to dry. No joint shall

be located in the thickness of the walls. If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall be filled smooth and any

obstruction in the bore shall be entirely eliminated. The rate includes wastage

in cutting etc. When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with

standard bracket, clips or holder bates keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of

the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall horizontally and vertically and

parallel to one another when more than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable. The supporting clips etc. for the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so

as necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into

the walls or slabs, etc. to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps, etc. after fixing

of the pipes, clamps etc. these shall be neatly made good.

Pressure Testing:

All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10 kg/cm2 for a

period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during

the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the

same manner. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be

securely capped. Pressure gauges may be capped off during pressure testing

of the installation.


Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized iron fittings with ERW shall be erected on MS angle support with one coat of suitable

primer and two coats of Post Office fire red enamel paint duly tested to 1.5

times of working pressure. Excavating and back filling trenches including

dewatering, cutting through walls, floor etc. and making site good. Laying, jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting pipes, wastage

and threading the ends. At all the road crossings the pipes shall be laid lower

than the crust of the road. During excavation if, any other service pipes

(Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across, these shall be carefully protected

and supported. Any damages done shall be made good. The pipe shall be

laid on a well compacted bed in the trench. The trench after laying the pipe shall be refilled except at the joints in layers and manually rammed. Care shall


265

be taken to see that no earth, etc. gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be

kept raised by about 5cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning

of murum, good earth, or sand shall be provided for the pipe in case of trench through rock. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after satisfactory

testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be disposed of

satisfactorily without causing nuisance.


Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe laid

complete with fittings, clamps etc. as specified. The lengths shall be measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the pipes and fittings

correct up to a cm.

22.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 75/80 mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV

&

23.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 100

mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV

&

24.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 150 mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV

&

25.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 200 mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV

Scope:

Supplying & installing cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 75/80mm. dia confirming to IS: 13095 having cast iron body. FG 220

Nitrite rubber replaceable seat with Moulded “O” ring, C.I. powder

coated disc flow control complete & instead to 1.5 times of working

pressure in an approved manner.

Material:

Body: Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron Carbon steel.


266

Disc: a) Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron carbon steel, b) Stainless steel

Gun metal c) Aluminium bronze

Shaft: a) Stainless steel b) Carbon steel Aluminium bronze Nickel copper

alloy

Seating ring Seal retaining ring: a) Stainless steel, b) Gun metal

aluminium bronze deposited metal suitable for duty or resilient material.

Seat: Elastomers

Shaft bearing seals: Manufacturer’s standards suitable for duty.

Internal fastenings: Stainless steel

External bolting: Carbon steel: tensile strength 390n/mn or MPa


The double flange butterfly valve shall be fitted with provided flange,

gaskets. Nut, bolts etc. to be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers,

spring washers, check nuts as required with proper alignment so as to

be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools and plants.



26.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange NRV of size 80 mm dia.

As per specification NO FF-VL/NRV

&



&



Scope:

Supplying & installing double flange NRV of specified diameter conforming to IS: 5312 (Part-1), ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal working parts


267

with nut bolts, gaskets etc.and tested to 1.5 times of working pressure in an

approved manner.

Material:

Body, cover, door, bearing holder: Grey cast iron

Hinge pin, door pin and door suspension pin: Stainless steel

Body seat rings: Leaded tin bronze

Door face ring: Leaded tin bronze

Bearing bushes/Bearing block: Leaded tin bronze

Plugs for hinged pin/Air release plug: Leaded tin bronze

Bolts: Carbon steel

Nuts: Carbon steel

Gaskets: Rubber

Hinges: Grey cast iron

P N Rating and Test Pressure:

S.No. PN Rating Test for Test Pressure

(Gauge)MPs

1 PN 1.6 Body

Seat

1.5

1.0


The double flange NRV shall be fitted to pie with provided flange, gaskets, and

nut bolts etc. accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required with roper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary

labour and required tools and plants.



29.0 Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of size 75/80 mm dia with

strainer for negative suction as per specification No. FF-VL/FV

&


268

30.0 Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of size 150 mm dia with

strainer for negative suction as per specification No. FF-VL/FV

Material:

Housing, seat discs and disc plates: Grey cast iron

Hinge pins and disc guide: High tensile Stainless Steel bars

Strainers: a) Grey cast iron, b) Galvanized steel

Disc faces: a) Vegetable tanned leather (Min. 3 mm. thick), b) Leaded

tin bronze, c) Natural rubber (with reinforcement of cotton canvas), d)

Synthetic rubber (with reinforcement of cotton canvas)

Flange jointing nature: a) Compressed fibre board or rubber minimum

1.5 mm thick. The fibre board shall be impregnated with chemically

neutral oil and shall have a smooth and hard surface. b) Compressed

asbestos fibre.


The footwall with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets,

nut bolts to be erected at required position and fitted firmly to pipe with

proper alignment so as the joints should be leak proof with shellac and

other material required including necessary labour and required tools

and plants



31.0 Supplying and installing 100 mm dia end line strainer for +ve suction

as per specification No. FF-VL/ELS

Material: Body: Cast Iron

Strainer screen: Stainless steel/Brass screen of 1mm thick perforated

sheet with 3 mm diameter holes. Flange: Cast iron / M.S. sheet


End line strainer with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange,

gaskets, nut bolts etc, and to be erected at the end of suction pipe,

including labour and required tools and plants.


269



32.0 Supplying & Installing Pressure Gauge of 100 mm dia 0-300 PSI or 0-

21 Kg per cm square fitted with 12/15 mm dia. Pad cock valve & G.I

pipe, elbow etc as per requirement in approved manner As per

specification NO FF-FFA/PG

Scope:

Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25mm Φ made from

G.M. with necessary G.I. coupling for fixing on top of Air vessel or on

wet riser.

Material:

Air release Valve: Gun metal

Coupling: G.I.


Air release Valve with necessary GI coupling shall be fixed on top of wet

riser with required labour, tools etc.



33.0 Supplying & Installing danfoss Pressure Switches with 12/15 mm dia.

isolation valve & G.I nipple, elbow etc as per requirement in an

approved manner As per specification NO FF-FFA/PS Specification No

(FF-FFA/PS)

Scope:

Supplying and installing pressure switch with 12/15mm Φ isolation

valve, G.I. nipple, elbow etc. in an approved manner.

Material:

Pressure switch: Brass metal

Isolation valve, elbow, Nipple: G.I.


270


The Pressure switch with G.I. isolation valve, and necessary G.I. fittings

(elbow, Nipple) fitted with required labour, tools. Etc.



34.0 Supplying & Installing ss single outlet hydrant valve fitted with necessary

accessories complete As per specification NO FF-VL/HV

Scope:

Supplying and installing S S single outlet, hydrant valve Morris pattern,

oblique type, conforming to IS:5290, ISI mark, with blanks cap and M.S.

or G.I. chain in an approved manner.

Material:

Valve Body, bonnet, stop valve, Check nut, female outlet:

Bronze/Aluminium alloy or Stainless Steel.

Hand Wheel: M.S. or C.I. (Black painted)

Spring: Made of phosphor wire

Washer, Gasket: Rubber

Blank Cap: ABS plastic


The hydrant valve shall be connected with provided flange, gaskets, Nut

bolts etc. with use of required tools and plants.

The water discharge shall be not less than 900 lpm for single head and

1800 lpm for double head valves at 7kg/cm2



35.0 Supplying & Erecting M/S/CRCA cabinet for housing Floor Hydrant

Valve, hose pipe, hose reel & branch Pipe Size 1000mm x 736 mm x


271

736mm) made from 16 swg sheet & angle iron 25 mm x 25 mm x 4

mm having front doors with viewing glass(8"x6") & locking arrangement

with necessary fixing material such as bidding etc duly painted in post

box red colour.

&

36.0 Supplying fire fighting RRL hose pipe 63 mm dia 15 mtr. in length fitted

with necessary accessories complete As per specification NO FF-

FFA/RRL

Supplying fire fighting R.R.L. Hose pipe, conforming to IS: 636 (Type-B)

15 metre length, fitted with male and female G.M. coupling conforming

to IS:993, with ISI mark.

Material:

Hose pipe material: Rubber lined woven jacketed & 63mm in dia., the

lining and the cover shall be of uniform thickness, reasonably concentric

and free from air blisters, porosity and splits. The tensile shall be

minimum 5.00 MPa and shall withstand pressure of 10.2kg/cm2

Coupling: Gun metal /S S


Hose pipe of 15 metre length with male and female coupling shall be

connected as per direction.



Supplying SS branch Pipe 63 mm Ø fitted with 20 mm dia detachable

hexagonal nozzle (FF-FFA/NZ)

Scope:

Supplying S S branch pipe of 63 mm diameter with specified length

fitted with 20 mm diameter detachable hexagonal nozzle confirming to

IS: 903, ISI mark.


272

Material:

Nozzle : S S


S S hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants including

necessary labour, material etc.



37.0 Supplying & installing wall mounted swinging Hose reel drum fitted with

19 mm dia 30 m high pressure polypropylene (polyhose) long fitted with

necessary accessories complete as per specification no FF- FFA-HRD

Material:

Hub and sides: Aluminum Alloy/Mild steel/ Aluminum sheet Wall

Bracket: Cast iron / Mild steel.

Hose tube (20 mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2, (Nominal

internal dia) as per IS- 12585

Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090 Stop Valve (Ball Valve) :

Gun metal.


The Wall Mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle,

gate valve, shall be connected on M.S. bracket with provided flange,

gaskets, Nut bolts etc. with use of required tools and plants. The water

flow rate shall be not less than 24 LPM and the range of jet shall be not

less than 6 metre.

38.0 Supplying GM chrome plated Nozzle 19 mm dia. Complete as per

specification NO FF- FFA/NZ

Material:

Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal Method of Construction:


273

Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants

including necessary labour, material, etc.



39.0 Supplying GM branch pipe of 63 mm dia. Fitted with 20 mm dia.

Detachable hexagonal nozzle as per specification NO FF- FFA/NZ

Material:

Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal Method of Construction:

Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants

including necessary labour, material, etc.



40.0 Supplying & Installing Fire Brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150

mm dia for supplying water to wet riser system as per specification No

FF-FFA/SMC

Scope:

Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of

150 mm 0, G.I. 'C' class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100 mm 'T' outlet with

100 mm 0 flange, fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. male inlets with spring type

NRV for supplying water to Wet riser.

Material:

Pipe material: G.I. 'C' class Branching Inlet: Gun metal Male Inlet: Gun

metal

Non Return Valve: As per (FF- VL/NRV) above.


In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4

way 63 mm diameter collecting head shall be provided and connected

with each riser/down comer and the ring main with non return valve


274

and with provided butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a

place where fire brigade tender can reach. The whole unit is placed in

provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with open-able glass

cover.


Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis

41.0 Supplying & Installing Fire Brigade Header of 150 mm dia for supplying

water in fire tank as per specification No FF-FFA/FBC

Scope:

Supplying and installing fire brigade Header pf 150mm Φ G.I. “C” class

pipe having 2 Nos. of 100mm ‘T’ outlet with 100mm Φ flange, fitted

with 2 Nos. of G.M. fire branching inlet connection, each consisting of 2

Nos. 63mm dia. G.M. male inlet for supplying water in fire tank.

Material:

Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class (Heavy duty)

Branching inlet: Gun metal

Male inlet: Gun metal


In case under ground storage tank is not approachable by fire tenders, a 4 way 63mm diameter instantaneous male inlet connection is

provided at street level and connected to UG tank with 1 meter length of

150mm. diameter underground pipe. The whole unit shall be placed in

provided MS box made of 2mm thick MS sheet with openable glass

cover.




275

42.0 Supplying & erecting 20/25 mm dia. G.M air release cock with

necessary G.I coupling to be fitted on top of air vessel or on wet riser as

per specification No - FF-FFA/ARV

Scope:

Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25mm Φ made from

G.M. with necessary G.I. coupling for fixing on top of Air vessel or on

wet riser.

Material:

Air release Valve: Gun metal

Coupling: G.I.


Air release Valve with necessary GI coupling shall be fixed on top of wet

riser with required labour, tools etc.



43.0 Supplying and Installing G.M gate Valve of size 20/25 mm dia. as per

specification No.FF-VL/GV Specification No (FF- VL/GV) Scope:

Supplying & installing gun metal gate valve of specified diameter having

threaded ends, conforming to IS: 778, ISI mark, along with G.I.

threaded nipple.

Material:

Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut,

stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body seat

rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass Stem, hinge pin

and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c) Forged Brass

Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel Nut bolts: Mild steel


276

Hand wheel: Cast iron Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre Gland

packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos Spring: Phosphor bronze wire

Seating ring: Synthetic rubber Method of Construction: The Gate Valve

shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and Nut bolts etc,

accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required

with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour

and required tools and plants.



44.0 Supplying & erecting 15 mm (1/2")dia. NBCM body chrome finished

quartzite bulb sprinkler having 68 degree C fixed temperature rating

with deflector disc of conventional construction as per specification No-

FF-SPR

Scope:

Supplying and erecting 15 mm (1/2") dia. NBCM Body chrome finished,

pendent type quartzoid bulb sprinkler.

Material:

Chrome plated sprinkler bulb having 680 / 780C fixed temperature

rating UL listed.


The sprinklers bulb shall be fitted to sprinklers pipe line and tested for

required pressure.



45.0 Supplying and Installing G.M gate Valve of size 50 mm dia. as per

specification No.FF-VL/GV

Scope:


277

Supplying & installing gun metal gate valve of specified diameter having

threaded ends, conforming to IS: 778, ISI mark, along with G.I.

threaded nipple.

Material:

Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut,

stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body seat

rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass Stem, hinge pin

and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c) Forged Brass

Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel Nut bolts: Mild steel

Hand wheel: Cast iron

Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre

Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos Spring: Phosphor bronze

wire

Seating ring: Synthetic rubber Method of Construction:

The Gate Valve shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and

Nut bolts etc, accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts

as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including

necessary labour and required tools and plants.



46.0 Supplying & Erecting D.C.P type fire extinguishers 5 Kg capacity

cartridge type with gun metal cap, 150 gm CO2 gas cartridge, powder,

& bracket confirming to IS2171-1985 & complete erecting with

necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat with nuts & bolts

grouted in wall complete

Scope:


278

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& Erecting D.C.P

type fire extinguishers 5 Kg capacity cartridge type with gun metal cap,

150 gm CO2 gas cartridge, powder, & bracket confirming to IS2171-

1985 & complete erecting with necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm

M.S flat with nuts & bolts grouted in wall complete

47.0 Supplying & Erecting CO2 type fire extinguishers 4.5 Kg capacity

cartridge type confirming to IS2878 & complete erecting with necessary

clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat with nuts & bolts grouted in wall

complete.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & Erecting CO2 type

fire extinguishers 4.5 Kg capacity cartridge type confirming to IS2878 &

complete erecting with necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat

with nuts & bolts grouted in wall complete


Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis

48.0 Providing round bottom fire bucket of 9 liters capacity as per IS:2546

made out of 24 gauge G.I sheet with extra handle at bottom duly

painted white inside & red outside with FIRE mark ,on provided

stand/Wall hook.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide round bottom fire

bucket of 9 liters capacity as per IS:2546 made out of 24 gauge G.I

sheet with extra handle at bottom duly painted white inside & red

outside with FIRE mark ,on provided stand/Wall hook

49.0 Providing floor mounted stand for keeping 4 Nos of Fire buckets 1500

mm in length, 900 mm in height frame made out of 30x30x4 mm angle

iron with cross support for legs, welded with 4 hooks & duly painted with

one coat of red lead & two coats of siler paint.


279

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide floor mounted stand

for keeping 4 Nos of Fire buckets 1500 mm in length, 900 mm in

height frame made out of 30x30x4 mm angle iron with cross support

for legs, welded with 4 hooks & duly painted with one coat of red lead &

two coats of siler paint.



50.0 Supplying and erecting XLPE armored cable 2 core 1.5 sq.mm. copper

conductor complete erected on wall/ ceiling as per specification No.

CB-LT/CU.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide and erecting XLPE

armored cable 2 core 1.5 sq.mm. copper conductor complete erected

on wall/ ceiling as per specification No. CB-LT/CU



51.0 150mm dia , installation control valve assembly comprising of vertical

wet alarm valve, 150mm dia, C.I. Sluice valve, hydraulic alarm motor &

gong, 15mm dia, test valve, 50 mm dia drain valve and all necessary

trimming connection including 2 Nos. pressure gauge as per

manufacturer's catalogue (UL/FM/LPC/TAC listed/approved)

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide150mm dia , installation control valve assembly comprising of vertical wet alarm valve, 150mm dia, C.I. Sluice valve, hydraulic alarm motor & gong, 15mm dia, test valve, 50 mm dia drain valve and all necessary trimming connection including 2 Nos. pressure gauge as per manufacturer's catalogue (UL/FM/LPC/TAC listed/approved.


280



52.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control

panel along with PA with battery back up for 8 hours normal operation

and 15 minutes alarm operation. Panel to have number of loops based

on quantity of detectors mentioned in the respective item below. These

should be expandable to double the capacity. The control panel, battery

charger etc. shall be UL listed. The panel shall be 5 loop capacity & it

shall be capable to extend up to 5 loops. The panel shall be consisting

with 80 character LCD display and 485 for networking. Cost shall be

included for required control module & control relay modules (located

Security room)

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& installing of

Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control panel along with PA with

battery back up for 8 hours normal operation and 15 minutes alarm

operation. Panel to have number of loops based on quantity of detectors

mentioned in the respective item below. These should be expandable to

double the capacity. The control panel, battery charger etc. shall be UL

listed. The panel shall be 5 loop capacity & it shall be capable to extend

up to 5 loops. The panel shall be consisting with 80 character LCD

display and 485 for networking. Cost shall be included for required

control module & control relay modules (located Security room)

Specification. Max. PSU Rating 220VA total, comprising: Battery

Charger: 1 Amp Internal & External Loads

General System Load: 2.25A @ 24V nominal Loop Load: 2.50A

Standby Batteries 24V sealed dry type & maintenance free batteries

Minimum Capacity: 2x 12V 7Ah Maximum Capacity: 2x 12V 24Ah

Dimensions (mm) 500 x 500 x 195 Weight 20 kg without batteries


281

Environmental Operating Limits Temperature: 0°C to +40°C Humidity:

85% non-condensing (maximum)

Construction Sheet steel painted, sealed to IP32 Cable Entry 24 x 20mm

knock-outs in top of cabinet 24 x 20mm knock-outs in bottom of cabinet

Loop Capacity 1 to 5 Loops expandable 460mA per loop Maximum

Apollo, Nittan and Hochiki Protocols:

Max. 126 devices (detectors and modules) per loop

Morley-IAS and System Sensor Protocols:

Max. 99 sensor and 99 module addresses per loop

Note: Multiple sensor protocols cannot be used in the panel

simultaneously. Zones Up to 20 zone with individual LED indicators.

Expandable to 40 or 80 individual LED indicators. A maximum 200 can

be programmed with up to 120 software zones with no LED indication.

Internal Sounder Intermittent buzzer (fault condition) High pitched

continuous buzzer (fire condition) External Outputs

Sounder Outputs 2 programmable outputs. Open and short circuit

monitoring. 1A maximum per output.

Auxiliary Relays 1 fault and 1 fire relay voltage free, changeover outputs

Contacts rated at 24V AC/DC, 1A, 0.6 PF maximum. User Controls

SOUND ALARMS, SILENCE/ RESOUND, MUTE BUZZER,

ACCEPT, SYSTEM RESET Programming Controls

Alphanumeric multi-level keypad with 15 keys and 5 control keys: YES,

NO, CHANGE, ENTER and SHIFT LED type general panel status

indicators

FIRE, FAULT, ACKNOWLEDGED, DISABLEMENT, TEST, SOUNDER

FAULT, DELAYED MODE, RELAYS DISABLED, EARTH FAULT, SYSTEM

/CPU FAULT, SOUNDERS

DISABLED, ALARMS SILENCED, SUPPLY FAULT, POWER. LED type zone

Indicators (for 20 zones)

FIRE, FAULT/TEST/DISABLED


282

Display

4x40-character LCD alphanumeric display with back-light. Serial

Interface 3 serial ports with connections for optional RS485 or RS232

plug-in communication cards.

Networking

Maximum 99 panels can be networked using a Master network &

connected Sub net Works.



53.0 Supplying & installing of Repeater panel located at main entrance gate.

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide repeater panel The

Morley-IA5 repeaters are compact remote control units for Morley-IAS

intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels. These units, along

with other I/O peripheral devices and the external printer further

enhance the flexibility and functionality of our fire alarm control panel

range. The repeaters provide an extension to the operation of the fire

alarm control panel. There are two types available - passive with

indications only and no controls, or active with both controls and

indicators. Both display the operational state of the control panel using

the 80 character LCD display and the 7 LED status indicators. In

addition to the general status indicators the Active repeater is fitted with

key operated "Access Enable" switch for the control functions. Individual

buttons are provided for System Reset, Mute, Accept, Sound Alarms,

Silence/Re-sound Alarms and Self test. Thus enabling control functions

to be duplicated in strategic locations around the installation.

The Active repeater includes an integral self test sequence guiding the

operator through a preset sequence to test the functionality of the

control buttons, key-switch and display indicators. Each repeater is

connected to the Morley-IAS fire alarm control panels using the RS485


283

peripheral data port (Port D) as shown in the schematic overleaf. A

maximum of 31 active repeaters can be connected to the peripheral

data port. The ZX fire alarm control panel supervises the connection

between itself and the repeater, proving the integrity of the cabling and

indicating faults both on the repeater and the fire alarm control panel.

Passive repeaters are not supervised, but a loss of communication with

the fire alarm control panel will be indicated on the passive repeater.

The repeater requires an external power supply of+24Vdc (nominal) to

operate. Power may be taken from the auxiliary supply of the ZX series

control panel or from any other suitable dc power supply.

Electrical

Operating Voltage: 18 to 32 Vdc

Operating Current: 90mA (Quiescent) 120m (Alarm) Terminals:

Maximum cross section 2.5mm2

LED indicators: Fire, Fault, Disables, Accepted, Silenced, Power,

Communications, loss

Extra User Controls: Key switch activated - System Reset, Sound Alarms,

Silence/Resound, Mute, Accept and Self Test.



54.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Photo-Electrical detector

with programmable for timed automatic sensitivity selection with base,

junction box and other accessories as required and detectors shall be UL

listed.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & installation of

Analogue Addressable Photo-Electrical detector with programmable for


284

timed automatic sensitivity selection with base, junction box and other

accessories as required and detectors shall be UL listed.

The Morley-IAS MI-PSE (optical) and MI-ISE (ionization) are analogue,

addressable, low- profile smoke detectors designed for the ZX series

intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels. Because the MI-PSE

and MI-ISE are analogue addressable, the control panel can provide the

operator with a pinpoint description of where the fire is located.

The control panel is capable of not only knowing the detector's location

but exactly how much smoke is in the chamber of the detector. The

detector may be set for different sensitivity settings appropriate to the

environment of its location. The MI-ISE intelligent ionization sensor

incorporates a unique single-source chamber designed to respond

quickly and dependably to a broad range of fires. The MI-PSE intelligent

optical sensor's unique sensing chamber is designed with superior signal

to noise ratio. The optical chamber is engineered to sense the presence

of smoke produced by a wide range of combustion sources.

The MI-ISE and MI-PSE plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify

installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows

maintenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without using a

ladder Mechanical

Dimensions (Height): 43 mm (installed in B501) 102 mm diameter

Weight: 104 gr. (4 oz)

Operating temperature: - 10°C to 60°C Relative humidity: 10% to 93%

non-condensing electrical

Operating voltage: 15 to 32 Vdc peak Current consumption: Stand by

current: 200 uA @ 24 Vdc LED current: 7 mA @ 24 Vdc ("ON")

Terminals: SEMS screws with clamping plates for up to 2.5 mm2 (13

AWG) wire




285

55.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Heat Detector with

programmable for timed automatic sensitivity selection with base,

junction box and other accessories as required and detectors shall be UL

listed.

Scope:


Analogue Addressable Heat Detector with programmable for timed

automatic sensitivity selection with base, junction box and other

accessories as required and detectors shall be UL listed. The Morley-IAS

range of intelligent thermal detectors are used with the ZX series

intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels to measure thermal

levels caused by a fire and report the analogue level of the thermal

measurement to the control panel. The use of analogue information

provides significant benefits to the end user, installer and serviceman in

ways which are not possible with a conventional type system. Since this

detector is also addressable, it will help to quickly locate fire during its

early stages.

The MI-FHSE and MI-HTSE are fixed temperature analogue addressable

sensors employing low mass thermostats and microprocessor

technology for fast response and linear temperature sensing. Their

linear response allows these sensors to be used to signal temperatures

over the range of 58°C (Class A1S) to 78°C

(Class BS).

The MI-RHSE uses the same thermostat and microprocessor technology

to provide an alarm when the rate of rise in temperature exceeds

10°C/minute (typical) or if the temperature exceeds a threshold of 58°C

(Response Class A1R).

All of the thermal detectors have two integral alarm LEDs which provide

local visual indication of the sensor status. These LED's provide a dual

function. In the event on an alarm, they are switched ON continuously,


286

and can also be programmed to either blink when polled by the panel

or remain off during normal conditions mechanical

Dimensions (Height): 51 mm installed in B501 Weight: 170 gr. (6 oz)

Operating temperature: - 10°C to 60°C Humidity: 10% to 93% non-

condensing

Compatible bases: B501,B524IEFT, B524RLY Figure 1 - MI-FHSE fitted

in B501 base. electrical Operating voltage: 15 to 32 Vdc

Alarm Current (LED on): 7mA maximum Stand by current: 200 uA

maximum Terminals: SEMS screws with clamping plates for upto 2.5

mm2 (13 AWG) wire



56.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Fault isolator module

capable of monitoring shorted loop circuit and automatically restore

communication when shorted conditions are corrected.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & installing of

Analogue Addressable Fault isolator module capable of monitoring

shorted loop circuit and automatically restore communication when

shorted conditions are corrected.

The Morley-IAS loop isolator module is used on the Morley-IAS

intelligent fire alarm control panels to protect the system against wire-to-

wire short circuits on the analogue addressable loop wiring. The fault

isolator modules should be placed between groups of sensors on the

loop wiring to protect the loop if a short circuit fault occurs. If a short

circuit fault occurs, the two isolators located either side of the short

circuit fault will automatically sense the voltage drop, open their switches

and remove the devices from the rest of the loop. If the line voltage then

rises above a fixed threshold, indicating that the short circuit fault is


287

removed, then the isolator module will automatically restore the power

to the isolated group of devices.

The MI-DISO isolator uses a unique mechanical design allowing each

module to be mounted either in a wall box or on a DIN rail. Irrespective

of the mounting method chosen, the address switch is both visible and

accessible for selection. To help engineers in the maintenance and fault

finding process, both the LEDs and the address switches can be viewed

without having to remove the cover of the mounting box. The LEDs,

being multi colour, provide diagnostic information regarding the status

of the isolator. mechanical

Dimensions (mm) 93 x 94 x 23 (H x W x D) Weight 62g

Operating Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C Humidity 0 to 95% maximum

non-condensing electrical Operating voltage 15 to 30 V dc

Standby current 200uA at 24 V dc maximum Fault detection delay 100

to 400 m S

On resistance 0.065 at 15 V dc maximum Terminal Wire 2.5 mm2

maximum

57.0 Supplying & installing of Horn cum Strobe rated at 82 DBA @ 3m for

Audible annunciation and 75cd flashing at 1 Hz for visual induction.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& installing of Horn

cum Strobe rated at 82 DBA @ 3 m for Audible annunciation and 75cd

flashing at 1 Hz for visual induction. In concept the sounders and

beacons employ technology to maximise sound and light output, focus

sound distribution, simplify installation and maintain high efficiency and

reliability. Easy to install

One simple two stage installation process. Firstly, fix the base

connection plate, terminate the loop wiring and test the wiring.

Secondly, select the output device required (sounder, beacon or

combined sounder beacon) and fit the unit to the base. Easy to adjust


288

Simply twist the unit off it's mounting and re-configure the settings to

pick any of 32 sounder tones at any of 3 volumes. The audio visual

range is an ergonomic and stylish design that complements the Morley-

IAS detection and control panel technologies, providing total alarm

solutions. These solutions are suitable for new and existing installations

from office units to multi¬storey complexes,



58.0 Supplying & installing of Addressable Single action Manual pull station

having an integrally mounted addressable module that monitors and

reports contact status.

Scope:


Addressable Single action Manual pull station having an integrally

mounted addressable module that monitors and reports contact status.

The MI-MCP Series Manual Call Points are designed to provide a

manual alarm interface to Morley IAS's fire alarm control panel.

Installation efficiency, flexibility and compliance with the latest standards

are at the heart of the call point range. The unique 'plug and play'

concept is designed specifically to reduce installation time by using a

terminal block which can be wired during the initial installation cabling

with a link (P102) to provide continuity for testing. During the

commissioning phase,the links are removed and the terminal block is

simply inserted into the connector at the back of the unit. No re-

termination is required.

Both break glass, supplied, and re-settable operating elements(PS230)

can be used in the standard unit. Operation of the resettable element,

as well as being indicated by the units LED, is also indicated by a yellow

strip on the element which becomes visible when activated. With the

addition of a hinged transparent cover (PS200) the element may be


289

protected against accidental operation and may be further protected by

using a cover seal (PS056) which requires breaking in order to operate

the unit The call point uses one of 99 possible addresses which is simply'

dialled in' using the two rotary decade switches on the rear of the unit. A

specialist test key may be inserted into the bottom of the unit to lower

the glass and release the micro-switch and thus mechanical Dimensions:

Semi-flush mounting: 89 x 93 x 27.5 (WxHxD) Surface mounting:

89 x 93 x 59.5 (WxHxD) Weight:

Semi Flush: 110g Surface: 160g IP Rating: IP24D

Operating Temperature: -30°C to +70°C.

Relative Humidity: 0% - 95% non-condensing electrical

Operating Voltage: 15V to 30Vdc max Current Consumption:

Quiescent (without isolator) 260uA Quiescent (with isolator) 360uA

Alarm Current: 6mA (both)



59.0 Supplying & installing of Addressable monitor Module

Scope:


Addressable monitor Module

The MI-DMMI and MI-DMM2I monitor modules are used with the

Morley-IAS intelligent fire alarm control panels to provide a single or

dual input circuit from external devices. Each input is continuously

monitored for normal, open circuit and alarm conditions. Changes to

the status of the input circuits are communicated to the panel where the

appropriate actions may be undertaken. The MI-DMMI requires a single

address and the MIDMM2I two addresses of the ninety-nine possible

module addresses available on a loop. It responds to regularpolling


290

from the control panel indicated by a pulsing LED every successful

communication.

The MI-DMMI and MI-DMM2I use a unique mechanical design allowing

each module to be mounted either in a wall box (M200E-SMB) or on a

DIN rail (using M200E-DIN). Irrespective of the mounting method

chosen, the address switch is both visible and accessible for selection. To

help engineers in the maintenance and fault finding process, both the

LEDs and the address switches can be viewed without having to remove

the cover of the mounting box. The LEDs, being multi colour, provide

diagnostic information regarding the status of the output. For ease of

installation, testing and maintenance, the field wiring terminals are of a

plug in design. mechanical

Dimensions (H x W x D) 93 x 94 x 23 (mm) Weight MI-DMMI 100g

MI-DMM2I 110g Operating Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C Humidity 0

to 95% maximum non-condensing electrical Operating voltage 15 to 30

Vdc Standby current

MI-DMMI

No comms 310uA at 24 Vdc maximum 1 comms every 5 seconds with

LED blink 510uA at 24 Vdc maximum

MI-DMM2I

No comms 340uA at 24 Vdc maximum 1 comms every 5 seconds with

LED blink 600uA at 24 Vdc maximum Terminal Wire 2.5 mm2

maximum



60.0 Supplying, installing, testing, and commissioning of FM Approved

stainless steel corrugated flexible pipe (hose) for dropping sprinklers

below false ceiling ,pipe shall be 16 bar pressure rating and 1000mm


291

long 25mm dia with union /reducer collar, supporting material, clamps

etc. as required.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide installing, testing,

and commissioning of FM Approved stainless steel corrugated flexible

pipe (hose) for dropping sprinklers below false ceiling ,pipe shall be 16

bar pressure rating and 1000mm long 25mm dia with union /reducer

collar, supporting material, clamps etc. as required.

The Sprinkler Flexible Hose system shall be ready to use assembly to fit

a sprinkler head in desired location in a suspended ceiling. It easily

positions the sprinkler in the centre of the ceiling tile at a correct height.

Installation can be done in 10 to 15 minutes and does not require any

special preparations. The flexible hose system is a complete unit in itself

which includes a corrugated stainless steel flexible drop with nipple,

reducer, square bar and brackets, which are fitted to the ceiling tile

support rails tolocate and secure the sprinkler in the correct position.

Not only does this reduce the installation time but also makes the

installation process a 'mess-free' activity by eliminating cutting and

threading activities on site. The structure of threaded connection of the

fitting is a limited thread (which cannot be over-tightened), and the

packing seat at the Reducer and Nipple is tapered to 45°. This prevents

leakage caused by damaged packing due to over tightening by an

unskilled installer.

No. Description Material Specification

1 Nipple Carbon Steel Zinc Plated

2 Flexible AISI304

3 Square Bar Mild Steel Zinc Plated

4 Bracket Mild Steel Zinc Plated

5 Reducer Carbon Steel Zinc Plated




292

61.0 Supply & fixing of approved type rosette plates (Recessed type in two

piece) for sprinklers false ceiling area. The Rosette shall be fabricated by

M.S. plate of 2mm thick and the finish shall be powder coated and color

shall be as approved by architects /clients.

Scope:

Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& fixing of approved

type rosette plates (Recessed type in two piece) for sprinklers false ceiling

area. The Rosette shall be fabricated by M.S. plate of 2mm thick and the

finish shall be powder coated and color shall be as approved by

architects /clients.



62.0 Providing and laying in position plain cement concrete using granite or

black trap graded metal including mixing in a mechanically operated

mixer. a) In 1:3:6 proportion.

Scope: Under this item the contractor shall have to provide and laying in

position plain cement concrete using granite or black trap graded metal

including mixing in a mechanically operated mixer, a) In 1:3:6

proportion.


Executed quantity shall be measured on Cubic meter basis.

63.0 Supplying & installing one piece molded HDP/Fiber water tank. For -ve

suction only, having capacity 1000 ltrs. Fitted with necessary accessories

complete as per specification No.FF-Ffa/PT.

Scope:

Supplying and Installing One piece Moulded hdp /Fibre water tank of

required capacity with necessary plumbing material on provided M.S.

structural supports in an approved manner.


293

Material:

Priming Tank: HDPE/Fiber of good quality material

Gate Valves: As per (FF-VL/GV) above


The priming tank shall be installed on provided M.S. structural supports with 20/25 mm dia. Inlet valve and 50mm dia. Outlet valve with

provided necessary G.I. piping upto delivery of main fire pump before

non-return valve.



64. SOLAR CABELS:

A) SCOPE:

The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, inspection,

testing at works, packing and forwarding of 1100V grade Solar LT XLPE

Power cables.

B) STANDARD:

The Solar cables offered shall conform to the latest revision of relevant

Indian Standard Specifications Some of these standard are list below:

Sr. No.

Indian Standard

Title

1 7098 XLPE insulated electrical cables for working voltages upto 1100V

2 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.

3 5831 PVC insulation & Sheath of Electric Cables.

4 3975 Mild Steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables.

5 2633 Methods of testing weight, uniformity of coating, thickness on hot dip gaivanised articales.


294

Sr. No.

Indian Standard

Title

6 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables-PVC insulated and PVC sheathed.

7 1753 Aluminium conductors for insulators cables.

C) PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

a) The LT XLPE power cables shall be used outdoors. Directly

burried, through pipes/duct for street lighting works.

b) The cable shall meet the requirement of IS specifications listed

above and the general technical requirement detailed below.

D) GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:

a) The cables shall be brand new. It Shall be suitable for laying in

trenches, ducts, conduits & underground buried installation.

b) All LT XLPE power cables shall be 1100V grade with Cu.

Conductor, XLPE insulated, inner sheathed, armoured & over all

PVC sheathed.

c) The construction of the conductors shall be stranded for alu.

Cables, Conductors of nominal area of 25sq.mm shall be

circular. These above may be circular or oval shaped.

d) The core insulation shall be with XLPE compound applied over

the conductor by extrusion duly & shall conform to the type A

compound of IS-5831.

e) The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by

extrusion and shall be of XLPE confirming to the requirements of

type ST1 PVC compound. The extruded inner sheath shall be of

uniform thickness of 0.5 mm upto 16 sq.mm 0.8mm upto

120sq.mm & 1.0mm above 120sq.mm conductor size.


295

f) The armouring shall be by single round galvanised steel wires for

cable diameter upto 13mm and glavanised steel strips for cables

diameters above 13mm.

g) The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion and

shall be of PVC compound. Suitable chemicals shall be added to

the PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable

against rodent and termite attack.

h) The dimensions of the insulation armour and outer sheath

materials shall be governed by IS specification.

E) TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:

i) TESTING AND EQUIPMENTS:

All equipment’s before installation or site shall be tested and such results

needs to be submitted to the corporation. Nothing shall absolve the

contractor from performing any test that the contract has been called up

by the corporation.

ii) MANUFACTURERS TESTS:

The contractors shall specifically perform all test such as routine test,

test, type test on all equipment’s in the presence of CIDCO officials. All

cost incidental to such test shall be deemed to have been included in the

specific item of that equipment and no extra charge will be payable.

iii) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS:

All test required or called by the local electricity supply authority,

Government officials and as laid in relevant Indian Standard

Specification, Rules Regulations and Acts shall be strictly complied.

iv) COMMISSIONING:

The contractor shall obtain the written permission or sanction for

commissioning of the electrical equipment’s if required from I.E. and L


296

department of Government of Maharashtra. All cost, visit fees etc.

incidental for obtaining the sanction shall be to the contractors account.

F) TESTS & CERTIFICATE:

Three sets of as built drawing with original tracing which shows the location of

poles with proper numbering as per direction of Engineer. The route and size

of cables, RCC pipe, GI pipe along with the schematic diagrams of the

scheme. Voltages at the initial point and the farthest point from the source and

currents in three phases at supply sources. Current drawn by each supply and

out going cable at junction box. The agency will arrange day to day supervision

during the work and maintain the work diary to this effect.

After completion of the work the agency will obtain the Inspection and

clearance report duly signed from concern authorities and submit the same to

Engineer for charging the installation. The agency will also be responsible for

liaisoning with the concern authorities in this regards without any extra cost.

G) RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR:

The contractor is responsible for following:

Liaison work with the CIDCO Civil Design in respect of arranging power shut

downs, obtaining line alignment, tap point location, supervision by the

representative, final commissioning and handing over

Liaison work with the Electrical Inspector in respect of preparation and

approval of drawings, arranging site visit and obtaining permission energize

the line.

Including available service of experienced electrical supervisor at the site to

supervise the work being done on the site for entire tenure of the contract.


297

H) GENERAL:

1. Even thought the specifications of the material to be used for the subject

work under this contract is specified in the tender document it will be the

responsibility of the successful agency to obtain the necessary approval

to the specification of each and every item from Engineer before starting

the execution of work and complete the work in accordance with the

specifications approved by Engineer without any extra cost.

2. The work shall conform to relevant Indian Standard, Indian Electricity

Acts. and requirement of local electricity board.

3. For supervision, contractor must depute qualified electrical engineer with

sufficient experience for day to day supervision of the work in co-

ordination with CIDCO as per the instruction of Engineer.

4. The contractor shall employ only experienced and licensed

Electricians/Wireman for the work. Only licensed electrical contractors

will be allowed to work.

5. When the installation is complete, the same shall be tested as per I.E.

code I.E. Regulations in front of Engineer and MEDA authorities and the

certified reports should be submitted to Engineer in three sets.

6. The contractor shall carry out all minor civil works connected with

electrical works. The contractors shall repair and make good damage

caused to the roads, footpaths, central verge or any civil structure while

carrying out the electrical works without any extra cost and should also

subject obtain and submit the clearance certificate from concern

authority for completing the necessary repairing work.

7. The contractor shall follow guidelines for off grid solar application given

by MNRE, GOI.

8. Contractor has to filled up Annexure – 3 & Annexure – 4 & submitted

along with Tender.


298

I) ESSENCE OF CONTRACT:

Following given points are the essence of contract for the subject work and the

successful agency will be responsible for completing the same without any extra

cost.

The successful agency has to carry out the details survey of site regarding the

scope of work and co-ordinate with the Civil agency/CIDCO Civil department

for obtaining various data for designing the structure for Solar PV panel before

execution of the work. The successful agency has to get the Only after due

approval from Engineer, agency should start the execution of work.

65.0 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

1. FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

General:

Fire safety in building has become very important consideration in construction

and maintenance. A normal office building has fire load in the form of large quantity of papers and furnishing. Buildings like Hospitals, Laboratories,

Auditorium, Libraries, and Museum etc. require fire safety provisions by virtue

of their type of occupancy and importance irrespective of their height. The

design and installation of a fire fighting system is of utmost importance. The

fire fighting installation on completion will have to be got cleared from the

local fire fighting authorities (Fire Service) for its efficacy, suitability and

usability by the Fire Service in the event of a fire.

The contractor should have valid license from Directorate of Maharashtra Fire

Services in relation to:

a) Fire fighting system installation such as Hydrant, Sprinkler, Pumping etc.

b) Detection and fire suppression system.

The design of fire fighting system for a building shall base as per the provisions in National Building Code of India (Part IV) (Amended upto date) and also

considering the provisions in the Development Control Rules of local

body/authority.


299

The operating pressure of individual hydrant shall be between 5.5 kg/cm2 to

3.5.kg/cm2 and the operating pressure of the furthest level hydrant from main

pump shall be minimum 3.5 kg/cm2

The pipeline will be designed in such a way that it should be possible to get

discharge at any location.

Specifications:

This part deals with the specifications of following pumps.

Specification No(s)

1.1 1. Main Fire Pump (Single Stage) (FF-MFP/SSC)

2. Jockey Pumps (FF-MFP/JP)

3. Booster Pumps (FF-MFP/BP)

Scope:

Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper leveling and

commissioning of Fire service main/jockey/booster pump single/multi stage

having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar to with minimum parameters, confirming to IS:1520 with specified size of suction and

delivery pipes, coupled with squirrel cage. A.C. induction motor. The pump

set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete foundation. The Main

Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum operating pressure of

3.5kg/cm2 at highest and farthest hydrant.

Material:

Pump Body:

The centrifugal pumps shall conform to IS 1520. The pump casing shall be of heavy section close grained cast iron and designed to withstand 1.5 times the

working pressure. The casing shall be provided with shaft seal arrangement as

well as flanges for suction and delivery pipe connections as required.


300

Impeller:

The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined

collars. Wear rings, where fitted to the impeller, shall be of the same material as the impeller. The impeller surface shall be smooth finished for minimum

frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by a key.

Shaft:

The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/C-40 and shall be accurately

machined. The shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibration at any speed within

the operating range of the pump.

Shaft Sleeve:

The shaft sleeve shall be of bronze

Bearing:

The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable for duty

involved. These shall be grease lubricated and shall be provided with grease

nipples /cups. The bearings shall be effectively sealed against leakage of

lubricant of lubricant or entry of dust or water.

Shaft seal:

The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum leakage. A

drip well shall be provided beneath the seal.

Motor:

Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled)

synchronous speed 2900 RPM, suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 Hz AC with IP 55 protection for enclosure, horizontal foot mounted type with

Class-“F” insulation, conforming to IS-325.

Body: Cast iron

Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel

Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.

Winding: Class “F” insulated copper winding.


301

Base plate: Fabricated from Mild steel, foundation bolts etc.

Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.

Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade and

strength.

Hardware: Mild Steel


The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic

hammer or sharp pointed chisel. The teak wood box of appropriate size shall

be placed and filled with cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 x 25 mm stone metal and required size and strength of foundation nut & bolts. The necessary

curing and finishing shall be done in approved manner. The M.S. fabricated

base plate of suitable size and strength should be fixed with anti-vibration

rubber pads. Proper leveling and alignment shall be observed before

tightening of foundation bolts. Both the pump and motor shall be placed on

common base plate frame with perfect alignment, proper leveling. The pump should be connected to pipe line with M.S. flanges, caskets, nut bolt etc. and

shall be checked for the leakages. The coupling guard shall be provided with

nut bolts of required size. The pump shall be tested for 3.5 kg/cm2 pressure at

highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The necessary

test certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be produced. The

motor should have efficiency more than 90% and power factor above 0.80.



1.2 Sluice waive

Specification No. (FF-VL/SV)

Scope:

Supplying and installing cast iron double flange sluice valve of specified

diameter conforming to IS:780, ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal working parts with nut bolts, gaskets etc. and tested to 1.5 times of working

pressure, in an approved manner.


302

Material:

Body: a) Brass b) Leaded tin bronze

Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze b) Forged brass, c) Brass

Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland

nut, gland flange, body seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where

renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass d)

Brass

Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass b) High tensile brass, c) Forged

Brass

Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel.

Nut bolts: Mild steel

Hand Wheel: Cast iron

Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre

Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute b) Asbestos

Spring: Phosphor bronze wire

Seating ring: Synthetic rubber


The double flange sluice valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts, etc. to be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers, spring washers, check

nuts as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including

necessary labour and required tools and plants.

Mode of Measurement;


1.3 Hose Reel

Specification No. (FF-FFA/HRD)


303

Scope:

Supplying and installing wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum as per IS:884

and fitted with 19mm dia. 36 meter long high pressure polypropylene (Polyhose) pipe as per IS: 444 (type III) G.M. chrome plated nozzle and 19 mm

dia. And G.M. gate valve on the inlet pipe with necessary M.S. Bracket for

holding Hose reel drum fitted in position with wall fasteners, in an approved

manner.

Material:

Hub and sides: Aluminium Alloy/Mild steel/Aluminium sheet.

Wall Bracket: Cast iron/Mild steel

Hose tube (20mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2, (Nominal

internal dia) as per IS-12585

Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090

Stop Valve (Ball Valve): Gun metal


The wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle, gate

valve, shall be connected on M.S. bracket with provided flange, gaskets, Nut

bolts etc. with use of required tools and paints. The water flow rate shall be not

less than 24 LPM and the range of jet shall be not less than 6 metre.



1.4 Siamese connection (Fire service inlet)

Specification No. (FF-FFA/SMC)

Scope:

Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150mm

Φ G.I. ‘C’ class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100mm ‘T’ outlet with 100mm Φ flange,

fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. Male inlets with spring type NRV for supplying water

to Wet riser.


304

Material:

Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class

Branching inlet: Gun metal

Male inlet: Gun metal

Non Return Valve: As per (FF-VL/NRV) above


In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4 way

63mm diameter collecting head shall be provided and connected with each

riser/down corner and the ring main with non return valve and with provided butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a place where fire brigade

tender can reach.

The whole unit is placed in provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with

open-able glass cover.



1.5 Heat detector

Specification No. (FF-FAS-HD)

Scope:

Supplying, erecting, and testing heat detector with base erected on 16 gauges

M.S. sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75 mm size duly painted.

Material:

Heat detector: UL listed /LPCB marked with 3600 blinking LED & having 680

C/780 C fixed temperature.

Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauges

Red Oxide paint: Superior quality

Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour


305

Hardware: Sheet metal screws

Plug: Plastic


The Heat Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted with

one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc. on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable

with provided glands and making the connection.



1.6 Optical type Photo electric smoke detector

Specification No. (FF-FAS-SD)

Scope:

Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete with base

erected on 16 gauge CRCA/MS sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75mm duly painted.

Material:

Smoke detector: UL listed/UPCB marked

Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauge

Red Oxide paint: Superior quality

Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour

Hardware: Sheet metal screws

Plugs: Plastic


The Smoke Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted

with one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc. on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable

with provided glands and making the connection.


306



1.7 Fire Alarm Control Panel

Local Control Panel

Specification Nos

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FF-FAAS/FACP)

Local control Panel (FF-FAS-LCP)

Scope:

Supplying, erecting, testing & commissioning of Fire Alarm Control Panel with

all accessories.

Material:

Panel: Microprocessor based Conventional Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with necessary Test Certificate from ERTL as per IS 2189-1999 provided

with SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) of suitable battery (2x12V) 24V, 24 AH

capacity maintenance free battery as standby supply to switch over

automatically for a period of 8 hours in case of A.C. supply failure to panel

with 7 AH capacity battery charger, panel shall have following features.

a) Visual zone indication in which fire has emerged

b) Audio alarm devices c) Acknowledge reset and test devices

d) Visual indication (2x20 character LCD display) incorporating following

indications

i) Fire condition

ii) Fault condition

iii) A.C. Pilot indication iv) Low battery indication

v) Blown fuse indication A.C. as well as D.C.

vi) Built in electronic hooters of 2 tone round for fire condition and


307

single tone for fault condition.

vii) Open and short circuit fault

viii) Push button switch for checking each zone.

ix) Push button to disable audio alarm

x) Reset push button.

e) Fire protection and alarm circuit shall have modular design using electronic

plug in type printed circuit boards (PCB) with spare cards.

Method of Installation:

The microprocessor based main fire Alarm control panel designed as per IS

2189-1999 with ERTL Test certificate shall be fixed at accessible place so that

security or fire personal can attend to the fault immediately.

Testing:

The control shall be tested for following features:

1) Alarm cancel Test

2) Reset 1 lamp

3) Fire Test

4) Open Test(for detector & hooter)]

5) Short circuit Test (for detector & hooter)

6) Walk Test(one man test)

7) Sounder Test



1.8 Pill Box (Manual Call Point [MCP]

Specification No. (FF-FAAS/MCP)

Scope:

Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning pill box with break glass, push

button. MCP is manually operated device used to initiate an alarm signal.


308

Material:

Push Button: Plastic

Enclosure: CREAMS with 100/150mm round/square with Glass cover.

Hammer with chain: Brass

Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour.

Hardware: S.M. Screw

Plugs: Plastic


The pill box with break glass cover, push button in circular/square enclosure with push button kept inside per set with a glass outside marked “IN CASE OF

FIRE BREAK GLASS” provided with a small hammer and chain fixed to the pill

box shall be mounted on wall or any other place as directed and provided with

cable entry with suitable terminal inside and painted with two coats of red

oxide and two coats of post office red enamel paint.



1.9 Hooter:

Specification No. (FF-FAAS/HTR)

Scope:

Supply and erecting hooters with CRCA enclosure duly connected to main

amplifier to radiate two tone sounds for public.

Material:

Hooter: Electronic type with 6W output, Line matching transformer

Enclosure: CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation

Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour

Hardware: S.M. Screw


309

Plugs: Plastic

Kitties: Wooden


The electronics hooter with Line matching transformer shall be enclosed in

suitable size perforated CRCA enclosure and installed as per instructions and shall be connected and fixed at suitable site to ensure that the alarm is heard

anywhere in the protected area. The minimum sound level shall be 80 dB.



1.10 Common Auto control Panel

Specification No. (FF-ACP)

1) Mounting : Floor Mounted

2) Type : Floor mounted and cubical compartmentalized type

3) Panel : 14/16 guage CRCA stove enamel

4) Incoming : 200 AMP, 4 Pole MCCB

5) Bus Bar : 4 Strips of Aluminum bars of 250 Amps rating

6) Accessories (Incoming side) : Ammeter 0-250 Amps

: Voltmeter 0-500 Volts

: ASS & Control fuse with VSS

: Phase indicating lights

7) Outgoings : 160 Amps – 1 No. TP MCCB

: 63 Amps – 2 Nos. TP MCCB

8) Power and control wiring : As per IS Code of Electrical

9) Accessories with each MCCB : Single phase preventor


310

(on outgoing side) on starter feeder start/stop button/auto/manual

Button contractor, Local / Remote

Switch ON / OFF PB Ammeter

10) Earthing : 50 x 6 mm GI Strip

11) Other Accessories : Audio visual Alarm with flasher and Hooter and for hydrant pump tripped.

Jockey pump tripped, (both and

standby) Hydrant mains pressure low

and other off normal condition.

1.11 Scope : (Armoured cables)

Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU)

Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting

material Aluminium / Copper), including required material, hardware’s for

erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same through

pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved

method of construction including glands, lugs, etc.

Material:

Cables:

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT and of required construction,

colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No. manufacturer’s name, size, duly

embossed/screen printed at every metre and having the total count of

progressive length in meter at each mark.

Earth wire: Galvanized iron (GI) wire of appropriate gauge

Glands: As per specification

Lugs: As per specification (CB-CL/AL,CB-CL/CU)

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality

enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular

shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing.


311

G.I. Strip: 22.g x 25mm width G.I. Strip.

Clamps : MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size

of 3/6mm thick mild steel having 25/50mm width (as per size of cable),

rounded ends with wooden/resin cast grip for holding the cable.

Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with

identification mark/name embossed/painted with arrangement to tie should be

fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.

Hardware: Sheet Metal (GM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gutties,

etc.


General:

a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed

by Site engineer.


mentioned in Table No.7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with

adequate distance between cables as mentioned. In IS so as to minimize

de-rating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name/mark

at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare earth wire of

appropriate size shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running with the

cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable termination.


Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level

and a plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible

for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of required gauge shall

be run. Cable with G.I. wire shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50 x 8mm SM screws with

plugs/wooden gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be

minimum 450mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially

for stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc. for laying the cable



312


Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be firmly

clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22.g 25mm width of required length fixed to

truss with nuts and bolts.


Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be firmly

clipped by suitable wooden/epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with 25 x 3mm or

50 x 6mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole with nuts and bolts.


While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open end. Cable

shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum 1.0 meter above

G.L.) Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that depth of cable shall not

be less. Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point

at adequate depth.

1.16 Erecting cable in constructed Trench/duct:

Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide lines of IS

1255.


Cable/s shall be laid with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care shall be

taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of cable.


Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running metre per run of

cable.


313

29.0 PLUMBING (PLB)

A) Galvanized Iron Pipes (GP)

1. General

This part of specification deals with the Galvanized Iron pipes of

different Class (Heavy, Medium & Light) used for water supply, or for

any other purpose. The guidelines for the use of pipes are as under.

• Heavy gauge pipes shall be used for delivery line of Submersible pumps

/ Ejecto Jet pumps/Open well submersible pumps.

• Medium gauge shall be used for suction pipe of Centrifugal pumps,

(Except for Centrifugal pumps meant for Firefighting purpose.) and shall

be used enclosure for cables while meant for laying underground at

road crossing, or any other location as directed by engineer in-charge,

etc.

• Light gauge shall be used as enclosure for cables on wall, pole or for

other purpose wherever specified.

2. Scope:

Specification No (CW-PLB/GP)

Supplying and erecting GI Pipes of specified class, with necessary

accessories, (such as: bends, tees, couplings, unions, sockets, enlargers,

reducers, check nuts, plugs, etc) at designated place, having relevant ISI

mark, complete to the satisfaction of the department.

3. Material:

Pipe: The galvanized iron pipes shall comply with IS: 1239—1973 and

1969 for the specified class. The specified diameter of the pipes shall

refer to inside diameter.

Fittings & Accessories: Bends, Tees, Couplings, Unions, sockets, bends,

tees, enlargers, reducers, back nuts, plugs, unions, etc shall made of

galvanized iron and shall comply IS: 1239 – 1973 and 1969

Plumbing material: Hemp, Linseed oil.


314

MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3/6

mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width.

Hardware: MS nuts & bolts of required size and strength, sheet metal

(SM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gitties etc.


4.1 Pipes to be used as Enclosure:

4.1.1 Erection of Pipe on wall:

The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp

edges, burrs, etc. The pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall

be erected on wall in plum, and fixed with required size of MS clamps

on wall with plugs, gitties, etc. When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it

shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder by keeping the pipe

about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall

horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another, when more than

one pipe is to be laid, unless unavoidable the supporting clips, etc. for

the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so as necessary. Holes

cut during construction shall not be left out; they shall be filled and

finished after passing of the pipe through it.

4.1.2 Erection of pipe on pole:

The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp

edges, burrs, etc. The pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall

be erected on pole in plum, and fixed with required size of MS clamps

with MS nuts& bolts of required size and strength. Pole(s), the pipe at the

trench level should be placed at least 30 cm above the cable level for

avoiding damage to the insulation of cable.

1.3 Laying the pipe underground:

The excavation for laying the pipe underground shall be done as

required, and in advance of laying, so as to cause least damage to the


315

trench and least inconvenience to traffic and in other respects. The

trench for laying the pipe shall be excavated to the lines and levels as

directed by the site engineer. The bed shall be made even. Unless

otherwise specified in the special provisions, the excavation shall be

about 30 cm. wide and not less than 45 cm. deep. The trench shall be

excavated through all strata met with. Where necessary, sides may be

shored or sloped. In case rock is met with the section of the trench, the

depth may be slightly reduced but shall be sufficient to receive the pipe

and the cushioning with a safe margin. Dewatering shall be done where

necessary. During excavation, if any, pipes, water mains, cables, etc.

are met, these shall be carefully protected and supported; any damage

done shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost.

4.3 Pipe used for Plumbing purpose:

The required length of pipe shall be machine cut and threaded

(threading shall be done by machine only), without any sharp edges,

burrs, etc. The pipe shall then be properly aligned with the accessory

and tightening by applying hemp, linseed oil, so as to make it leak

proof. During the erection, wherever required, correct accessory shall be

used. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into

the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe through. The necessary clamps,

supports shall be provided wherever required.

5. Mode of Measurement:

Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis, including

the entire accessory. The lengths shall be measured net including the

straight and bends along the center line of the pipes and fittings correct

up to a cm. (i.e per meter)




316

CODES AND STANDARDS

The following codes and standards shall be applicable for continuous performance of

all electrical equipments to be supplied, delivered at site, erected, tested and

commissioning. The electrical equipments offered shall comply to the relevant Indian

Standards Specifications. Fire Insurance Regulations, Tariff Advisory Committee

Regulations, and particular to Indian Electricity Rules in all respect with all its latest

amendments upto date.

For guidelines to the tenderers, few of the Indian Standards are indicated below :-

1. IS:116 - Circuit breakers for AC System.

2. IS:159 - Bubars and Busbars connections.

3. IS:3043 - Code of practice of earthing.

4. IS:10116 - Code of practice for installation of switchgear.

5. IS:10116 - Code of practice for selection,

installation and maintenance of

fuse (upto 650 Volts.)

6. IS:3165 - Potential Transformers.

7. IS:3203 - Climate proofing of electrical

equipments.

8. IS:3427 - Metal enclosed switchgear and

central gear.

9. IS:3419 - Specification for fittings for rigid PVC

non-metallic conduit.

10. IS:3537 - Gas separated relays.

11. IS:3639 - Fittings and accessories for power

Transformer.

12. IS:3837 - Accessories for rigid steel conduits.

13. IS:4064 - Heavy duty Air Break switches and

composite. Switch fuse units for

voltage and exceeding 100V.

14. IS:4064 - Switch fuse units for Industries etc.

15. IS:4237 - General requirements for switchgears

not exceeding 1000 Volts.


317

16. IS:4615 - Switch socket outlet.

17. IS:5133 (Part-I) - Sheet steel boxed.

18. IS:3070 (Part-I) - Lighting Are stores.

19. IS:2034 - L.T. capacitors.

20. IS:192 - Electric power switchgear for indoor

and outdoor installation.

21. IS:PUB 26 - Circuit Breakers.

22. IS:9535 - Specification for conduits for electrical

installation.

23. IS:240 (Part-I & II) - for H.T. insulator of 33KV grade and

above.

24. IS:335 - Insulating Transformer Oil.

25. IS:374 - Ceiling fans.

26. IS:375 - Marking and arrangement for switchgear

boards main connections auxiliary wiring

27. IS:415 - Tungsten filament lamps.

28. IS:692 - Paper insulated cables.

29. IS:694 - PVC insulated cables and cords for

power lighting.

30. IS:722 - Three phase watt hour meters with MDI

31. IS:732 - Electrical wiring installation (upto 650V)

32. IS:1087 - Single pole tumbler switch 5 Amps.

33. IS:1248 - Direct reading electrical indicating

instruments.

34. IS:1255 - installation and maintenance of paper

insulated power cables upto 33 KV)

35. IS:1293 - 3 Pin lugs and sockets outlets.

36. IS:1554 - PVC insulated cables – heavy duty.

37. IS:1567 - Metal clad switches upto 100 Amps.

38. IS:1651 - Lead acid cell batteries.

39. IS:1653 - Rigid steel conduits for electric wiring.

40. IS:1771 - Industrial light fittings with accessories.

41. IS:6600 - Loading of oil immersed transformer.


318

42. IS:6946 - Reliable (flexible) non-metallic conduits

for electrical.

43. IS:7098 (Part-II) - For XLPE type cables.

44. IS:5216 - Guide for safely procedure and practices

in electric work.

45. IS:5578 - Guide for marking of insulated

conductors.

46. IS: 5792 - 11 kv drop out fuses.

47. IS:5820 - Pre-cast concrete cables covers.

48. IS:5908 - Method of measurement of electrical

installation in building.

49. IS:6381 - Specifications for construction and

testing of electrical apparatus.

50. IS:1818 - Isolation and earthing switches.

51. IS:1886 - Code practice for installation of transformers.

52. IS:1947 - Flood lights.

53. IS:2026 - Transformers.

54. IS:9242 - Degree of protection provided for

enclosure for switchgear.

55. IS:9242 - HRS cartridge fuse units upto 650 Volts.

56. IS:2251 - Code of practice for Danger Notice

Plates.

57. IS:2268 - Code bell/buzzers.

58. IS:2274 - Code of practice for wiring installation

(exceeding 650 Volts)

59. IS:3854 - Switches for domestic and similar

purpose.

60. IS:2312 - Exhaust fans.

61. IS:2309 - Code of practice for lighting protection.

62. IS:2418 - Tubular fluorescent lamps for general

lighting service.

63. IS:2544 - Porcelain post top insulators for BBW

Class.

64. IS:2509 - PVC electrical conduits.

65. IS:2516 - A.C. Circuit breakers.


319

66. IS:2667 - Fittings for rigid steel conduits for

electrical wiring.

67. IS:2692 - 11 KV drop out fuses.

68. IS:2575 - Enclosed distribution fuse boards and

cutouts for voltage upto 1000 V.

69. IS:2705 - Current transformer.

70. IS 14930 II - Double Walled Corrugated pipes of High

Density Polyethylene (HDPE) with couplings, tees,

sockets for cable protection.

The entire electrical installation work shall be strictly complied with the codes,

standards, rules and regulations framed under the Indian Electricity Act.

Further it shall be strictly carried out as per the regulations and rules set out by

“Tariff Advisory Committee and/or Fire Insurance Regulations”.

Some of the rules framed under the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 and all amendments thereof more particularly complied to :

35, 43, 44, 44-A, 45 (Part), 50, 51, 59, 61 (a), 61 (c), 62, 63 (2), 65, 66, 67, 68, 69 and 92(2).




320

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL FOR ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL ITEMS

Unless otherwise mentioned by one of the approved makes or brands shall be allowed to be used. Other specified ISI mark may be allowed to be used if approved by CIDCO.

The contractor shall distinctly understand that it will not be their prerogative to insist on a particular brand from the list. Final selection will be done with approval of the CIDCO.

Contractors shall specify for what brand they have quoted in case there is a large variation in the rates of different approved brands.

In case of delivery of any other serious problem which may affect the progress of the work the alternative make other than mentioned below may be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge on written request. However, the final decision of CIDCO will be binding on the contractor in the regard.

The contractor shall submit samples of all materials other than heavy equipment and obtain prior approval before procurement at site.

Sr. No.

Particulars Proposed List of Approved Makes

1 2 3

PVC Wires & Cables:

1 PVC Insulated 1.1 KV grade LT Cable

M/s. Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Dynamic Cables Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s. C&S Electric Ltd., M/s. Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s. Gemscab Industries Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh (Vishal), Gulmarg, Polycab

2 XLPE - LT Cables

M/s. Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Dynamic Cables Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s. C&S Electric Ltd., M/s. Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s. Gemscab Industries


321

Sr. No.


1 2 3

Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh (Vishal), Gulmarg. Polycab,

3 XLPE-HT cables upto 33 KV

M/s.Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Dynamic Cables Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s. Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s. Gemscab Industries Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh(Vishal), Gulmarg, Polycab, Torrent, Asian, Universal.

4 PVC Wires, Copper Aluminium Conductor, Flexible Cables.

M/s.Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Dynamic Cables Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s.Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s.Gemscab Industries Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh (Vishal), Gulmarg. Polycab, Indo Asian.

5 Heat Shrinkable Cable Jointing Kit

Raychem, Xicon, Benson, Mahindra (Push on) M-Seal, Yamuna

6 Cable Glands HME, EEW, Dowels.

7 Lugs Dowels, Lotus, A.G. Electricals.

8 Cable Tray-Ladder Type M/s. Pentax Ferro Incorporate, M/s.Bravo Cable Trays Pvt. Ltd., Sadhana, Profab, Indiana, Sharda.

9 ASCR Conductors

M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Dynamic Cables Pvt Ltd., V.K. Industries, Smita Conductors, Bombay Conductors Straight, MSEDCL Approved Make

10

PVC Pipes, Rigid PVC Conduits & Casing-N-Caping, DWC HDPE Pipes

M/s. Pricision Electricals, M/s. Super Plast Co., M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., Duraline, Garware, Popular, Prince.


322

Sr. No.


1 2 3

Switches, Switchgears

11 MCB, ELCB, RCCB

M/s C&S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian Standard Electrical, Leader Electricals (Leader Aplha Brand), Legrand, Anchor, L&T, Siemens, Bentec, Schnider Electric, Merlin Jerin, Hager,Hawells.

12 MCCB

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Standard Electrical, Indo Asian, Legrand, Switchgears, Anchor , L&T, Siemens, Bentec, Schnider Electric, Merlin Jerin, Hager, Hawells.

13 Isolators/Disconnectors, LV Switch gear/ Switch fuses.

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Standard Electrical, Indo Asian, Legrand, L &T

14 Distribution Board / Bus Duct

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt.Ltd., Indo Asian Switchgear, Standard Electrical, Legrand, Esprit Switchgear Ltd., Indiana Current Control (Versatrip)

15 Switches/Sockets M/s C & S Electric Ltd., Precision Electricals, Anchor, MK, Legrand, Elleys,

16 HC Fuse Distribution Board

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., CPL, Stenly, EE, Standard, Legrand

17 Rotary/Select Switches L&T , Siemens, Kaycee, EE

18 HRC Fuses & bases M/s C & S Electric Ltd. M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian Switchgear, Hawell's India Ltd.

19 Fuse switches/SW fuse M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., L&T, Siemens, Crompton,


323

Sr. No.


1 2 3

Telemechanique, Havells, Indo-Asian, EE, Standard, Legrand, Anchor

20 Ring Main Unit/HT switches & Fuse Unit

M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s C & S Electric Ltd. MEI, Southern, Andrew Yule, Schneider, ABB, CG Lucy, MSEDCL Approved

21 Air/Oil Circuit Breakers (HT/LT)

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Kilburn, Easun, MEI, Jyoti, Andrew Yule, Indo Asian, Siemens, L&T, GEC, Southern, BHEL, Telemechanique, Crompton, ABB, Schnider, MSEDCL Approved

22 Capacitor M/s C & S Electric Ltd., GEC, Khatau-Junkar, Crompton, L&T, Madhav, Atlanta, Arya, Prabhodhan, MSEDCL Approved

Luminaries, HID Lamps, High Mast Systems & Poles

23

LED Fixtures M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd., Polycab, Philips, Bajaj, Crompton Greaves, OSRAM, Syska. M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd.

24 Compact Fluorescent Lamps

M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd, M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton, Bajaj, Pierlite, Crompton, Osram

25 Lamps

M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd, M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd, M/s.Skipper ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton, Bajaj, Crompton, Osram,Wipro,Cema.

26 Street Light Luminaries / High Mast Luminaries

M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd, M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd., Polycab, M/s. HPL Electric


324

Sr. No.


1 2 3

& Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton, Bajaj, Crompton, Wipro, Canara, Syska.

27 Fluorescent Fixtures

M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd.,

M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd,

M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd, Polycab, M/s. HPL Electric

& Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton,

Bajaj, Crompton,Wipro,Canara,Syska, Genlec,

keselec,Glolite,Fixolite Industries,Pierlite,

28 Post top Lantern

M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd.,

M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd,

M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric

& Power Pvt. Ltd., Philips, Crompton, Bajaj,

Parimal,Wipro.

29 Chokes/Ignitors/Electronic Ballast

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Surya Roshni Ltd., M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd., Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd., Bajaj, Crompton, Philips, Wipro, Canara, Osaram.

30 Power Contactors

M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Surya Roshni Ltd., M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd., Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, L&T, Siemens, Bharti Cutler, Hammer, Telemechanique, HH-ELCON, Standard, Kirloskar, Crompton, Indo Asian, Schnider

31 Indicating Lamps M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Surya Roshni Ltd., M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd., Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, Teknic, L&T, Siemens.

32 RSJ Pole Sail, Tata, Zenith, Jindal, MSEDCL Approved

33 Steel tubular Poles M/s Skipper Limited, Bombay Tubes, Nityanand, Rajan Tubes, M/s. Transrail Lighting Ltd.


325

Sr. No.


1 2 3

34 GI Octagonal Poles M/s Skipper Limited. Zenith, Tata, Bajaj, M/s. Transrail Lighting Ltd.

35 G.I. Highmast M/s Skipper Limited, M/s.Surya Roshani Ltd. Bajaj, Philips, Crompton, B.P., Transrail Lighting Ltd.

36 Terminal Box, Bracket, Junction Box, Control Pillar.

ELM, United, Indo Asian, Super Panels, Anil Electric, BNN Power, Sintex

37 Street Light Controller/Timer

L&T (TSQ 100) 24 Hrs. Dial & Astronomical Timer Based, ELM, Surya, Selectron

38 HT/LT Insulator Kiran, Pactil, MSEDCL Approved

39 Pole Paint Jehnson & Nicholson, Asian Nerolac, Berger Paints India Ltd.

40 Energy Saver Device M/s BNN Power Siemens, Allen Bradley, Honewell, ABB, Crompton, Bajaj, Philips.

41 Feeder Pillar/Mini Pillar/ LT Panel

Anil Elect. Indo Asian, Super Panels, BNN Power, MSEDCL Approved, M/s. Vivid Electromech Pvt. Ltd

42 Ceiling / Table Fans / Air Circulators

Usha, Crompton, Bajaj, Cinni, Rallies, Orient, Polar, Almonard, Alfa., Havells

43 Motors Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar, Jyoti, BHEL, NGEF,Marathon.

44 Motor Protection Relays M/s.C&S Electric Ltd. Universal, Thresold, E.E., Minilac, Siemens, Indo-Asian, L&T.

45 Transformer

M/s.Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Nanda Trasformers, Tesla Transformers Ltd., Telawne Power Equipment Pvt.Ltd., Kirloskar, Bharat Bijlee, Crompton, Andrew Yule, Pactil, MSEDCL Approved

46 G.O.D. Switches & Dropout fuse outfit.

Kiran, Pactil, Atlas, Cona Industries, Leader Electricals, Elle Electricals.


326

Sr. No.


1 2 3

47 C.T./P.T. Hupken/Shriram.

48 Auto Transformer Starter

MEI, Kilburn, JMP, Siemens, Andrew Yule, GEC, KEC.

49 Trivector Meter Jaipur, L&T, Automatic Electric, MSEDCL Approved

50 Energy Meters - Analog Jaipur,Indo Asia, Meco, IMP, Rishbh, Automatic Electric, M/s. HPL Electric & Power Pvt Ltd., L&T, MSEDCL Approved

51 Energy Meter-Digital M/s. HPL Electric & Power Pvt Ltd., AE, Enercon, Schneider, L&T, MSEDCL Approved

52 Measuring Instruments IMP, AE,, MECO, L&T.

53 Current Transformer AE, Gilbert & Maxwell, IMP, Siemens, SEGC (C.S).

54 Alternators Kirloskar, Jyoti, NGEF, KEL, Cater Pillar, Stamford, Crompton Greaves.

55 Diesel Generator Set Kirloskar, Greaves Cotton, Cummins, Ashok Leyland, Cater Piller, Mahindra.

56 Flow Meters Signet, Monetek, Voryex.

57 Non Return Valve

M/s. AVK Valves India Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Durga Valves Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Kamala Valves and Engineering Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Avishkar Engineers Pvt.Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, IVC, Forbes.

58 Hydrant Valves

M/s. AVK Valves India Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Durga Valves Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Kamala Valves and Engineering Pvt. Ltd,M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Avishkar Engineers Pvt.Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, Priyanka, Newage, Arihant, Superex, Essel.

59 Chlorinator Penwalt, Shree Mitra Purification, Industrial Device.


327

Sr. No.


1 2 3

60 Hose Pipe Torent, Firemarshal, Firechief, Armtech.

61 Pressure Gauge Age, Guru, Febique.

62 Pressure Switch Danfoss, Infose, Precision.

63 Gun Metal Valve Sant, Zoloto.

64 Sluice Valve

M/s. AVK Valves India Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Durga Valves Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Kamala Valves and Engineering Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Avishkar Engineers Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, IVC, Gavane & Patil, Kalpana, Jash, Forbes, Aarcp, Jolta, Sant

65 Butterfly Valve

M/s. AVK Valves India Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Durga Valves Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Kamala Valves and Engineering Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Avishkar Engineers Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, M/s.Dynamic Valves Pvt Ltd., IVC, Gavane & Patil, Kalpana, Jash, Forbes.

66 Submersible Pump/ Horizontal Pumps/VT Pumps

M/s.Aqua Machineries Pvt. Ltd., M/s. CRI Pumps Pvt. Ltd., Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar, Mather & Platt, , KSB, Kishor, Flowmore, ABS, Grundfos, Flygt, Jyoti

Fire Fighting System:

67 Smoke Detectors M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd., Morley/ Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo

68 Fire Alarm Control Panel.

M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd. Morley/ Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo

69 Hooters/ Sounder M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd., Morley/ Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo,Shir Electronics, Philips, Bajaj.


328

Sr. No.


1 2 3

70 Manual Call Points M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd., Morley/ Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo

71 Addressable Modules M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt.Ltd., Morley/ Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo

72 Fire Alarm M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt.Ltd., Neolex / Lapp India / Geoflex.

73 Fire Detection System Honeywell, Siemens 74 Access Control System HID, Honeywell, Europlex, Schnider

75 VESDA (Smoke Detection System)

Honeywell, Xtralis, Simense

76 Water Leak Detection (WLD) System

Sontay, Raychem

77 Diesel Engine Cummins, Pai-Kane, Ashok Leyland, Volvo Panta, Kirloskar, Greaves Cotton, Cater Piller, Mahindra

78 UPS System Emerson, Numeric, APC, Microtek, Sukoya

79 Hi-wall Split AC Carrier, Blue Star, Samsung, Daikin, Hitachi, O General, LG, Whirlpool, Voltas

80 BMS System Honeywell, Siemens, Beckhoffm. 81 Load Manager Enercon / Sam / Krykard / Conzerve. 82 Lead Acid Battery Exide / Amco / Yuasa / Amar Raja/ Standard/ 83 Solar Panels M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., Moser Baer, Jain, TATA .

84 Elevators / Escalators

M/s Hephzi Elevators International Company Pvt. Ltd., M/s ThyssenKrupp Elevator (India) Pvt. Ltd., Shindler India Ltd., Escon Elevators Ltd., Kone, Eros, Otis, Mithsubishi.

85 Rodent Repellant System Maser 86 False Floor System Unitile, Kebao 87 False Ceiling System Arm strong, Techno Communication/ Telephone Cables:

88 Co-Axial, Telephone, Fire Cable

Bonton, Finolex, Polycab

89 TV cable Delton, National, Havels, Polycab, Phinolex


329

Sr. No.


1 2 3

90 Data Signal Cable KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), APAR Industries Ltd., Enercon / Lapp India, Polycab.

91 Control Cable with Copper Conductor

KEI Industries Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), APAR Industries Ltd., Enercon / Lapp India, Polycab., Finolex, Polycab, Bonton,.

92 Music Wire / Speaker Cable / Signal Cable CAT6

Lapp India / Falcon / Supercab / Molex/ Polycab, Crystal

93 Data Cabling ADC Krone/ Tyco, Digilink, AMP, Systimax

94 EPABX Matrix, Panasonic,NEC

95 PA System Honeywell, Philips, Ahuja, Bosch, ATIES

96 Audio System Bosch, Philips, EV, JBL, Sony, Panasonic, Pioneer.

97 CCTV System Honeywell, Europlex, Soney, Optix, Panasonic.

98 PAC Emerson, Stulz, Uniflair,APC, Liebert

99 Media Safe Godrej

100 Furniture Featherlite, Godrej

101 Water Cooler Voltas, Blue Star, Usha

102 Water Purifier Kent, Eureka Forbes, Hindustan Pureit, Aquanguard, Alpha.

103 Welding Electrode M/s Orange Electrodes Industries, M/s. Weldwell Electrodes.

104 Chain Pulley Block Elephanta, Herculas, WMI.

105 C.I./D.I./G.I. Pipes

M/s. Kejrival Casting Ltd., M/s. Electrosteel steels Ltd., M/s.Srikalahasthi Pipes Ltd., M/s.Jai Balaji Industries, M/s.Electrotherm (I) Ltd., M/s.Topworth Pipes and Tubes Pvt. Ltd. Lanco Industries Ltd., Jindal Saw Ltd., Tisco, Sail, Damoder, Shivdurg

106 RCC Pipes M/s Bharat Metal Pressing Industries, M/s.Sidhivinayak Precast Pipe Pvt Ltd., M/s. Shivam Industries, M/s.Pranali Cement Pipes Pvt Ltd., M/s


330

Sr. No.


1 2 3

Monika Industries, M/s Bharat Spun Pipe Industries, M/s Shivani Pipe Industries Pvt.Ltd.,.

107 VCB & RMU Panel M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s. Vivid Electromech Pvt. Ltd, MSEDCL Approved.

108 Fire Extinguisher M/s. United Fire Equipment Pvt.Ltd. Intine, Universal, Sapex, Naaz, Vintex

Note:

Contractor shall submit samples of materials and obtain prior approval of Engineer In-charge before procurement of any of the materials enlisted above and should ensure that the said product complies with specifications provided in schedule & Technical specification.

Unless and otherwise mentioned the make/brand mentioned under BOQ item shall only be used. The contractor shall distinctly understand that it will not be their prerogative to insist on a particular brand from the list. The bidders shall quote the rates accordingly.

In case of delivery of any serious problem which may affect the progress of the work the alternative makes mentioned above or equivalent make other than mentioned above may be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge on a written request if required. However the final decision of the Engineer-In-Charge will be binding on the contractor in this regard.

Any other vendor not included in the above approved make but having valid registration with CIDCO shall be considered.

In future any vendor registered /approved products during tender/contract period, the same will be considered subject to valid registration with CIDCO.

MSEDCL approved makes shall be applicable only for MSEDCL work carried out by CIDCO with the conditions mentioned above.




331

LIST OF DRAWINGS Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire Fighting

System at Sanpada Railway Station cum Commercial Complex on MBR Corridor, Navi Mumbai.

C.A. No. : 32/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18

Sr. No.

Particulars Drawing No.

1. SLD / Cable Layout 33/CIDCO/EE(ELECT-AP)/2016-17/01

2. Fire Fighting System Layout 33/CIDCO/EE(ELECT-AP)/2016-17/02

NOTE :

1) These drawings are for Bid purpose only.

2) All the drawing should be returned duly signed by the Bidders at the time of Submission of Bid.



Documents

OFFICE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (ELECT-PROJ.) CIDCO OF … · 2017-11-22 · 1.1.1 Supplying Main LT Panel, APFC Panel, Main DB, LED Fixtures, Street Lighting, CCTV / Telecommunication